DOC. N° 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev.

SACE Emax 2

Low voltage air circuit-breakers Emax E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2

Operating instructions for the design engineer

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A  |

Contents

Glossary......................................................................................... 3 Ekip Touch - Settings.................................................................127

1 - Main settings............................................................... 127
Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2........................................... 4
2 - Additional settings....................................................... 131
1 - Contents..........................................................................4
2 - Guide to the product choice............................................6 Ekip Touch - Test........................................................................133
3 - Selectivity between ABB SACE circuit-breakers............ 10 1 - Test.............................................................................. 133
4 - Documents and Tools for the design engineer............... 11
Ekip Touch - Additional functions.............................................135
Trip unit Overview........................................................................ 14 1 - Zone Selectivity........................................................... 135
1 - General characteristics.................................................. 14 2 - Generator protection.................................................... 138
2 - Ekip Touch models and versions.................................... 15 1 - Power Controller.......................................................... 139
3 - Accessories and software.............................................. 16 2 - Load Shedding............................................................ 140
4 - Operating features......................................................... 17 3 - IPS Interface protections............................................. 142

Ekip Dip........................................................................................ 18 Ekip Touch - Default...................................................................144

1 - Operator interface.......................................................... 18 1 - Ekip TOUCH default parameters.................................. 144
1 - Protections - Introduction.............................................. 20
Mechanical characteristics........................................................145
2 - Measurements............................................................... 27
1 - E1.2 description........................................................... 145
3 - Test................................................................................ 28
2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description.......................................... 153
4 - List of alarms and signals.............................................. 29
3 - Environmental conditions............................................. 163
5 - Additional functions....................................................... 31
4 - Installation................................................................... 165
6 - Default parameters........................................................ 34
5 - Technical characteristics.............................................. 173
Ekip Touch - Interface and menus.............................................. 35
Accessories................................................................................176
1 - Presentation of interface................................................ 35
1 - Overview...................................................................... 176
2 - Navigation...................................................................... 37
2 - Standard accessories.................................................. 179
3 - Graphic pages............................................................... 39
3 - Assembly and disassembly.......................................... 180
4 - Menu............................................................................. 43
4 - Introduction to the electronic accessories................... 182
5 - Changing parameters and commands........................... 48
Internal electronic accessories.................................................183
6 - PIN and security............................................................ 50
1 - Rating Plug.................................................................. 183
Ekip Touch - Protections............................................................. 51
2 - Measurement............................................................... 184
1 - Protections - Introduction.............................................. 51
3 - Ekip Signalling 4K........................................................ 186
2 - Standard Protections..................................................... 52
4 - Ekip LCD...................................................................... 189
3 - Voltage protections........................................................ 62
External electronic accessories................................................190
4 - Voltage Advanced protections....................................... 65
5 - Frequency protections................................................... 69 1 - Ekip Supply.................................................................. 190

6 - Power protections.......................................................... 72 2 - Ekip Com Modbus RTU............................................... 191

7 - ROCOF protections....................................................... 78 3 - Ekip Com Profibus DP................................................. 194

8 - Protection Adaptive....................................................... 79 4 - Ekip Com DeviceNet TM...................................................... 196

9 - Additional protections and functions.............................. 80 5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP............................................... 199

10 - Logic selectivity........................................................... 90 6 - Ekip Com Profinet........................................................ 203

11 - Performance table........................................................ 92 7 - Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM.................................................... 205

12 - Functions..................................................................... 95 8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850.................................................... 208

9 - Ekip Link...................................................................... 212
Ekip Touch - Measurements......................................................110
10 - Ekip Com Hub............................................................ 216
1 - Standard Measurements.............................................. 110
11 - Ekip Signalling 2K...................................................... 220
2 - Ekip Measuring Measurements.................................... 114
12 - Ekip Synchrocheck.................................................... 223
3 - Class 1 Power & Energy Metering................................ 117
13 - Ekip Signalling 3T...................................................... 229
4 - Datalogger................................................................... 118
5 - Network Analyzer......................................................... 120

© 2020 ABB SACE Emax 2 | I 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A

Other electronic accessories.....................................................232
1 - Ekip Signalling 10K...................................................... 232
2 - Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP........................................ 232
3 - Ekip Multimeter............................................................ 233
4 - Rc Toroid..................................................................... 233
5 - Toroid S.G.R................................................................ 233
- External neutral.............................................................. 234
6 - Ekip Com Actuator....................................................... 234
7 - Ekip AUP..................................................................... 234
8 - Ekip RTC...................................................................... 234
9 - Testing and Programming............................................ 235

Electrical accessories................................................................236
1 - Electrical control accessories...................................... 236
2 - Electrical signalling accessories................................... 240

Mechanical accessories............................................................248
1 - Mechanical Protection accessories.............................. 248
2 - Mechanical safety accessories.................................... 250
3 - Mechanical Interlocks.................................................. 255

Alarms or failures.......................................................................256
1 - Identification of alarms or failures................................ 256
2 - Self-diagnosis.............................................................. 262

Predictive analysis program......................................................264

1 - Presentation................................................................. 264
2 - Service offers............................................................... 265

Service........................................................................................266
1 - Power Care.................................................................. 266

II | © 2020 ABB SACE Emax 2 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Glossary
Term Description
SACE Emax 2 New series of ABB SACE air circuit-breakers
CB Circuit-breaker
Trip unit / Protection Electronic unit connected to the CB (Mainboard), which provides measuring, monitoring and protection functions
release for the CB if faulty operating conditions occur. In the event of an alarm, it commands a TRIP
Mainboard Electronic board of the CB to which the Trip Unit and all the main accessories and electronic actuators connect
Ekip Dip Trip unit SACE Emax 2 CBs, equipped with dip-switch type interface
Ekip Touch Trip unit for SACE Emax 2 CBs, equipped with touchscreen display and available in four different versions
Trip unit for SACE Emax 2 CBs, equipped with LCD display; alternative to Ekip Touch for applications in particular
Ekip LCD
environmental conditions
Trip coil CB opening actuator controlled directly by Trip unit
Concluding action of protection timing or a test command which, except in special configurations applicable to the
TRIP trip unit, coincides with activation of the trip coil, which instantly opens the bars of each pole and interrupts the
circulating current
Vaux Auxiliary power supply
4P / 3P / 3P + N CB configuration: four-pole (4P), three-pole (3P) and three-pole with external neutral (3P + N)
If Fault current measured by Trip unit, useful for calculating the trip time t t

3 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Glossary |

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2

1 - Contents

Foreword SACE Emax 2 is the new series of low voltage air circuit-breakers up to 6300 A, designed for managing all low
voltage electrical installations with the maximum efficiency: from industrial installations, marine applications,
conventional power generation and renewable energy installations, to buildings, malls, data centers and
communication networks.

Overview This manual contains all the useful information for:

• Facilitating the choice of the product and of the features required.
• Rapid access to all the necessary information for proper design.
• Proper use of all the features available with the solid-state protection trip units.
• All the supporting documentation.
• Link to management software.

recipients This manual refers to two user profiles, as defined by standard IEC 60050:
• skilled person, in the electrical field (IEV 195-04-01): person with relevant education, training, knowledge
and experience to enable him or her to perceive risks and to avoid danger which electricity can create
• instructed person, in the electrical field (IEV 195-04-02): person adequately advised or supervised by
electrically skilled persons to enjable him or her to perceive risks and to avoid danger which electricity
can create
IMPORTANT: operations which can be performed by persons trained on the subject
of electricity are specifically indicated in this manual. All the remaining operations
described in this manual must be performed by skilled persons, in the field of
electricity. ABB declines all liability for damage to persons or property caused by
failure to comply with the instructions in this document.

Specifications and supporting To ensure that the Emax 2 circuit-breaker is installed and configured correctly, please read the information in
documents this manual and in the technical documentation of the product, supplied with the circuit-breaker or available
in the website ABB library
Document Description
Installation, operation and maintenance instructions for Sace Emax E1.2 CBs
1SDH000999R0002
and Ekip Dip Trip units
Installation, operation and maintenance instructions for Sace Emax E2.2-
1SDH001000R0002
E4.2-E6.2 CBs and Ekip Dip Trip units
1SDH001316R1002 Manual of Ekip Touch Trip units for Sace Emax 2 CBs
1SDH001140R0001 Communication System Interface for Emax 2 CBs
1SDC200023D0906 Sace Emax 2 CBs General catalog
1SDM000091R0001 Sace Emax 2 CBs Circuit diagrams

WARNING! carefully read the instructions for putting into service and maintenance
given in the installation manuals 1SDH000999R0002 (for E1.2) or 1SDH001000R0002
(for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2).

Design notes The information in this manual was written in Italian and then translated into other languages to conform to
the laws and/or commercial requirements concerning the product.

4 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 1 - Contents

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Regulations Emax 2 circuit-breakers and their accessories comply with the following international standards:
• IEC 60947
• EN 60947
• CEI EN 60947
• IEC 61000
• UL 1066

They comply with the following EC directives:

• "Low Voltage Directives" (LVD) No. 2006/95/EC
• "Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive" (EMC) No. 2004/108/EC

Emax 2 circuit-breakers also feature a range certified according to these standards:

• Russian - GOST (Russia Certificate of Conformity)
• Chinese - China CCC (China Compulsory Certification)

5 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 1 - Contents

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Guide to the product choice

Foreword The circuit-breaker must check and protect , in case of failure and malfunction, the installation components
that are connected to it. To perform this function, Emax 2 circuit-breakers offer a series of options, that can
be selected by the user according to the particular requirements of the installation.
For a good design, the main characteristics the components must be selected with the greatest care.
In order to help the design engineers in selecting the Emax2 circuit-breakers, a sheet is provided below
containing the main selection criteria for air circuit-breakers. This sheet can be completed (in whole or in part)
by the design engineer to guide subsequent design choices and can be used by the client for work contracts.
Besisdes, this sheet is a useful tool for rapid configuration in CAT selection software.

Device Type of device

Circuit-breaker
Switch-disconnector

Standard Reference standard

IEC (EN 60947-2)
UL (UL 1066-ANSI C37.50)

Mechanical characteristics Insulation function

Yes
No
Nº poles
3
4
Installation version
Fixed
Withdrawable
Terminals
Horizontal/Vertical
Spread
Front
Extended front
Spread front
Floor
For 4x240 FcCuAl cable

NOTE: consult the technical catalog for details about the terminals.

6 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 2 - Guide to the product choice
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Electrical characteristics Service rated voltage

400 V AC
415 V AC
500 V AC
525 V AC
690 V AC
______ V AC
Rated uninterrupted current (40°C) (Iu)
100 A 800 A 2500 A
200 A 1000 A 3200 A
250 A 1200 A 4000 A
400 A 1250 A 5000 A
600 A 1600 A 6000 A
630 A 2000 A 6300 A
Ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (lcu)
42 kA 120 kA
50 kA 130 kA
66 kA 150 kA
85 kA 200 kA
100 KA a ______ V:
Service short-circuit breaking capacity (lcs)
According to the reference standard:______ % of Icu
Admissible rated short-time withstand current (Icw)
Without intentional delay (class A)
With intentional time-delay (category B):
1 s Icw ______ kA
3 s Icw ______ kA

NOTE: make sure that the combination of all the electrical values selected is available. Consult
the technical catalog for further details.

7 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 2 - Guide to the product choice
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Electronic protections Ekip Dip can be configured with the following protections:

Current protections
Overload (L - ANSI 49)
Time-delayed overcurrent
Instantaneous overcurrent (l - ANSI 50)
Earth fault current (G - ANSI 51N & 50N TD)

Ekip Touch can be configured with the following protections:

NOTE: the protections are either present by default or must be installed by means of an
additional package, depending on the Trip unit model and version (consult Trip unit
Overview for details)

Current protections
Overload (L - ANSI 49)
Time-delayed overcurrent
Second time-delayed overcurrent (S2 – ANSI 50TD)
Instantaneous overcurrent (l - ANSI 50)
Earth fault current (G - ANSI 51N & 50N TD)
Zone selectivity for S, I and G protections (ANSI 68)
Directional overcurrent (D – ANSI 67)
Zone selectivity for D protection (ANSI 68)
Programmable instantaneous overcurrent (2I - ANSI 50)
Earth fault current with external toroid (Gext - ANSI 51G & 50GTD)
Modified differential ground fault (MDGF)
Residual current (Rc – ANSI 64 & 50 NTD)
Current unbalance (IU – ANSI 46)
Voltage controlled overcurrent (S(V) - ANSI 51V)
Second voltage controlled overpower (S2(V) - ANSI 51V)
Voltage protections
Undervoltage (UV - ANSI 27)
Overvoltage (OV - ANSI 59)
Second undervoltage protection (UV2– ANSI 27)
Second overvoltage protection (OV2– ANSI 59)
Voltage unbalance (VU – ANSI 47)
Cyclical direction of the phases (ANSI 47)
Residual overvoltage (RV – ANSI 59N)
Frequency protections
Underfrequency (UF - ANSI 81L)
Overfrequency (OF - ANSI 81H)
Second minimum frequency protection (UF2– ANSI 87L)
Second maximum frequency protection (OF2 – ANSI 87H)
Rate of change of frequency (ROCOF – ANSI 81R)
Power protections
Reverse active power (RP - ANSI 32R)
Power factor (ANSI 78)
Loss of field or reverse reactive power (RQ – ANSI 40 or 32RQ)
Reactive overpower (OQ – ANSI 32OF)
Active overpower (OP – ANSI 32OF)
Active underpower (UP – ANSI 32LF)
Miscellaneous protections
Synchronism between two supply sources - Synchrocheck (SC - ANSI 25)
Interface protections (IPS)

8 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 2 - Guide to the product choice
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Electrical and mechanical Electrical signalling

accessories
Open/closed auxiliary contacts - AUX
Ready to close signalling contact - RTC
Ready to close signalling contact Ekip – RTC
Ekip protection trip unit tripping signalling contact – S51
Remote resetting - YR
Service trip units
First and second opening coil - YO
First and second closing coil - YC
Undervoltage coil - YU
Motor operator
Motor
Protections
Protection device for opening and closing push buttons - PBC
Compartment door flange
Terminal-covers and separators
High terminal-covers - HTC
Low terminal-covers - LTC
Phase separators PB
Other accessories
mechanical operation counter - MOC

NOTE: for full details on Emax 2 electrical and mechanical accessories see chapter “ Electrical
accessories” starting on page 236.

Electronic accessories Electronic accessories

Measurement Module - Protection and measurements of voltage, power and energy
Ekip Signalling 10K/ 4K/ 2K/ 3T/ Modbus TCP - Programmable input and output contacts
Ekip Supply - Power supply for trip units and modules
Ekip COM - Communication with multiple protocols
Ekip Synchrochek - Synchronism between two power supply sources
Ekip Multimeter - Power supply and measurements from switchgear front
Ekip LCD - Interface with LCD display for particular environmental conditions

NOTE: for full details on Emax 2 electronic accessories see chapter “Accessories” starting
on page 176.

9 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 2 - Guide to the product choice
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Selectivity between ABB SACE circuit-breakers

Foreword It is possible to obtain selectivity between ABB SACE circuit-breakers (including Emax 2).
There is selectivity in an installation when, in the event of an overload or short-circuit, it is possible to identify
and isolate the point of overload or fault by opening only some circuit-breakers to guarantee service continuity
to the installation.
NOTE: selectivity is recommended in all installations with multiple switchgears or circuit-
breakers connected, for example cascading or in a tree (with a main circuit-breaker on
the supply side, and other circuit-breakers downstream to protect areas on the other side).
Thus, only the circuit-breaker immediately upstream the overload or fault trips, and avoids
opening of the circuit-breakers further upstream.

Types of selectivity With ABB SACE electronic trip units selectivity can be:
• Current-based selectivity, activated in the event of over-current, and in which the protections of the
trip units are set with different current thresholds, based on the principle the closer the fault point is to the
power supply the greater the current will be.
• Time selectivity, activated in the event of a short-circuit in which the S protection normally trips, and in
which the protections of the trip units are set with different tripping times, so that with cascading circuit-
breakers the circuit-breakers further downstream open before those further upstream.
• Time-current selectivity, which is a combination of the previously mentioned types, and in which the
protections of the trip units are set so that the tripping times and current thresholds increase with proximity
to the power supply.
• Energy selectivity, which uses current-limiting circuit-breakers, characterized by extremely short tripping
times in the event of a short-circuit to avoid the current reaching the peak value (in the case of ABB SACE
circuit-breakers, for example, all the moulded-case circuit-breakers of the Tmax series and certain air
circuit-breakers of the Emax series are limiters).
• Zone Selectivity, which is an evolution of time selectivity, and in which is a dialog created between the
trip units by means of output and input blocking signals. For more information on Zone Selectivity with ABB
SACE circuit-breakers and in particular Emax 2, see the chapter “1 - Zone Selectivity" starting on page 135.

Further documents For each type of selectivity, the protections must be set so that only those circuit-breakers capable of isolating
the overload or fault open, without the rest of the installation being de-energized. Relevant definitions, operating
principles, areas of application, advantages and disadvantages, requirements, indications for setting the
protections and examples are provided in the Technical Application Paper QT1 1SDC007100G0205 "Low
voltage selectivity with ABB circuit-breakers".

10 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 3 - Selectivity between ABB SACE circuit-breakers
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

4 - Documents and Tools for the design engineer

Supporting software Different softwares are available; the majority are free of charge and are designed to facilitate, optimize and
extend the functions and configurations of SACE Emax 2 in your installation:

Ekip Connect 3
ABB software to interface with Ekip Touch and other low voltage devices (Link)

EPiC
ABB APP to interface with Ekip Touch using a smartphone / tablet via Bluetooth (Link)

Ekip View
ABB software which supervises the communication network, analyzes the trend of the electricity values and
monitors the plant conditions (1SDH001276R0001)
NOTE: the link launches the software package download, which requires about 1.3 Gb of
space.

e-Design
ABB software suite (Link) which includes the following tools:
• DOC, to design the single-line diagrams of low and medium voltage electrical installations, choose the
operating and protection devices and check and coordinate the protections
• CAT, for technical / commercial cost estimating of ABB products
• Curves, for drawing, calibrating and printing the trip curves of the protection devices
• OTC, for assessing the thermal behavior of the switchgear and sizing its fans and air conditioners
• UniSec, for configuring medium voltage switchgear

Front CAD
Software comprising libraries of block graphics for ABB panel-making products to be used with the latest
versions of AutoCAD, AutoCAD LT, IntelliCAD (Link)

Slide Rules
App for sizing low voltage electrical cables according to the installation methods specified by current
regulations and installation practices.
Further information on the documentation is available on the Apple Store, in particular: Slide rules.

11 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 4 - Documents and Tools for the design engineer
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Further documents Various documents available free of charge in the ABB libraries describe SACE Emax 2 and the functions it
supports:

Brochure: introductory overview

Main features of SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers (1SDC200023B0201)

Brochure: History of air circuit-breakers

Presentation of the origin and evolution of ABB air circuit-breakers ABB for low voltage applications
(1SDC200024B0201)

Brochure: retrofitting kit

Overview of retrofitting kits for New Emax circuit-breakers (1SDC200034L0202)

Product notes for consultants

General overview of the features of Emax 2 circuit-breakers, specifically for consultants (1SDC200032L0201)

Product notes for switchgear engineers

General overview of the features of Emax 2 circuit-breakers, specifically for switchgear engineers
(1SDC200028L0201)

Product notes the Ekip Link system

Introduction to the new Ekip Link switchgear control system (1SDC200031L0202)

Product notes for Power Controller

Introduction to the new Power Controller load management system (1SDC200030L0202)

Product notes for generator protections

General features for the new generator protections available with Emax 2 protection trip units
(1SDC200035L0202)

Product notes: migration to Emax 2

Advantages and details of migration from New Emax to Emax 2 circuit-breakers (1SDC200036L0201)

White Paper for generator protections

White Paper on generator protections (1SDC007409G0202)

White Paper for Ekip Power Controller

White Paper on the Power Controller function (1SDC007410G0202)

White Paper for communication

White paper of communication modules for Emax 2 (1SDC007412G0201)

Continued on the next page

12 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 4 - Documents and Tools for the design engineer
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Product Notes for IEC 61850

Overview of the new IEC 61850 communication modules (1SDC200038L0201)

Product notes for Network Analyzer

Introduction to the new Network Analyzer measurement and analysis system (1SDC200037L0202)

Catalogue
Emax 2 general catalogue (1SDC200023D0209)

Handbook
The purpose of this manual for electrical installations is to provide designers and users of such installations
with rapidly consulted reference material (1SDC010002D0206)

IPS
White paper on the Interface protection System (IPS) and Interface Device (DDI) (1SDC007117G0202)

Load shedding
White paper on Load Shedding - Load shedding priority (1SDC007119G0201)

Synchronism and reclosing

White paper for Synchro reclosing synchronization solutions (1SDC007118G0201)

13 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Circuit-breakers E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 | 4 - Documents and Tools for the design engineer
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Trip unit Overview

1 - General characteristics

Families SACE Emax 2 can be configured to operate with two Trip unit families:
• Ekip Dip with interface via dip-switches
• Ekip Touch with touchscreen display
Both families provide protection and measuring functions related to signals from the installation and are
available in different models and versions.
There are four Ekip Touch models available:
• Ekip Touch
• Ekip Hi-Touch
• Ekip G Touch
• Ekip G-Hi Touch
All Ekip Touch models are also available in the version with LCD display for installations situated in particularly
aggressive environmental conditions.

Main functions Ekip Dip and Ekip Touch provides the following functions:
1. Measurement: measurement of different quantities, such as: current, voltage, power, energy
2. Protection: depending on the measurements made and the parameters configured by the user, the
Trip unit checks for the presence of alarms and commands circuit-breaker opening if necessary
3. Signalling: management of contacts and communication networks to optimize plant efficiency,
communication among different CB and other functions
The functions are provided both by transducers and actuators inside the circuit-breaker, and by means of a
vast range of external accessories.

Presentation

Figure 1 Figure 2

Ekip Dip has a dip-switch (1) interface for configuring and verifying the protections and main parameters
(page 18).
Ekip Touch has a touchscreen display (1) for accessing the configuration menus and checking parameters,
measurements and information (page 35).
The nominal size of the Rating plug (2) can be checked on the front.
All the external connections, including the supply and communication modules, the external sensors and
mechanical accessories, are available in the upper terminal box (3) (page 16 for an overview of the electronic
accessories).

14 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Trip unit Overview | 1 - General characteristics
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Ekip Touch models and versions

Default functions and Every Ekip Touch module has default measurement and protection functions, which can be extended with the
extensions aid of additional software packages.
The extensions (additional SW packages) can be pre-engineered when the circuit-breaker is ordered or at a
later date (in this case, via ABB Ability Marketplace TM

Overview

Figure 3

Ekip Ekip Ekip G

Model Ekip Touch
Hi-Touch G Touch Hi-Touch Page
Versions LSI, LSIG LSI, LSIG LSIG LSIG
Standard protections X X X X 52
Voltage protections O (1) X X (3) X 62
Voltage advanced
O (1) O X (3) X 65
protections
Frequency protections O (1) X X (3) X 69
Power protections O (1)
X (3)
X (3) X 72
ROCOF protections O (1)
O O X 78
Adaptive protections O X O X 79
Standard Measurements X X X X 110
Ekip Measuring
O X X X 114
Measurements
Class 1 Power & Energy
O (2) X O X 117
Metering
Datalogger O (1) X X X 118
Network Analyzer O (1)
X O X 120

X = Available by default; O = Optional

(1)
Configurable if Measuring Measurements package is present
(2)
Only available at the time circuit-breaker is ordered
(3)
Certain protections of the complete package are available by default; the remaining ones can be activated
on request

15 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Trip unit Overview | 2 - Ekip Touch models and versions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Accessories and software

Internal and external The functions of Ekip Touch can be expanded by further internal and external accessories, which differ as to
accessories function and assembly position; certain accessories can also be configured with Ekip Dip.

Internal modules
Name Function Page
Measurement (1) Measurement and supply from installation voltages 184
Ekip Signalling 4K (2)(5) Programmable digital inputs/outputs 186
Ekip LCD LCD interface for aggressive environments 189
Rating Plug (3)(6) Defines rated current In 183

External modules for assembly in upper terminal box(5):

Name Description Page
Ekip Supply (6) Power supply of Trip unit and modules in terminal box 190
Communication between Trip unit and external buses (various
Ekip Com (4) 191
protocols)
Communication between Trip units via an intranet with ABB
Ekip Link (4)(6) 212
proprietary protocol
Ekip Signalling 2K Programmable digital inputs/outputs 220
Ekip Signalling 3T Measurement from current loop and temperature sensors 229
Measurement of an external voltage and management of synchronism
Ekip Synchrocheck 223
between two supply sources

Other external modules and accessories:

Name Description Page
Ekip Signalling 10K (5)(6) Programmable digital inputs/outputs 232
Ekip Multimeter (5)(6) Panel front display 233
Toroid S.G.R. Sensor for protection from earth fault currents 233
Toroid Rc Sensor for protection from residual currents 233
External neutral (6)
Sensor for protecting the external neutral line with 3P circuit-breaker 234

In addition, the supervision, configuration and reporting functions are provided by further modules for
temporary communication and supply:
Name Description Page
Ekip TT (6) Supply and tests
Ekip T&P (6) Supply, communication, programming and tests 235
Ekip Programming (6)
Supply, communication and programming

(1)
Version and availability of the module depend on the Trip unit model and on activation of the measurements
package
(2)
Configurable with circuit-breakers E2.2, E4.2 and E6.2
(3)
Assembled by default at the time equipment is ordered; can be replaced afterwards with a model of a
different size
(4)
Always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC
(5)
Presence of auxiliary supply required and, for terminal box models, of Ekip Supply
(6)
Accessory also available and compatible with Ekip Dip

Additional functions Ekip Touch can be equipped with further software configurations compliant with different functional
applications:
• Power Controller
• Load Shedding
• Interface protections (IPS)
• Synchro reclosing
• Embedded ATS
For details consult the Technical catalog or the summary documents of each function (page 11).

16 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Trip unit Overview | 3 - Accessories and software
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

4 - Operating features

Introduction Ekip Dip and Ekip Touch have been developed and certified to function in specific environmental, electrical
and mechanical conditions; full details are available in the Technical catalog (page 13).
The following sections describe the electrical and power supply characteristics that enable Trip unit and the
relative electronic accessories to operate correctly.

Electrical characteristics The Ekip Touch and Ekip Dip measurement and protection functions described in this document are provided
with primary voltage and current values within the following nominal ranges:
Parameter Rated operating range
Primary current 0,004 ÷ 16 In (1)
Primary voltage 5 ÷ 690 V AC (2)
Rated frequency 45 ... 55 Hz (with fn= 50 Hz) / 54 ... 66 Hz (with fn= 60 Hz)
Peak factor Complying with standard IEC 60947-2

(1)
range with reference to each phase; In refers to the rated size defined by the Rating plug installed on the Trip
unit, available in models from 100 A to 6300 A, depending on the circuit-breaker model used
(2)
for Ekip Touch rated highest line-to-line voltage connected directly to Trip unit, also to sockets inside the
CB; external transformers must be used for higher voltage values, consult the chapter dedicated to the
Measurement modules

Self-supply The internal current sensors are able to supply the Trip unit directly; Ekip Touch versions Hi-, G, G Hi- are also
fitted with the Measurement enabler with voltage sockets module, which allows the Trip unit to be supplied
by the installation voltages as well:
Parameter Operating limits
> 30 A (E1.2-E2-2-E4.2 with Rating Plug < 400 A)
Minimum three-phase turn-on current > 80 A (E1.2-E2-2-E4.2 with Rating Plug ≥ 400 A)
> 160 A (E6.2)
Minimum three-phase turn-on voltage > 80 V

Auxiliary power supply Ekip Dip and Ekip Touch can be connected to an external auxiliary supply source, which is useful for activating
certain functions such as communication via Local Bus, recording manual operations, certain measurements
and the datalogger if available.
The auxiliary supply can be provided by modules from the Ekip Supply range or by direct connection to the
terminal box.
Direct connection must guarantee the following operating conditions:
Parameter Operating limits
Voltage 24 V DC galvanically isolated
Tolerance ±10%
Maximum ripple ±5%
Maximum inrush current @ 24 V 10 A per 5 ms
Maximum rated power @ 24 V 4W
Insulated with grounding cable (same characteristics as Belden
Connection cable
3105A/B or higher)

IMPORTANT: if connection is direct, the power supply must be galvanically insulated

and provide the insulation characteristics established by standard IEC 60950 (UL
1950) or equivalent.

17 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Trip unit Overview | 4 - Operating features
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Ekip Dip

1 - Operator interface

Introduction The operator interface of the Ekip Dip protection trip unit allows you to:
• Set the parameters relating to the available protections.
• View the status of the trip unit and alarms.
• Connect to the frontal connector to communicate and perform the opening test.

Components of the interface The Ekip Dip operator interface appears as follows:

Figure 4

The following table provides a description of the components of the interface:

Position Type Description
A L Protection LED (alarm and trip)
B L Protection LED (pre-alarm)
C S Protection LED (alarm and trip)
LED
D I Protection LED (trip)
E G Protection LED (alarm and trip)
F Power-on LED (trip unit powered and on)
G L Protection dip-switch (threshold I1)
H Protections: S Protection dip-switch (threshold I2)
I thresholds I Protection dip-switch (threshold I3)
L G Protection dip-switch (threshold I4)
M L Protection dip-switch (time t1)
N Protections: times S Protection dip-switch (time t2 and type of curve)
O G Protection dip-switch (time t4 and type of curve)
P Settings Neutral and frequency dip-switch
Q Test pushbutton
Test
R Test connector

IMPORTANT: the figure above refers to an Ekip Dip, LSIG version. In the case of Ekip
Dip LI or LSI versions, LEDs and dip-switches related only to the protections
present are available.

LEDs The LEDs are useful on Ekip Dip in order to distinguish and identify various types of information on the
protection trip unit, the circuit-breaker and state of the line currents.

Operational conditions
The operation of the LED is determined by the power supply conditions of the trip unit:
• With the trip unit energized (by current sensors or by auxiliary power supply or by Ekip TT or by Ekip T&P)
the LEDs are operational for all the signals.
• With the trip unit de-energized, the LEDs are limited to the signalling of the last switch-off or trip event
(combined with the check via iTest, described below).

Continued on the next page

18 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 1 - Operator interface
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

NOTE: with the trip unit off, the operation of the LEDs is guaranteed if the internal battery of
the trip unit is working properly.

About
The LEDs combined with the protections provide various information, through different combinations of
lighting and blinking.
NOTE: all the combinations related to protection LED signals are described in chapter Self-
diagnosis and signalling , on page 29.

The power-on LED provides information about the power status of the protection trip unit:
• LED on (default configuration) fixed or blinking, signals trip unit energized.
• LED off signals trip unit de-energized.
NOTE: with Ekip T&P module and Ekip Connect software, it is possible to configure how the
power LED functions (LED fixed or blinking).

Protections: thresholds The thresholds of all the protections can be modified with various dip-switches, as specified on the serigraph
of the interface.
The values of the protections make reference to the current In, a nominal value defined by the Rating Plug.
IMPORTANT:
• Modification of the thresholds must be performed in the absence of protection
alarms.
• Modifications carried out in alarm conditions are accepted by the trip unit when resting
condition is restored (absence of protection alarms).

Protections: times The times and the curves of the protections can be modified with various dip-switches, as specified on the
serigraph of the interface.
IMPORTANT:
• Modification of the times must be performed in the absence of protection alarms.
• Modifications carried out in alarm conditions are accepted by the trip unit when resting
condition is restored (absence of protection alarms).

Settings Two further settings are available:

• Neutral allows activation and adjustment of the protections on the neutral pole.
• Frequency allows the selection of the installation frequency.

iTest pushbutton The iTest pushbutton is useful for three operations:

• Perform tests (circuit-breaker opening test and LED test). Consult chapter 3 - Test on page 28.
• Reset the signal of the tripped protection. This operation can be performed when the circuit-breaker is
both open and closed and with currents present, by pressing the push-button for about 1 second (the
signal disappears when the push-button is released).
• With the trip unit off, check the information relating to the switch-off or tripping event.
NOTE: with the trip unit off, pressing of the iTest button switches on (for approximately 4
seconds):

• the power-on LED, if the trip unit is off due to an energy drop (primary current less than the
minimum level of operation, removal of auxiliary power supply with circuit-breaker open, etc…).
• the protection tripped LED if the trip unit is off due to a protection trip.

Test connector The test connector allows the connection of Ekip TT and Ekip T&P modules, in order to perform the following
operations:
• Temporary energizing of the trip unit to check the status, and perform the trip test (option possible with
all the front interface modules).
• Analysis, supervision and setting of additional parameters through external communication test units
(Ekip T&P).

19 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 1 - Operator interface

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

1 - Protections - Introduction

Operating principle The protection functions are available with all Ekip Dip versions.
1. If the signal measured exceeds the set threshold, the specific protection activates (prealarm and/or
alarm).
2. The alarm appears on the display and, after a period of time (timing t t), depending on the protection
parameters set, can convert into a trip command (TRIP) transmitted to the internal Trip coil of the
CB.
NOTE:

• if the signal measured drops below the set threshold before the trip time has elapsed, Ekip Dip
quits the alarm and/or timing state and returns to the normal operating condition
• all protections have a default configuration: check the parameters and change to suit the
installation requirements before putting into service
• to allow circuit-breaker tripping to be controlled by a specific protection, the protection itself
must be enabled

L Protection L protection protects against overloads

NOTE: the protection is available and active for all the versions of the trip unit.

When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips in a time that decreases as the current read
t I1 L increases.

Parameters
t1 All the parameters that can be modified by the user affect the response curve, and related tripping times.

I Parameter Description
The value I1 contributes in calculating the tripping time, and also defines the current
value that, if exceeded, activates the protection (with reference to the curve, it is the
part parallel to the y-axis).

Threshold I1 IMPORTANT:
• The protection is activated and starts timing for currents between
1.05 and 1.2 of the threshold I1 set (1).
• The delay is interrupted if the current drops below the activation
threshold.
The value t1 contributes in calculating the tripping time (with reference to the curve,
T1 affects the entire curve by shifting it as a whole along the y-axis).

Time t1 IMPORTANT:
The protection limits the tripping time to 1 second in two cases:
• if, according to the calculation, the time is less than 1 second.
• If the fault current is greater than 12 In.

Example (with I1 set to 400 A): the protection is activated for currents between 420 A and
(1)

480 A.

With the module Ekip T&P and with the Ekip Connect software, it is possible to activate the function Thermal
Memory, and adjust the threshold of Pre-alarm.

20 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

S Protection S protection protects against selective short circuit.

NOTE: the protection is available for LSI and LSIG versions of the trip unit.

When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed or dynamic time (the time
t I2 S decreases as the current reading increases).

Parameters
t2 All the parameters that can be modified by the user affect the response curve, and related tripping times.
Parameter Description
I Enable By setting the threshold dip-switches to the Off position, the protection is disabled.
It determines the dynamic of the curve and the tripping time, fixed or dynamic
according to the selection:
Type of curve
NOTE: calculation of the tripping time of the inverse time curve is based on a
mathematical expression. The details are provided in the table on page 26.
It defines the current value that activates the protection when exceeded (with
reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the y-axis).

IMPORTANT:
Threshold I2
• The I2 threshold set must be higher than the I1 threshold. An
incorrect configuration returns an alarm signal.
• The delay is interrupted if the current drops below the activation
threshold.
The selected function determines the contribution of t2:
• Fixed time: t2 is the delay time between exceeding the I2 threshold and sending
the opening command.
• Dynamic time: t2 contributes in calculating the tripping time (with reference to the
curve, t2 affects the entire curve, shifting it as a whole along the vertical axis).
Time t2
IMPORTANT:
• The minimum tripping time of the protection is t2. If, according to
the calculation, the tripping time is less, it is automatically limited to t2.
• For all the UL versions, the maximum time allowed is 0.4 s. If a
higher value is set, the trip unit signals the error and forces the parameter to
0.4 s.

With the module Ekip T&P and with the Ekip Connect software, it is possible to activate the function Thermal
Memory.

21 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

I Protection I protection protects against instantaneous short circuit.

When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed non-adjustable time.

Parameters
t I3 I The user can set the intervention threshold.
Parameter Description
t3 Enable By setting the threshold dip-switches to the Off position, the protection is disabled.
It defines the current value that activates the protection when exceeded (with
reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the y-axis).
I Threshold I3
IMPORTANT: The I3 threshold set must be higher than the I2
threshold. An incorrect configuration returns an alarm signal.

22 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

G Protection G protection protects against a ground fault.

NOTE: the protection is available for the LSIG version of the trip unit.

When the activation threshold is exceeded, the protection trips within a fixed or dynamic time (the time
t I4 G decreases as the current reading increases).

Parameters
t4 All the parameters that can be modified by the user affect the response curve, and related tripping times.
Parameter Description
I By setting the dip-switches of the threshold in one of the available combinations
other than Off, the protection is enabled.
If enabled, the protection is inhibited automatically by the trip unit under two
conditions:
• Disconnection of one or more current sensors.
• Current measured on one of the phases higher than a maximum value.
Enable
IMPORTANT: the maximum current value that deactivates G protection
varies according to the threshold set:
• 8 In (with I4 ≥ 0.8 In)
• 6 In (with 0.5 In ≤ I4 < 0.8 In)
• 4 In (with 0.2 In ≤ I4 < 0.5 In)
• 2 In (with I4 < 0.2 In)
It determines the dynamic of the curve and the tripping time, fixed or dynamic
according to the selection:
Type of curve
NOTE: calculation of the tripping time of the inverse time curve is based on a
mathematical expression. The details are provided in the table on page 26.
It defines the current value that activates the protection when exceeded (with
reference to the curve, it is the part parallel to the y-axis).

IMPORTANT:
Threshold I4 • The delay is interrupted if the current drops below the tripping
threshold.
• For all the UL versions the maximum threshold allowed by the trip
unit is 1200 A. If a higher value is set, the trip unit signals the error and
forces the parameter to 1200 A.
The selected function determines the contribution of t4:
• Fixed time: t4 is the delay time between the exceeding of the I4 threshold and the
sending of the opening command.
• Dynamic time: t4 contributes in calculating the tripping time (with reference to the
curve, t4 affects the entire curve, shifting it as a whole along the y-axis).
Time t4
IMPORTANT:
• The minimum tripping time of the protection is t4. If, according to
the calculation, the tripping time is less, it is automatically limited to t4.
• For all the UL versions, the maximum time allowed by the trip unit
is 0.4s. If a higher value is set, the trip unit signals the error and forces the
parameter to 0.4 s.

With the Ekip T&P module and with the Ekip Connect software it is possible to adjust the threshold of Pre-
alarm.

23 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Neutral and frequency Adjusting of the neutral setting is used to customize the L, S and I protections on the Neutral pole with a
control factor different from the other phases.
NOTE: use the adjustment of the neutral setting only with four-pole or three-pole circuit-
breakers with external neutral: with three-pole circuit-breakers and neutral protection
active, the trip unit signals the absence of the current sensor.

The adjustment of the frequency is used in order to set the installation frequency (between 50 and 60 Hz).

Neutral parameters
The user can activate the protection and set the percentage for calculation of the protection thresholds.
Parameter Description
By setting the threshold dip-switches to the Off position, the protection on the
Enable
Neutral is disabled.
It establishes the multiplication factor applied to the trip thresholds of the
protections:
Threshold InN • 50%: trip threshold of the neutral current lower than other phases.
• 100%: same trip thresholds for all poles.
• 200%: trip threshold of the neutral current higher than other phases.

Limitations
The adjustment of the Neutral threshold to value of 200 % must be performed considering the following
formula: (I1 * InN) ≤ Iu.
I1 indicates the threshold of L protection in Amperes (example: In = 1000 A; I1 = 0.45 In = 450 A), InN is the
neutral threshold expressed as a multiplication factor (example: 2), Iu indicates the size of the circuit-breaker
(example: 1000 A).
WARNING! With 200% threshold and measured neutral current exceeding 16In, the
Trip unit resets the protection to 100% by itself

24 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Additional protections The Ekip T&P module, and the Ekip Connect software, allow you to set some protections not available via
dip-switch:
• Thermal Memory
• T Protection
• Prealarm threshold
• Hardware Trip
Thermal Memory
The function, which is available for L and S protections, allows overheating in the cables connected to the
circuit-breaker to be prevented: in the case of trips within brief intervals, the unit considers the time between
commands and the entity of the faults so as to reduce opening time.
IMPORTANT: for the S protection the function can be activated if the selected curve
is time-dependent.

NOTE: the function also reduces the trip time in the case of overloads which have not led to
the open command (longer than 100ms)

T Protection
T protection protects the circuit-breaker against abnormal temperatures recorded by the protection trip unit.
T protection is always active; via Ekip Connect it is possible to enable tripping, which takes place for
temperatures t < -40 °C or t > 85 °C.

Pre-alarm
The purpose of the pre-alarm, available for L and G protections, is to signal that the measured current is near
the activation threshold of the protection itself.
It is possible to set the pre-alarm threshold in order to establish the pre-alarm activation values; the pre-alarm
threshold is expressed as a percentage in relation to the protection thresholds (I1 and I4) and is adjustable
between 50% and 90% (default value).
Example: with I1 = 0.6 In and pre-alarm threshold L=50 %, the pre-alarm is activated for currents greater
than 0.3 In

The pre-alarm condition is activated for currents higher than the threshold set, and is deactivated for:
• Current less than the pre-alarm threshold.
• Current greater than the activation threshold of protection.
Hardware Trip
If enabled, the protection activates if one or more disconnections of the current sensors, Rating plug, Trip coil
or an alarm inside the unit are detected.
The protection activates with a TRIP if the disconnections persist for more than one second; in the case of
Trip coil disconnection, the unit merely handles alarm signaling.

25 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Summary table of protections

Threshold Calculation Calculation

ABB ANSI (5) Threshold (1) Time (1) Tolerance t t (3)
tolerance (3) formula t t (2) example t t (2)
activation for If in the t t = 6.75 s with:
I1 = t1 = tt = ± 10 % with If ≤ 6 In
L 49 range (1.05...1.2) I1 = 0.4 In; t1 = 3 s;
0.4…1 In 3…144 s (9 t1) / (If / I1) 2 ± 20 % with If > 6 In
x I1 If = 0.8 In
The better of the
S I2 = ± 7 % with If ≤ 6 In t2 =
50 TD t t = t2 - two values:
(t = k) 0.6...10 In ± 10 % with If > 6 In 0.1…0.8 s
± 10 % or ± 40 ms
t t = 5 s con:
S I2 = ± 7 % with If ≤ 6 In t2 = tt = ± 15 % with If ≤ 6 In
51 I2 = 1 In; t2 = 0.8 s;
(t = k / l 2) 0.6...10 In ± 10 % with If > 6 In 0.1…0.8 s (100 t2) / (If) 2 ± 20 % with If > 6 In
If = 4 In
I3 =
I 50 ± 10 % Not adjustable t t ≤ 30 ms - -
1.5...15 In
The better of the
G I4 (4) = t4 =
50N TD ±7% t t = t4 - two values:
(t = k) 0.1...1 In 0.1…0.8 s
± 10 % or ± 40 ms
t t = 0.32 s with:
G I4 (4) = t4 = tt =
51N ±7% I4 = 0.8 In; t4 = 0.2 ± 15 %
(t = k / l 2) 0.1...1 In 0.1…0.8 s 2 / (If / I4) 2
s; If = 2 In
Defined by
Iinst - - Instantaneous - - -
ABB

(1)
See the serigraph for the available combinations.
(2)
t t calculation is valid for If values that have exceeded the trip threshold of the protection. Use fault current and threshold values expressed in In to
calculate t t, as shown in the example.
(3)
Tolerances valid with trip unit energized in service conditions or with the auxiliary; tripping time ≥ 100 ms, temperature and currents within operating
limits. If these conditions are not guaranteed, the tolerances in the table shown below apply.
(4)
In the presence of auxiliary power supply, you can select all the thresholds. In self-supply mode the minimum threshold is limited to: 0.3 In (with In
= 100 A), 0.25 In (with In = 400 A) or 0.2 In (for all other sizes).
(5)
ANSI / IEEE C37-2 encoding.

Key
• (t=k) - Fixed time curve
• (t=k/I2) - Dynamic time curve
• tt - Tripping time
• If - Primary fault current
Tolerances in particular cases
If the conditions defined in point (3)
of the above table are not guaranteed, the following tolerances apply:
Protection Tolerance threshold Tolerance t t
L Activation for If in the range (1.05...1.2) x I1 ± 20 %
S ± 10 % ± 20 %
I ± 15 % ≤ 60 ms
G ± 15 % ± 20 %

26 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 1 - Protections - Introduction

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Measurements

List Ekip Dip is able to take various measurements, all available via Ekip Connect::

Parameter Description
Instantaneous currents Phase current and earth fault measurements in real time
Trip List of current protection trips (TRIP)
Min Max Measurements History of minimum and maximum currents, recorded at a settable interval
Operation counters Number of mechanical and electrical operations

All information are available via the Ekip T&P module and via Ekip Connect software; instantaneous
measurements are also available via the Ekip Multimeter unit.

Instantaneous currents The instantaneous currents, available in the Measurements pages, are real time measurements of the phase
and earth fault currents expressed in root mean square value; the measurement time and performance
depend on the rated current defined by the Rating plug (In):
Monitor time Normal Accuracy of
Measurement
(min-max) operating range value read (1)
Phase currents 0,004...64 In 0,2...1,2 In 1%
Internal earth fault currents (2) 0,08...64 In 0,2...1,2 In 2%

(1)
the accuracies refer to normal operating ranges, as established by IEC 61557-12
(2)
available with LSIG versions

Maximum and minimum The trip unit is able to record the maximum and minimum current, measured inside an interval that can be
currents programmed by the user.
Every measurement recorded is accompanied by the following information:
• Recording interval.
• Phase and value of maximum and minimum current measured.
• Date and time of the recording (referring to the internal clock).
NOTE: in the case of the minimum current, if the value drops below the 0.03 In threshold, it
will be recorded and represented by the symbol “…” in the measurement field.

Trips The trip unit is able to record the last 30 openings of the circuit-breaker caused by protection functions (trips).
The trips include useful information:
• The protection that caused the trip
• The progressive number of the opening
• The date and time of the opening (referring to the internal clock)
• The measurements associated to the trip protection.

Contact Wear Contact wear indicates the state of deterioration of the main contacts of the circuit-breaker.
The value is expressed as a percentage, and is 0 % in the case of no wear, and 100 % in the case of total
wear.
The contact wear is calculated automatically by the trip unit at every opening for protection or, in the presence
of an auxiliary power supply, also at every manual opening of the circuit-breaker.

Number of operations In the presence of auxiliary power, the trip unit records a series information relating to the openings of the
circuit-breaker:
• Number of manual operations
• Total number of operations (manual + trips)

27 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 2 - Measurements

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Test

Presentation The Ekip TT and Ekip T&P modules connected to the Ekip Dip allow you to perform various tests:
• Trip unit LED test
• Check on the presence of the internal battery
• Circuit-breaker opening test (trip test)
• Protection test.

LED test The LED test can be performed directly on Ekip Dip:

Phase Operation
1 Connect a module to the front test connector of frontal test.
2 Press the iTest pushbutton for at least 6 seconds, but less than 9 seconds.
3 When the protection LEDs light up, trip unit the iTest pushbutton.
Check the following switch-on sequence:
• S, I, G LEDs on fixed
4
• Led pre-alarm L and alarm L that alternate three times
• All the protection LEDs off

Battery test The battery check is integrated in the LED test procedure, except for the battery error signal:
• If the battery is absent or not working, after iTest is pressed the error is signalled by five flashes of the
pre-alarm LED L.
• If the battery is present and working, the LED test proceeds as in the normal procedure.

Protection test In order to perform the protection test, follow the instructions below:

Phase Operation
1 Make sure that the circuit-breaker is closed and that there are no primary currents.
2 Connect Ekip T&P to the front test connector.
3 Start the communication with Ekip Connect.
4 Open the Information page and select the Test command, which opens the protection test page.
5 Set up the test as required and verify that the trip unit functions properly.

Opening test The opening test can be performed directly on the trip unit or from Ekip Connect.
To perform the test:
Phase Operation
1 Make sure that the circuit-breaker is closed and that there are no primary currents.
2 Connect a module to the front test connector of frontal test.
3 Press the iTest pushbutton for at least 9 seconds.
4 Check that the circuit-breaker opens and that the TU Reset button comes out

To perform the test from Ekip Connect:

Phase Operation
1 Make sure that the circuit-breaker is closed and that there are no primary currents.
2 Connect Ekip T&P to the front test connector.
3 Start the communication with Ekip Connect.
4 Select the trip test command.
5 Check that the circuit-breaker opens and that the TU Reset button comes out

Further information on Ekip Connect is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/

DownloadCenter/, in particular with the manual 1SDH000891R0002.

28 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 3 - Test

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

4 - List of alarms and signals

LED view
Ekip Dip continuously monitors its own operating condition and that of all the devices to which it is connected. All the signals are available with the
front LEDs. The protection LEDs provide information with various combinations of lighting and flashing, while the power-on LED, as described on
page 19, indicates the power-on conditions of the trip unit.
NOTE: the number of LEDs depends on the version of Ekip Dip (LI, LSI, LSIG).

Summary table of LED signals

The following table summarises the signals available with the protection LEDs and the operations to be carried out in response to alarms or fault
conditions signalled.
3 4
Slow flashing 2 flashes flashes flashes
Type of Information Fast flashing (2 Hz) On and fixed
(0.5Hz) every 2 s every every
3s 4s HELP
All R All R
Colour and LED All R G All R G All R G All R G G G
R+G (single) R+G (single)
Internal configuration
x x x A
error (5).
Trip coil disconnected or
x B
trip command failed
Current sensors
x B
disconnected
Rating Plug error X B+E
Protection delay x C
Temperature alarm (1)
x C
Pre-alarm L x C
Trip (2)
x C
Hardware Trip (3) x x B
Installation error x E
Parameter error x D
Circuit-breaker state not
x B
defined or in error
Error on Local Bus x F
Maintenance alarm x F
Software incompatibility x x G
Low battery (during self-
x H
test) (4)

(1)
The temperature alarm is signalled by lighting of the protection L and I red LEDs.
(2)
The last trip can also be displayed with trip unit off, by pressing the iTest key.
(3)
The Hardware Trip is signalled by lighting of the pre-alarm L yellow LED and the protection I red led.
(4)
Five flashes when self-test is started up
(5)
Error present with one of the three flashing options displayed alongside.

Key to LED colours

The above table lists the colors of the LEDs, to be interpreted as follows:
• R = red LED (alarm LED L, S, I, G).
• G = yellow LED (pre-alarm LED L).

NOTE: for further details refer to the table listing the components of the interface, available on page 18.

Continued on the next page

29 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 4 - List of alarms and signals
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

HELP
Some LED signals indicate connection errors or operational errors that require corrective or maintenance
operations. The following are the suggestions for checking with reference to the preceding LED table:
HELP
Operation
note
A Contact ABB and give details about the state of the LEDs on the unit.
Check the connections between trip unit and accessories (Rating Plug, trip coil, sensors,
B
etc).
C Normal operation/signalling provided by the trip unit.
Error in setting of the dip-switches. Check and correct the following conditions:
• All the dip-switches of L are in the ON position
• I1 ≥ I2 or I2 ≥ I3.
• Iu < (2 * In * I1) in the case where InN = 200 %.
D • I4 < 0.3 In (con In = 100 A), 0.25 In (con In = 400 A) or 0.2 In (for all other sizes), in the
absence of auxiliary power supply.
• t2 > 0.4s (in the case of UL circuit-breaker)
• t4 > 0.4s (in the case of UL circuit-breaker)
• I4 > 1200 A (in case of UL circuit-breaker)
E Install by pressing and holding the itest pushbutton for at least 5s.
F Connect via Ekip Connect in order to set the Local Bus or to confirm maintenance.
G Replace the battery.

30 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 4 - List of alarms and signals
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

5 - Additional functions

Presentation Ekip T&P and Ekip Programming allow the protection trip unit to be connected to Ekip Connect software and
to access parameters and commands that cannot be accessed directly from the front interface: a description
of the various functions is given below.

The additional protections available via Ekip Connect are described on page 25.

Maintenance The Maintenance function allows signalling to the user, via LED, that:
• One year has passed since the last maintenance.
• Contact wear has increased by more than 10% compared with the value at the last maintenance.
Via Ekip Connect there are two selections available:
• Activation: it allows to the maintenance function to be activated.
• Reset: it allows confirmation of maintenance on the trip unit; the present date and contact wear values
are recorded, and the signal is reset.
The reference date is that of the internal clock, and the elapsed time is calculated both with the trip unit on
and off (provided that the internal battery is working).
NOTE: manual modification of the date can cause variations in the calculation of the time
elapsed, and therefore in the date of the next maintenance.

NOTE: the maintenance signal due to increased contact wear is active for values higher than
20 %.

Local Bus In order to activate communication on the Local Bus with the Ekip Link, Ekip Multimeter or Ekip Signalling
10K modules, the Local Bus parameter must be enabled.
NOTE: communication with the modules is active if the auxiliary power supply is present.

Date and time The Ekip Dip trip unit has a user-adjustable internal clock.
Setting the date can be useful for some functions such as the recording of trips and minimum and maximum
currents, and maintenance.
The clock is active if the internal battery of the trip unit is working.

31 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 5 - Additional functions

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Programmable States There are sixteen independent programmable states identified by the letters A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, L, M, N,
O, P, Q, R, offering different solutions for event control.
The value of each programmable state can be either "True" or "False". Different configuration parameters are
available:
• Trigger: event or combination of more events of state activation (up to 24, in AND or OR logic configuration).
• On Delay: state activation delay calculated from trigger presence onwards.
• Off Delay: state de-activation delay calculated from trigger absence onwards.
NOTE: the state become activate if the trigger is present for longer than the On delay setting
and become inactive if the trigger is absent for longer than the Off delay setting.

Trigger State

Delay ON
Delay OFF
Delay ON Delay OFF

Programmable State

TRUE

FALSE

The states can be used with the external Ekip Signalling 10K module, on Link Bus or with the programmable
functions, to transfer the desired signalling combination on contacts.

Programmable Functions Ekip Dip allows you to program five commands so that they are automatically activated according to the
signalling state or the events selected by the user. The commands are:
• Trip
• Reset of the trip signal.
• Reset signalling contacts of the Ekip Signalling 10K module.
• Opening coil command (YO).
• Closing coil command (YC).
Each command provides two programming parameters:
• Activation function: event or events (up to eight, in logical AND or OR configuration) that activate the
command.
• Delay: command sending delay, calculated starting from the occurrence of the activation event.
NOTE: the command is sent if the event is present for a time greater than the delay that has
been set.

NOTE: the YO and YC commands are possible only if the coils and Ekip Actuator are present,
and if all the operating conditions exist (see page 133).

32 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 5 - Additional functions

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Circuit-breaker label and user Labels that can be configured by the user so as to facilitate remote identification of the trip unit; in detail the
Data CB label, the trip unit model and the communication address form the identifier used by Ekip Connect for
the devices connected.

Date of installation Installation date of the circuit-breaker.

Load Profile Timers SACE Emax 2 has 4 counters which display how long the maximum current measured has remained in each
percentage band.
The counters are expressed in seconds and the bands are: 0-49%In, 50-79%In, 80-89%In, >90%In.

Led Alive The parameter allows the behaviour of the power-on LED indicator of the trip unit and of all modules that can
be connected to Ekip Supply to be changed. If activated:
• Trip unit: it comes on at a frequency of 0.5 Hz.
• Modules connected to Ekip Supply: if there are no communication errors, they synchronize with the flashes
of the trip unit LED.
If deactivated, the power-on leds on the respective devices come on with a steady light.

Modules network settings It allows the communication parameters of the circuit-breaker to be controlled if the trip unit is replaced:
retention • Overwrite: the parameters of the new trip unit are valid, so it is advisable to make sure that the communication
parameter settings suit the communication network.
• Keep module data: the new trip unit updates its communication parameters with the ones in the Ekip
Com modules of the circuit-breaker, used up to that moment in the various communication networks.
The trip units are supplied with the parameter set as Overwrite.

Wink The command allows the power-on LED on the protection trip unit to flash at 3 Hz so as to physically identify
a trip unit that would not be identifiable in other ways.
3 Hz flashing is disabled by sending another Wink command or by switching off the trip unit.

Glitch The commands of Glitch 16 to 23 activate the respective glitch registers, which can be used for customizing
programmable functions or output contacts.

33 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 5 - Additional functions

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

6 - Default parameters
The Ekip Dip trip units are supplied with the following default parameters, some adjustable with the front DIPs
(protections, Frequency, Neutral), other via front bus.
Protection/Parameter Value
L 1 In; 144 s
S (1) Off; 0.1 s
I 4 In
G (1) Off; 0.1 s
Frequency 50 Hz (IEC) / 60 Hz (UL)
Off (for three-pole circuit breakers).
Neutral
50 % (for four-pole circuit-breaker)
Hardware Trip Disabled
Local Bus Off
Alive LED Disabled (Power-on LED fixed)
Maintenance Off

(1)
S Protection available with LSI and LSIG versions of the trip unit. G Protection available with LSIG version.

34 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Dip | 6 - Default parameters

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Ekip Touch - Interface and menus

1 - Presentation of interface

Functions The Ekip Touch operator interface allows you to:

• display signals and measurements of the functions in progress or recorded events
• configure the parameters, the protections present and other functions of the unit
• set parameters concerning the accessory modules connected
• perform tests

Components The Ekip Touch interface includes a touchscreen, short-cut push-buttons, status leds and a service connector
for certain external accessories:

Figure 5

Pos. Description
A Single-touch color touchscreen display
B Power led
C Warning led
D Alarm led
E HOME push-button
F iTEST push-button
G Service connector

Display The touchscreen display of Ekip Touch is the single-touch, color type.
The touchscreen function is active when the unit is on.

35 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 1 - Presentation of interface
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

LEDs LEDs Colour Description

Indicates the on status of Ekip Touch:
• off: no power and unit off
Power • on, steady (Power mode) or flashing (Alive mode): unit on and self-supplied
Green by external Vaux or service connector
The Power mode or Alive mode can be selected via Ekip Connect: if the Alive
mode has been selected and external modules are connected, the Power leds
of Ekip Touch and the modules flash in the synchronized mode.
Signals that certain alarms are present:
Warnings • off: no alarm
Yellow • on steady: prealarm of an active protection or status contacts error
• two flast flashes every 0.5 s: trip unit parameter configuration error
• fast flash: Rating Plug or Measurement module installation error
Signals that an alarm is present:
• off: no alarm
• on steady: on steady signals a TRIP due to a protection
Alarm • on flashing: protection timing tripped or alarm due to disconnection of a
Red
current sensor
• two flast flashes every 2 seconds: Rating Plug error
• on with fast flashing: protection timing tripped or alarm due to disconnection
of a current sensor

If on at the same time, the Warning and Alarm leds provide further signals:
• leds on with fast flashing: no communication between Trip unit and Mainboard
• leds on with slow flashing: internal error
• leds on and steady internal configuration error
These cases need assistance from ABB.

Push-buttons Push-
Description
button
Allows different areas of the menu to be accessed:
HOME • from pages: HOME, Histograms, Measuring instruments, Measurements, Main
measurements -> open: Main page
• from pages: Main page, Alarm list, at any point of the menu area -> open: HOME page
Allows certain pages of information about the unit to be rapidly consulted; press the button
in successionj to display the following pages:
• Alarm list, if messages are present
• Info, if Customer Page option is active
• Protection unit, with information about Ekip Touch
iTest • Circuit breaker, with information about the CB
• Last trip, with information about the last trip, if available
Consultation is active from pages: HOME, Histograms, Measuring instruments,
Measurements, Main measurements
NOTE: with Ekip Touch off and the internal battery charged, press iTEST to
temporarily switch on the Power led and, in the case of a trip, the display with
information about the trip protection and the Alarm led

Service connector The service connector enables Ekip Touch to be connected to Ekip TT, Ekip T&P and Ekip Programming,
allowing the unit to be temporarily supplied, parameter configuration prior to putting into service, tests and
extension of the configuration functions.
IMPORTANT: only use cables supplied by ABB or with ABB accessories

36 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 1 - Presentation of interface
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Navigation

Levels and pages The Ekip Touch menu is divided into several levels, all accessible using the touchscreen display and buttons
available in the units:

Level 1 (HOME)
Page shown on power up; appears when push-button of the same name appears, as described on page
36; from here you can:
1. access the MAIN PAGE (level 2), by pressing the HOME button
2. access the Alarm list, by selecting the diagnostic bar at the bottom
3. access the Summary pages of some of the measurements by pressing on the edges

Figure 6

NOTE: Ekip Touch is supplied with the Histograms page configured as HOME; if the
configuration is different, the Histograms can be set as the main page by pressing
and holding the HOME key for five seconds and confirming the message on the display

Level 2 (MAIN PAGE)

This page allows you to:
4. access one of the graphic pages: Histograms, Measuring instruments and Measurements
5. access the MENU AREA (level 3)

Figure 7

Continued on the next page

37 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 2 - Navigation
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Level 3 (MENU AREA):

You can access all the configuration menus and consult the parameters in this page
6. Protections and Advanced
7. Measures
8. Settings
9. Test
10. About

Figure 8

LEVEL 4 (MENUS and SUBMENUS)

Selection of one of the level 3 menus accesses a set of submenus with the list of available options, which are
organized into several levels through to details of the specific parameter.
Each submenu has a command for returning to the previous menu (11); if the list contains more than five
options, there is also a scroll bar (12) for full consultation.

Figure 9

To consult a parameter, it just needs to be selected.

Consult the dedicated section for instructions on how to configure and save the parameters (page 48).

38 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 2 - Navigation
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Graphic pages

Histograms The page displays the histograms of the current and voltage measurements acquired in real time and certain
status information:

Figure 10

Pos. Description
Up to four information icons are available:
The letter corresponding to the active configuration is displayed if Adaptive
or Protections package is present and with Dual Set enabled;
External power supply present (Vaux or through a service connector); the plug
or icon indicates Vaux
A Remote parameter writing configuration activre, modules Ekip Com connected,
Vaux present

Bluetooth antenna state; four options available, see next chapter for details

Datalogger active

Histograms of the voltage and current measurements acquired in real time.

The bar of each signal is represented in scale 0 to 125 % with reference to the rated current and
voltage values of the, and can be of three colors:
• light blue: no protection in alarm status
B
• yellow: one of the tripped protections is in prealarm status with respect to set thresholds
• red: one of the tripped protections is in alarm status with respect to set thresholds
NOTE: Histogram Ne is available with 4P or 3P + N configurations

C Maximum phase current measured in real time

D Maximum line-to-line voltage measured in real time

The Bluetooth icon changes, depending on the state of the antenna and the wireless communication:
Icon Description
Antenna off or being powered (approx. two seconds from being enabled via the
menu)

Antenna on but no device connected

Pairing in progress (Pairing command executed via menu)

External device connected to Trip unit

39 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 3 - Graphic pages
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Summary page Press on the sides of the display (1) from the Home page to access further summary pages for certain
measurements:
• Main measurements page: maximum phase current, maximum line-to-line voltage, power factor, total
active/reactive/apparent powers
• Ekip Synchrocheck main measurements page (when module is present): Int and Ext frequencies and
voltages, phase difference, synchronism status (page 45)

Figure 11

NOTE: both pages can be set as the main page by pressing HOME, holding it for five
seconds and confirming the message on the display

Measuring instruments

Figure 12

Depending on the Trip unit model, certain measurements acquired in real time are shown on these pages by
means of a pointer; each page displays a specific measurement:
Page Measurement type page Unit of measurement/indicator
1 Maximum phase current A
2 Maximum line-to-line voltage V
3 Total active power kW
4 Total reactive power kVAR
5 Total apparent power kVA

The scale of values ranges from 0 to 125 % and refers to the rated values set (for powers: rated current x
rated voltage x √3).
Press on the sides of the display to browse the pages; quit the Measurement tools section with the HOME
key.
Page orientation (horizontal by default) can be changed in the Settings menu.
NOTE: each page can be set as the main page by pressing HOME, holding it for five
seconds and confirming the message on the display

40 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 3 - Graphic pages
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Measurements

Figure 13

If provided for by Trip unit model, the Measurements pages contain a list of measurements acquired in real
time, expressed in absolute value:
Page Name Measurements
1 Current Currents: phase, earth fault, external/Rc earth fault
2 Voltage Voltages: line-to-line, phase, neutral
3 Active power Phase and total active powers
4 Reactive power Phase and total reactive powers
5 Apparent power Phase and total apparent powers
6 Energy counters Total active, reactive and apparent energies
7 Power Controller Power Controller measurement summary, if installed
8 Load shedding Summary of Load Shedding measurements, if present
9 Ekip Signalling 3T Summary of Ekip Signalling 3T module measurements, if present

Ekip Touch configuration involves certain exceptions:

• the Ne current measurements are available with 4P and 3P + N configurations
• the phase voltage measurements are available with the 4P and 3P + active external neutral voltage
configuration
• with the 3P configuration, pages: Active Power, Reactive Power and Apparent Power are replaced by the
Powers page with the total active, reactive and apparent power measurements
• Ige/Rc current available with external sensor activated
• Power Controller page available with Power Controller function activated
• Load Shedding available with Load Shedding function activated
Press the sides of the display to browse the pages; press the HOME key to quit.
NOTE: each page can be set as the main page by pressing HOME, holding it for five
seconds and confirming the message on the display

41 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 3 - Graphic pages
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Diagnosis bar and Alarm list The Diagnosis bar lists the faults detected by the unit. It shows a detail of each alarm for about two seconds.

Figure 14

Select the bar to access the Alarm List page, with the list of alarms present.

Figure 15

NOTE: the Alarm List page also appears when the iTEST button is pressed in the cases
provided for and described on page 36

Each signal is followed by an icon that identifies the type of alarm:

Icon Alarm type
Alarm

Warning, error or prealarm

About

Timing due to tripped protection

The complete list of alarms is given on page 262.

42 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 3 - Graphic pages
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

4 - Menu

Introduction Press Enter or ESC from the main page to access the different menus of the Trip unit.
The menus are the 4th level pages that can be dislpayed and comprise list of:
• submenus
• settable parameters
• information and measurements
• commands that can be executed
Selection of each menu item enables: access to submenus, consultation of information in detail, configuration
of a parameter, execution of a command.

Elements of each item The items in each list consist of:

• main name (white color)
• additional description or set value (light blue color)

Figure 16

Protections Menu The Protections menu can be used to configure the following protections (1):

Name Parameters SW package Page

L List and description in dedicated chapter 53
S List and description in dedicated chapter 54
S2 List and description in dedicated chapter Standard Protections 55
I List and description in dedicated chapter 56
G (2) List and description in dedicated chapter 57
Gext (2) List and description in dedicated chapter (3)
84
MDGF (2)
List and description in dedicated chapter (4)
85

(1)
if the Adaptive Protections package is available and Dual set has been activated, an intermediate menu
where the set can be selected (Set A / Set B) will be available before the list of protections
(2)
available for LSIG versions
(3)
available if the presence of toroid S.G.R. has been activated previously
(4)
available if the presence of the MDGF toroid has been previously activated

43 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 4 - Menu
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Advanced menus The Advanced menu can be used to configure the following protections (1):

Name Parameters SW package Page

MCR List in dedicated chapter 58
Standard
2I List in dedicated chapter 59
Protections
IU List in dedicated chapter 60
UV (2) List in dedicated chapter 62
OV (2)
List in dedicated chapter 63
UV2 (2) List in dedicated chapter Voltage protections 63
OV2 (2) List in dedicated chapter 64
VU (2)
List in dedicated chapter 64
S(V) (2) List in dedicated chapter 65
Voltage Advanced
S2(V) (2)
List in dedicated chapter 66
protections
RV (2) List in dedicated chapter 68
UF (2) List in dedicated chapter 69
OF (2) List in dedicated chapter Frequency 70
UF2 (2) List in dedicated chapter protections 70
OF2 (2) List in dedicated chapter 71
RP (2)
List in dedicated chapter 72
D (2) List in dedicated chapter 73
RQ (2) List in dedicated chapter 76
Power protections
OQ (2) List in dedicated chapter 75
UP (2)
List in dedicated chapter 76
OP (2) List in dedicated chapter 75
ROCOF (2)
List in dedicated chapter ROCOF protections 78
V DIR, VINV (2) List in dedicated chapter 142
Interface
59 S1 (2) List in dedicated chapter 142
protections (IPS)
Warnings VS Warning, FS Warning, FW1 Warning 142
Threshold 1 I1, Threshold 2 I1, Threshold Iw1,
Signallings Standard 92
Threshold Iw2, Phase Sequence (2), CosØ (3)
Protections
Functions External Trip, Trip Reset, Switch On SET B (4) 92
Synchrocheck List in dedicated chapter (5)
89
RC List in dedicated chapter (6)
87

(1)
if the Adaptive Protections package is available and Dual set has been activated, an intermediate menu
where the set can be selected (Set A / Set B) will be available before the list of protections The only menu
always present via Advanced is Functions
(2)
available if provided for by Trip unit model or if the relative SW package has been activated, where possible
(page 14)
(3)
CosØ available if provided for by Trip unit model or if the Power Protections package has been activated
(4)
SET B available when Adaptive Protections package is present
(5)
available when Ekip Synchrocheck is present
(6)
available when Rating Plug type Rc is installed in unit and when presence of toroid Rc has been
previously activated in Settings menu

44 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 4 - Menu
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Measurements Menu Menu Submenus Description Page

Trip Description in dedicated chapter 111
Historicals Events List of events recorded 111
Measurements List and description in dedicated chapter 111
Power factor (1) - Power factor measurement 114
Frequency (1)
- Frequency measured 114
Energy counters Measurement of energies
114
Energy (1) Reset counters Meter reset command
Energy RESET List and description in dedicated chapter 114
Peak factor (1)
- Peak factor of each phase 114
Activation command for current harmonic
Harmonic dist. - 61
distortion monitoring
Ekip Synchrocheck (2) - Description in dedicated chapter 227
V Sequences
3s V Sequences
THD Current Measurements associated with Network
Network Analyzer (3) Analyzer function: list and description in 120
THD Voltages dedicated chapter
Counters
Waveforms
Contact Wear
LastServiceContactWear
Installation and maintenance dates and
Maintenance Installation 130
commands
Last Maintenance
Service RESET

(1)
available if provided for by Trip unit model or if SW Measuring Measurements package has been activated
(2)
available when Ekip Synchrocheck module is present
(3)
available if provided for by Trip unit model or if Network Analyzer SW package has been activated

45 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 4 - Menu
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Settings Menu Menu Submenus Description and parameters Page

Enable (5) Enabling and configuration of Bluetooth
Bluetooth Low Energy 128
- Low Energy communication
Configuration Phase number selection 127
Hardware Trip Protection activation command
T Protection Protection activation command 61
Circuit Breaker
Neutral Protection (2) Enable, Neutral threshold
Earth protection (7) External sensor configuration 129
Installation Installation of modules 47
Main Frequency - Grid frequency configuration 127
Phase Sequence - Phase sequence configuration 64
Local/Remote Parameter writing configuration
Local Bus Configuration of local bus presence
Modules 128
Modul x (3)
Details in chapters of each module
Functions Switch On LOCAL, Signalling RESET
Monitor time - Measuring range configuration 112
Test Bus - Test bus activation 130
Enable (5) Function enabling and parameters: see
Power Controller (4) 139
- details in dedicated chapter
Enable (5) Function enabling and parameters: see
Load Shedding (4) 139
- details in dedicated chapter
Enable (5) Function enabling and parameters: see
Network Analyzer (6) 120
- details in dedicated chapter
Enable (5) Function enabling and parameters: see
Datalogger (6) 118
- details in dedicated chapter
Enable (5) Function enabling and parameters: see
Dual Set (6) 79
Default set details in dedicated chapter
Date Configuration of unit date
Time Configuration of unit time
System 130
Language Configuration of menu language
New PIN PIN Configuration
Representation parameters of menus
and measurements: see details in
View - 130
dedicated chapter

YO Command
Functions Function, Delay 89
YC Command
Maintenance Alarms Activation of maintenance signals 113

(1)
with CB in 3P configuration
(2)
available with CB in 4P or 3P with neutral configuration
(3)
the menu populates with the list of accessory modules detected by the unit with Local Bus activated and in
the envisaged connection and supply conditions
(4)
available if the function has been installed in the Trip unit
(5)
additions are only made to the list of the specific submenu when the function is enabled (=On)
(6)
available if provided for by Trip unit model or if relative SW package has been activated
(7)
available with LSIG versions

46 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 4 - Menu
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Installation menu If Ekip Touch detects that Rating Plug or Measurement module have not been installed properly, it signals an
alarm (page 262) and completes Settings menu with the specific installation section:
Menu Submenus 1 Submenus 2 Commands
Rating Plug Install
Circuit Breaker Installation
Ekip Measuring Install

Correct installation is confirmed by a message on the display and disappearance of the alarm signal and
installation menu.
NOTE: availability of submenus depends on the module, which appears to have not been
installed

Test Menu Menu Submenus Description, parameters and Commands

Autotest - Autotest command
Trip Test - TRIP command
Test CB - Close CB, Open CB
Ekip Signalling 4K (1) - Module autotest command
Ekip Signalling 2K-1 (1)
Ekip Signalling 2K (1) Ekip Signalling 2K-2 (1) Module autotest command
Ekip Signalling 2K-3 (1)
S Protection (3)
ZoneSelectivity (2) Input, Force Output, Release Output
G Protection (4)
Rc Test (5) - Test instructions

(1)
available if one or more Ekip Signalling modules are connected and detected by Ekip Touch
(2)
available if Ekip Touch is on with auxiliary supply
(3)
available with S and/or S2 and/or D protection enabled, for S protection the set curve must be t=k
(4)
available with G and/or Gext and/or MDGF and/or D protection enabled and curve t=k
(5)
available with Rating Plug and Rc toroid present

About Menu Menu Submenus Information provided

Information about Ekip Touch: Mainboard serial
Protection Unit - number, Trip unit serial number, type, version,
standard, SW version, date and time, language
CB information: TAG name, CB name, rated current,
Circuit Breaker - number of poles, CB status and position, total
operations, CB serial number
Status of 1% measurements (from Class 1 Power
IEC61557-12 (1) - & Energy Metering package), serial number of
assembly and current sensors connected
Feature Collection - List of tripped protections in Trip unit
Module information: serial number, SW version,
Modules Modul x (2)
status of inputs/outputs/contacts (if present)
Load Input Status Status of loads (open/closed)
Power Controller (3)
Load Active Load configuration (activated/not activated)
Load Input Status Status of loads (open/closed)
Load shedding (3)
Load Active Load configuration (activated/not activated)

(1)
available if Class 1 Power & Energy Metering SW package is provided for by Trip unit module or if it has been
previously activated
(2)
available if one or more modules are connected and detected by unit
(3)
available if function has been installed and enabled in Trip unit

47 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 4 - Menu
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

5 - Changing parameters and commands

Changing parameters Comply with the following procedure to change one or more parameters:

IMPORTANT: parameters can be changed with Trip unit in the Local mode and in the
absence of timing alarms

1. Select parameter and enter PIN if required

2. Select new value from list or with the aid of page commands
3. Select Confirm command if present:

Figure 17

4. When the new value has been selected/confirmed, the menu of the parameter is accessed automatically,
the changed item presents the new value in light blue and a tick to confirm:

Figure 18

Now proceed by confirming the programming (Step 5) or access other parameters

and make further changes (Step 1).
Select the arrow at the top left to access the top menu until the Programming page appears:

Figure 19

6. Various commands are enabled in the programming page:

• Confirm to validate the new parameters and conclude the programming procedure
• Abort to interrupt the save data process
• Modify to go back to the menus and change the parameter or others

Figure 20

48 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 5 - Changing parameters and commands
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Commands Selection of a command implies its immediate execution or opening of an intermediate confirm window.
Correct execution is indicated by a confirm window, which disappears automatically from the display.
Certain commands, selection of which immediately activates the respective test sequences without any
confirm window, are an exception to this rule:
• Auto Test
• Ekip Signalling 2K module commands
IMPORTANT: confirmation on the display refers to launching the command, not to
verification of the operation required, which is at the user's charge whichever
type of command is concerned: reset parameters, display, open/close contacts

Exceptions Before validating a change to a parameter, the Trip unit checks all its parameters to make sure there is no
conflict or incorrect condition:
• if the Trip unit detects an incorrect condition, the relative details appear on the display and parameter
modification is annulled.
Before executing a command, the Trip unit checks all its parameters to ensure there is no conflict or incorrect
condition:
• if the Trip unit detects an incorrect condition, the relative details appear on the display and command
execution is annulled.
WARNING! aborting the programming affects all the parameters modified during the
same session

49 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 5 - Changing parameters and commands
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

6 - PIN and security

Safety WARNING! the user is responsible for security against unauthorized access and
modification: configure all Trip unit access points (display menu and, if present,
Ekip Connect and remote communication systems) using the access PIN and controlled
and authorized connection systems

Function The PIN code enables access to certain areas of the Trip unit and prevents unintentional setting errors from
being entered via the display.
However, parameters can still be modified without having to enter the PIN via:
• service connector, using Ekip T&P or Ekip Programming and the Ekip Connect application
• bus, in the presence of Ekip Com modules and with Trip unit configured as Remote (page 129).
To ensure your unit is in secure conditions, the Wizard window immediate asks you to change the PIN code
on first power up; this is strongly recommended by ABB.

Description The PIN code is a number formed by five digits, each of which can be given a value from 0 to 9; the default
value is: 00001 and can be changed in the Settings-New PIN menu.
The PIN code must be entered to:
• change a parameter (including the PIN code itself)
• access the Test menu
Once the PIN code has been entered, all menus can be browsed for two minutes: once two minutes have
elapsed, the PIN code must be entered again (depending on the case in question).
NOTE: the PIN code must also be entered again if a programming session has been annulled
(page 48).

Entry The following page will appear when the PIN code is requested: change (1) and confirm (2) each digit to
complete the entry process.

Figure 21

NOTE:

• if the PIN is wrong, “Wrong PIN” will appear for three seconds after which the entry page will
be displayed again; use the command at the top left to quit
• there is no limit to the number of wrong PIN that can be entered

Disabling The PIN code can be disabled by entering its value as: 00000; In this case, the PIN is only required to change
the PIN itself in the Settings menu.

Recovery if the PIN code is lost, consult document 1SDH001501R0002, available in the ABB website, or contact ABB
directly.

50 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Interface and menus | 6 - PIN and security
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Ekip Touch - Protections

1 - Protections - Introduction

Operating principle The protection functions are available with all Ekip Touch models and versions.
Each protection is associated with a different signal (current, voltages, frequencies, powers, etc) but the
operating principle is the same:
1. If the signal measured exceeds the set threshold, the specific protection activates (prealarm and/or
alarm).
2. The alarm appears on the display and, after a period of time (timing t t), depending on the protection
parameters set, can convert into a trip command (TRIP) transmitted to the internal Trip coil of the
CB.
NOTE:

• if the signal measured drops below the set threshold before the trip time has elapsed, Ekip
Touch quits the alarm and/or timing status and returns to the normal operating condition
• all protections have a default configuration: check the parameters and change to suit the
installation requirements before putting into service

References Many of the protection thresholds are displayed in two different quantities: absolute value and relative value.
The relative value depends on the type of measurement:
Type of protection Reference Description
Current In Nominal current of the Rating plug
Voltage Un Line-to-line voltage setting
Frequency fn Frequency setting
Power Sn √3 x In x Un

Protections packages The protections described in the following chapters are grouped into packages, the availability of which
depends on the model and version of the Trip unit, and on their ability to be installed as additional package:
Package Page
Standard Protections 52
Voltage protections 62
Voltage Advanced protections 65
Frequency protections 69
Power protections 72
Adaptive protections 79

51 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 1 - Protections - Introduction
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Standard Protections

List The Standard protections available for all Ekip Touch models, are:

Name Type of protection Page

L Overload with inverse long-time delay 53
S Selective short-circuit 54
S2 (2)
Short-circuit with adjustable delay 55
I Instantaneous short-circuit 56
G (1) Earth fault with adjustable delay 57
MCR Instantaneous short-circuit on circuit-breaker closing 58
2I Instantaneous short-circuit programmable 59
IU Current unbalance 60
Neutral Different protection on neutral phase 60
Harmonic distortion Distorted waveforms 61
T Abnormal temperatures 61
Hardware Trip Internal connection errors 61

(1)
not available with LSI version of Ekip Touch
(2)
not available with Ekip G Touch

52 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

L Protection Function
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I1, the protection trips and, after a time established
t by the value read and by the parameter settings, transmits the TRIP command.
I1 L To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 92)
t1 • the graph with trip curve (from page 95)
Parameters
I Parameter Description Default
Establishes curve dynamics and trip time calculation:
• t = k / I 2 according to IEC 60947-2.
• IEC 60255-151 SI
Curve t = k/I 2
• IEC 60255-151 VI
• IEC 60255-151 EI
• t = k / I 4 according to 60255-151
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time.
Threshold I1 1 In
The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
can be set within the range: 0.4 In to 1 In, in 0.001 In steps
Contributes towards calculating the trip time.
Time t1 The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 3 s .. 144 s
144 s, in 1 s steps
Activates/deactivates the thermal memory function (page 80)
Thermal
NOTE:the function is available with curve t=k/I 2 OFF
memory

Warns that the measured current is near to protection activation

threshold I1.
The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set within
Prealarm I1 the range: 50% I1 to 90% I1, in 1% steps. 90 % I1
NOTE: the prealarm condition deactivates in two cases:
• current lower than prealarm threshold I1
• current higher than threshold I1

Limitations and additional functions

• threshold I1 must be lower than threshold I2 (if S protection is activated)
• the trip time of the protection is forcibly set at 1 s if the calculation results give a lower theoretical value
and/or if the current reading is more than 12 In
• with CB in UL standard configuration, the only available curve is t = k/I 2

53 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

S Protection Function
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I2, the protection trips and, after a time established
t by the value read and by the parameter settings, transmits the TRIP command.
I2 S To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 92)
t2 • the graph with trip curve (page 98)
Parameters
I Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu.
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command. if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as ON
information.
Establishes curve dynamics and the threshold or trip time calculation:
Curve • t = k: fixed time trip t=k
• t = k/I 2: inverse time-delay dynamic trip
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time.
Threshold I2 4 In
The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
It is the trip time or contributes towards timing calculation, depending
on the type of curve selected.
Time t2 0,05 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.05 s
to 0.8 s, in 0.01 s steps
Activates/deactivates the thermal memory function (page 80)
Thermal
NOTE:the function is only available with curve t=k/I 2 OFF
memory

Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on

the display (page 80)
ZoneSelectivity OFF
NOTE:the function is only available with curve t=k

This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function
activated and selectivity input not present (page 80)
Selectivity time 0,04 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s
to 0.2 s, in 0.01 s steps
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated
StartUp enable OFF
parameters on the display (page 83)
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in
StartUp which the function is activated (page 83)
0,6 In
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and
is calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded
StartUp Time (page 83) 0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
30 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

• threshold I2 must be higher than threshold I1 (if S protection is activated)
• in the presence of curve t= k/I 2, the protection trip time is forced to t2 if the calculation results give a
theoretical value lower than t2 itself
• the block functions and type of selectivity can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via
Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 80)
• with CB in UL standard configuration, the maximum value of t2 is 400 ms

54 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

S2 Protection Function
S2 protection functions in the same way as S protection: if the current of one or more phases exceeds
t threshold I5 for longer than time t5, the protection activates and sends a TRIP command.
I5 S2
NOTE: unlike S protection, S2 protection only has one fixed time trip curve and has no thermal
memory
t5
It is independent of S protection, thus thresholds and functions of the two protections can be programmed
so as to take advantage of different plant solutions (example: signaling with S and open command with S2 or
I vice versa, or both S and S2 for signaling or tripping).
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 92)
• the graph with trip curve (page 98)
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu.
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command. if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as ON
information.
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time.
Threshold I5 4 In
The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the trip time of the protection.
Time t5 The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.05 s 0,05 s
to 0.8 s, in 0.01 s steps
Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on
the display (page 80)
NOTE: if both S and S2 selectivities are activated, the input and
ZoneSelectivity OFF
output are shared with the OR function; to stimulate inputs and
outputs, it is sufficient for even only one of the two to be
activated
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function
activated and selectivity input not present (page 80)
Selectivity time 0,04 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s
to 0.2 s, in 0.01 s steps
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated
StartUp enable OFF
parameters on the display (page 83)
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in
StartUp which the function is activated (page 83)
4 In
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and
is calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded
StartUp Time (page 83) 0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
30 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

• threshold I5 must be higher than threshold I1 (if S2 protection is activated)
• the block functions and type of selectivity can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via
Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 82)
• with CB in UL standard configuration, the maximum value of t5 is 400 ms

55 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

I Protection Function
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I3, the protection trips and, after a non-programmable
t fixed time, transmits the TRIP command.
I3 I To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
• the graph with trip curve (page 99)
Parameters
I Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable ON
parameters menu.
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold I3 The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and 4 In
can be set within the range: 1.5 In to 15 In, in 0.1 In steps
ZoneSelectivity Activates/deactivates the function OFF
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated
StartUp enable OFF
parameters on the display (page 82)
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in
StartUp which the function is activated (page 82)
1,5 In
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
can be set within the range: 1.5 In to 15 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and
is calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded
StartUp Time (page 82) 0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
30 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

• threshold I3 must be higher than threshold I2 (if S and I protections are activated)
• I protection can be activated with MCR protection disabled
• the block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or
communication via system bus (page 83)

56 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

G Protection Function
Ekip Touch calculates the vector sum of the phase currents (L1, L2, L3, Ne) and obtains the internal earth
t fault current (Ig): if current Ig exceeds threshold I4, the protection trips and, after a time established by the
I4 G value read and by the parameter settings, transmits the TRIP command.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
t4 • the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 92)
• the graph with trip curve (page 100)
Parameters
I
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable OFF
menu.
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command. if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as ON
information.
Establishes curve dynamics and the threshold or trip time calculation:
Curve • t = k: fixed time trip t=k
• t = k/I 2: inverse time-delay dynamic trip
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time.
Threshold I4 0,2 In
The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
can be set within the range: 0.1 In to 1 In, in 0.001 In steps
It is the trip time or contributes towards timing calculation, depending on
the type of curve selected.
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 1
Time t4 s, in 0.05 s steps 0,4 s
NOTE: in the presence of curve: t = k, t4 can also be configured as:
instantaneous; in this mode, the trip time is comparable to that
given for I protection (page 92)
Warns that the measured current is near to the protection activation
threshold.
The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set within the
Prealarm I4 range 50% I4 to 90% I4, in 1% steps. 90 % I4
The prealarm condition deactivates in two cases:
• current lower than prealarm threshold I4
• current higher than threshold I4
Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on the
display (page 80)
ZoneSelectivity OFF
NOTE: the function is only available with curve t = k

This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function
activated and selectivity input not present (page 80)
Selectivity time 0,04 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to
0.2 s, in 0.01 s steps
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated
StartUp enable OFF
parameters on the display (page 83)
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in which
StartUp the function is activated (page 83)
0,2 In
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and
can be set within the range: 0.2 In to 1 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated, as
calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded (page
StartUp Time 83) 0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 30
s, in 0.01 s steps

Continued on the next page

57 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Limitations and additional functions

• in the presence of curve t= k/I 2, the protection trip time is forced to t4 if the calculation results give a
theoretical value lower than t4 itself
• in the absence of Vaux, the minimum threshold is 0.3 In (for In <= 100 A), 0,25 In (for In <= 400 A) or 0.2 In
(for all the other sizes); if lower values are set, the Trip unit forces the threshold to the minimum admissible
value and the "Configuration" error appears
• depending on the I4 threshold setting, the protection deactivates for an Ig higher than: 8 In with threshold
I4 ≥ 0.8 In; 6 In with 0.8 In > I4 ≥ 0.5 In; 4 In with 0,5 In > I4 ≥ 0,2 In; 2 In with I4 > 0.2 In
• with t4=instantaneous operation is guaranteed in the presence of Vaux; in self-supply mode, the Trip unit
forces the time to 100 ms and the "Configuration" error appears
• the block functions and type of selectivity can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via
Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 80)
• with CB in UL standard configuration, some parameters have different maximum values: I4 maximum =
1200A, Startup maximum = 1200A, t4 maximum = 400ms

Protection MCR Function

The protection remains activated for a time interval running from the open - closed change of status of the
t CB, after which it deactivates.
I3 MCR
If, during this time interval, the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I3, the protection transmits
the TRIP command after a non-programmable fixed time.
The MCR protection only functions with Vaux or with supply via the Measurement enabler with voltage
sockets module.
I To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
• the graph with trip curve (page 99)
NOTE: to activate MCR, protection I must be disabled

Parameter Description Default

Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu.
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold I3 The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and 6 In
can be set within the range: 1.5 In to 15 In, in 0.1 In steps
Defines the time interval in which the MCR protection remains
activated, as calculated from the open - closed change of status
Monitor Time 0,04 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s
to 0.5 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or
communication via system bus (page 80)

58 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2I Protection Function
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I31 and a trip event is present, the protection
t transmits the TRIP command after a non-programmable fixed time.
I31 2I
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
• the graph with trip curve (page 99)
Parameter Description Default
I Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu.
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold I31 The value is given as both absolute value (A) and relative value (In) and 1,5 In
can be set within the range: 1.5 In to 15 In, in 0.1 In steps

Protection enabling makes the 2I Mode section available in the Advanced - Functions menu, where the
protection activation event can be configured:
Parameter Description Default
Two alternative modes are available:
• Dependent function: the protection is activated if the programmed
Dependent
Activation activation event has occurred; this configuration makes the function
function
and delay parameters available
• Activated: the protection is always activated
The activation event between the input contacts of Ekip Signalling 2K,
the statuses of the unit (open/closed) and the Custom function can be
selected
Function Disabled
NOTE: Ekip Connect allows the Custom function to be
customized so as to associate the activation event with up to
eight statuses in AND or OR configuration
Protection activation delay calculated from the presence of the
activation event onwards.
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0 s to
Delay 0s
100 s, in 0.1 s steps
NOTE: the protection trips if the event is present for longer than
the set time lag

RELT - Ekip signalling 2K-3

If the RELT module is present a dedicated command (RELT Wizard) will be displayed. This will program the 2I
protection and other related parameters; for details see page 220.
Commands by remote control
Two further temporary protection activation/deactivation commands are available when the unit is connected
to one or more Ekip Com modules:
• 2I ON Mode: activates the protection
• 2I OFF Mode: deactivates the protection
For further details consult the document 1SDH001140R0001.
NOTE: if the protection has been activated by command 2I ON Mode, it is deactivated by
command 2I OFF Mode or when the unit shuts down

Signallings
When protection 2I is activated, the message “2I active” appears in the diagnostic bar and in the Alarm List
page, and the alarm led will be on steady.

59 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

IU Protection Function
The protection trips if the current readings are unbalanced; the protection sends a TRIP command if the
t detected unbalance exceeds threshold I6 for longer than t6.
I6 IU The protection is automatically self-excluding in two cases:
• the measurement of at least one current exceeds 6 In
t6 • the maximum current among all the phases is less than 0.3 In
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
I • summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
• the graph with trip curve (page 102)
Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Enable Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters menu OFF
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the
Trip Enable OFF
alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Allows the unbalance calculation mode to be selected:
• Old: % Sbil = 100 x (I max - I min) / I max
• New: % Sbil = 100 x (Δmax I mi) / I mi
Version Old
NOTE:Δmax I mi: maximum deviation among the measured currents,
calculated by comparing each current with the mean value;
I mi: mean value of the current readings
Establishes the unbalance value that trips the protection.
Threshold I6 Unbalance is given in percentage value within the range: 2% to 90% with 1% 50 %
steps.
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can be
Time t6 5s
set within a range: 0.5 s to 60 s, in 0.5 s steps

Neutral Protection Function

Neutral protection characterizes protections L, S and I differently on the neutral phase by introducing a
different control factor from the other phases.
The protection is available with the 4P and 3P + N configuration; the configuration parameters can be
accessed via the Settings menu (page 46).
Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Enable Activates/deactivates the protection OFF
Defines the multiplicative factor applied to the trip thresholds and curves of
the protections for the current read on phase Ne:
Neutral • 50 %: lowest trip thresholds for the neutral current
50 %
threshold • 100 %: same trip thresholds for all phases
• 150 %: highest trip thresholds for the neutral current
• 200 %: highest trip thresholds for the neutral current

Limitations and additional functions

Ekip Touch rejects modification of thresholds I1 and InN in the absence of the following limitation: (I1 x InN)
≤ Iu
• I1 is the threshold of L protection in Amperes (example: In= 400 A and I1= 0.6 becomes I1= 240 A)
• InN is the neutral threshold expressed as multiplicative factor (example: InN= 200% becomes InN= 2)
• Iu is the size of the CB
WARNING! With 150% and 200% threshold; if the measured neutral current exceeds
16In, the Trip unit resets the protection to 100% by itself

60 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Harmonic Distortion Protection Allows an alarm to be activated in the case of distorted wavefoms.
The protection can be enabled in the Measurements menu; if enabled an alarm is activated (page 45).
IMPORTANT: the protection does not handle the trip, just the signal

T Protection T protection protects against abnormal temperatures measured and transmitted to the sensor inside the unit;
temperature verification is always active and includes three operating states:
State Temperature range [°C] Ekip Touch actions
Standard -25 < t < 70 Normal operation; display state depending on type (1)
Warnings -40 < t < -25 or 70 < t < 85 Warning led @ 0.5 Hz; display state depending on type (1)
Display off; Alarm and Warning leds @ 2 Hz; TRIP if Trip
Alarm t < -40 or t > 85
enable is activated

(1)
with Ekip Touch, the display remains on within range: -20°C / +70°C; with Ekip LCD, the display remains
on within range: -30°C / +80°C
All protections enabled in the unit are active in all operating states.
The Trip Enabling parameter can be enabled in the Settings - Circuit breaker menu in order to handle an open
command if an alarm occurs (page 46).

Hardware Trip Protection Hardware Trip protects against connection errors in Ekip Touch and is available in the Settings - Circuit
breaker - Hardware Trip menu (page 45).
If enabled, with the CB closed, if one or more of these events are detected:
• current sensors disconnected (phase or external if enabled)
• Rating Plug disconnected.
• Trip Coil disconnected
• faults inside the unit
the alarm is signaled and a TRIP command is transmitted.
IMPORTANT:

• the protection trips if the error statuses persist for more than one second
• the signal is activated in the case of an alarm due to Trip coil disconnection and, in the presence
of Vaux, output YO is commanded until the Trip unit detects the CB Open state (make sure that
YO, Ekip Actuator, YO coil supply are present)

61 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 2 - Standard Protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Voltage protections

List The Voltage protections, available by default for Ekip Hi-Touch, Ekip G Touch, Ekip G-Hi Touch models and
configurable in the remaining models as additional SW package, are:
Name Type of protection Page
UV Minimum voltage 62
OV Maximum voltage 63
UV2 (1)
Minimum voltage 63
OV2 (1) Maximum voltage 64
Phase Sequence Phase sequence error 64
VU Voltage unbalance 64

(1)
protections UV2 and OV2 are not available by default with Ekip G Touch. However, they can be integrated by
requesting the relative SW package

UV Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if one or more line-to-line voltages detected by the unit drop below
t threshold U8 for longer than t8.
UV
U8 To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
t8 • the graph with trip curve (page 102)
Parameters
v Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable OFF
menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the
Trip Enable OFF
alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold U8 The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and 0,9 Un
can be set within the range: 0.05 Un to 1 Un in 0.001 Un steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can
Time t8 5s
be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

62 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 3 - Voltage protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

OV Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if one or more line-to-line voltages detected by the unit exceed
t threshold U9 for longer than t9.
U9 OV To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 103)
t9
Parameters

V Parameter Description Default

Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable OFF
menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the
Trip Enable OFF
alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold U9 The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and 1,05 Un
can be set within the range: 1 Un to 1.5 Un in 0.001 Un steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can
Time t9 5s
be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 80).

UV2 Protection Function

UV2 protection functions in the same way as UV protection: the protection sends a TRIP command if one or
t more line-to-line voltages detected by the unit drop below threshold U15 for longer than t15.
UV2
U15 It is independent of UV protection, thus thresholds and functions of the two protections can be programmed
so as to take advantage of different plant solutions (example: signaling with UV and open command with UV2
t15 or vice versa, or both for signaling or tripping).
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
v • summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 102)
Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable OFF
menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the
Trip Enable OFF
alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold
The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and 0,9 Un
U15
can be set within the range: 0.05 Un to 1 Un in 0.001 Un steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can
Time t15 5s
be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 80).

63 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 3 - Voltage protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

OV2 Protection Function

OV2 protection functions in the same way as OV protection: the protection sends a TRIP command if one or
t more line-to-line voltages detected by the unit exceed threshold U16 for longer than t16.
U16 OV2
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
t16 • the graph with trip curve (page 103)
Parameters
V Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable OFF
menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the
Trip Enable OFF
alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold
The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and 1,05 Un
U16
can be set within the range: 1 Un to 1.5 Un in 0.001 Un steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can
Time t16 5s
be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

Phase sequence protection The Phase Sequence protection enables an alarm to be activated when the sequence of line-to-line voltages
is not aligned with the sequence set by the user.
The required sequence can be set in the Settings menu and the protection activated in the Advanced menu
(page 46 and page 44).

VU Protection Function
The protection trips if the line-to-line voltages read by the unit are unbalanced; the protection sends a TRIP
t command if the detected unbalance exceeds threshold U14 for longer than t14.
U14 VU The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 0.3 Un
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
t14 • summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 103)
V Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable OFF
menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the
Trip Enable OFF
alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Establishes the unbalance value that trips the protection.
Unbalance is expressed in percentage value and is calculated in the
following way: % Unba = 100 x (Δmax U mi) / U mi in range: 2% to 90% in 1%
Threshold
steps. 50 %
U14
NOTE: Δmax U mi : maximum deviation among the three voltages
calculated by comparing each line-to-line voltage with the mean value;
U mi : mean value of the line-to-line voltages
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can
Time t14 5s
be set within a range: 0.5 s to 60 s, in 0.5 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

64 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 3 - Voltage protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

4 - Voltage Advanced protections

List The Advanced Voltage protections, available by default for the Ekip G Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch models and
configurable in the remaining models as additional SW package, are:
Name Type of protection Page
S(V) Short-circuit with voltammetric control 65
S2(V) (1) Short-circuit with voltammetric control 66
RV Residual voltage 68

(1)
S2(V) protection is not available by default with Ekip G Touch. However, it can be integrated by requesting
the relative SW package

S(V) Protection Function

S(V) protection protects against short circuits, with a threshold sensitive to the value of the voltage.
t If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I20 for longer than time t20, the protection activates
I20 S(V)
and sends a TRIP command.
Threshold I20, after a voltage drop, varies in two different modes:
t20 • Step provides for a stepped variation, depending on parameters Ul and Ks.
• Lin (linear) provides for a dynamic variation, depending on parameters Ul, Uh and Ks.
I
I I
I20 I20

Ks x I20 Ks x I20

UI Uh
Ul V V
Figure 22

To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 104)
Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Curve Allows the operating mode, Step or Lin, to be selected Scal
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time.
Threshold I20 1 In
The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value
(In) and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps

Continued on the next page

65 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 4 - Voltage Advanced protections
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Parameter Description Default

This is the voltage that determines the change in trip threshold I20;
the behavior differs, depending on the mode selected (1)
Threshold Ul 1 Un
The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
and can be set within the range: 0.2 Un to 1 Un in 0.01 Un steps
The parameter is shown by the Lin curve and contributes towards I20
trip threshold calculation:
• with voltage reading < Uh (and ≥ Ul), the threshold changes
Threshold Uh gradually (1) 1 Un
• with voltage reading ≥ Uh, the threshold is I20
The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
and can be set within the range: 0.2 Un to 1 Un in 0.01 Un steps
I20 threshold calculation constant.
Threshold Ks The value is given as percentage of threshold I20 and can be set 0,6 I20
within the range: 0.1 I20 to 1 I20, in 0.01 steps
This is the trip time of the protection.
Time t20 The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.05 s 0.1 s
to 30 s, in 0.01 s steps

(1) Trip threshold (depending on the operating curve)

Mode Voltage reading Trip threshold
< UI Ks x I20
Scal
≥ UI I20
< UI Ks x I20
Lin
≥ Ul (e < Uh) ((I20 x ( 1 - Ks ) x ( U mis - Uh ) ) / (Uh - Ul) ) + I20

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

S(V) Protection Function

S2(V) protection functions in the same way as S(V) protection and protects against short-circuits, with
t threshold sensitive to the voltage value.
I21 S2(V)
It is independent of S(V) protection, thus thresholds and functions of the two protections can be programmed
so as to take advantage of different plant solutions (example: signaling with S(V) and open command with
S2(V) or vice versa, or both S(V) and S2(V) for signaling or tripping).
t21
If the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I21 for longer than time t21, the protection activates
and sends a TRIP command.
I
Threshold I21, after a voltage drop, varies in two different modes:
• Step provides for a stepped variation, depending on parameters Ul2 and Ks2.
• Lin (linear) provides for a dynamic variation, depending on parameters Ul2, Uh2 and Ks2.

I I
I21 I21

Ks2 x I21 Ks2 x I21

Ul2 V Ul2 Uh2 V

Figure 23

To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 104)

Continued on the next page

66 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 4 - Voltage Advanced protections
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Curve Allows the operating mode, Step or Lin, to be selected Scal
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time.
Threshold I21 1 In
The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value
(In) and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
It is the voltage that determines the change in trip threshold I21; the
behavior differs, depending on the mode selected (1)
Threshold Ul2 1 Un
The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
and can be set within the range: 0.2 Un to 1 Un in 0.01 Un steps
The parameter is shown by the Lin curve and contributes towards I21
trip threshold calculation:
• with voltage reading < Uh2 (and ≥ Ul2), the threshold changes
Threshold Uh2 gradually (1) 1 Un
• with voltage reading ≥ Uh2, the threshold is I21
The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
and can be set within the range: 0.2 Un to 1 Un in 0.01 Un steps
I21 threshold calculation constant.
Threshold Ks2 The value is given as percentage of threshold I21 and can be set 0,6 I21
within the range: 0.1 I21 to 1 I21, in 0.01 steps
This is the trip time of the protection.
Time t20 The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.05 s 0.1 s
to 30 s, in 0.01 s steps

(1) Trip threshold (depending on the operating curve)

Mode Voltage reading Trip threshold

< UI2 Ks2 x I21
Scal
≥ UI2 I21
< UIs Ks2 x I21
Lin
≥ Ul2 (e < Uh2) ((I21 x ( 1 - Ks2 ) x ( U mis - Uh2 ) ) / (Uh2 - Ul2) ) + I21

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

67 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 4 - Voltage Advanced protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

RV Protection Function
The protection trips if loss of insulation occurs (verification of residual voltage U0); the protection sends a
t TRIP command if voltage U0 exceeds threshold U22 for longer than t2.
U22 RV The protection is always available in the 4P configuration.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
t22 • summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 104)
V Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold U22 The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) 0,15 Un
and can be set within the range: 0.05 Un to 0.5 Un in 0.001 Un steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and
Time t22 15 s
can be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps
This is the time the alarm is retained after the protection has quit the
alarm condition; it can be useful for keeping the timing activated when
Reset Time the protection is temporarily deactivated. 0s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0 s to
0.2 s, in 0.02 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

68 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 4 - Voltage Advanced protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

5 - Frequency protections

List The Frequency protections, available by default for Ekip Hi-Touch, Ekip G Touch, Ekip G-Hi Touch models and
configurable in the remaining models as additional SW package, are:
Name Type of protection Page
UF Minimum frequency 69
OF Maximum frequency 70
UF2 (1)
Minimum frequency 70
OF2 (1) Maximum frequency 71

(1)
protections UF2 and OF2 are not available by default with Ekip G Touch. However, they can be integrated by
requesting the relative SW package

UF Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if the grid frequency read by the unit drops below threshold f12 for
t longer than t12.
UF
f12 The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
t12 • summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 105)
f Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold f12 The value is given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn) 0,9 Fn
and can be set within the range: 0.9 Fn to 1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and
Time t12 3s
can be set within a range: 0.06 s to 300 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

69 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 5 - Frequency protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

OF Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if the grid frequency read by the unit exceeds threshold f13 for longer
t than t13.
f13 OF The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
t13 • summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 105)
f Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold f13 The value is given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn) 1,1 Fn
and can be set within the range: 1 Fn to 1.1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and
Time t13 3s
can be set within a range: 0.06 s to 300 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

UF2 Protection Function

UF2 protection functions in the same way as UF protection: the protection sends a TRIP command if the grid
t frequency read by the unit drops below threshold f17 for longer than t17.
UF2
f17 It is independent of UF protection, thus thresholds and functions of the two protections can be programmed
so as to take advantage of different plant solutions (example: signaling with UF and open command with UF2
t17 or vice versa, or both for signaling or tripping).
The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
f To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 105)
Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold f17 The value is given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn) 0,9 Fn
and can be set within the range: 0.9 Fn to 1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and
Time t17 3s
can be set within a range: 0.06 s to 300 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

70 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 5 - Frequency protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

OF2 Protection Function

OF2 protection functions in the same way as OF protection: the protection sends a TRIP command if the grid
t frequency read by the unit exceeds threshold f18 for longer than t18.
f18 OF2
It is independent of OF protection, thus thresholds and functions of the two protections can be programmed
so as to take advantage of different plant solutions (example: signaling with OF and open command with OF2
or vice versa, or both for signaling or tripping).
t18
The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
f To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 105)
Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold f18 The value is given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn) 1,1 Fn
and can be set within the range: 1 Fn to 1.1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and
Time t18 3s
can be set within a range: 0.06 s to 300 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

71 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 5 - Frequency protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

6 - Power protections

List The Power protections, available by default for Ekip Hi-Touch, Ekip G Touch, Ekip G-Hi Touch models and
configurable in Ekip Touch as additional SW package, are:
Name Type of protection Page
RP Reverse active power 72
D (2) Directional short-circuit with adjustable delay 75
OQ (1)
Maximum reactive power 75
OP (1) Active overpower 75
UP (1) Active underpower 76
RQ (1)(2)
Reverse reactive power 76
Cos φ Minimum Cos φ 77

(1)
the protection is not available by default with Ekip Hi-Touch. However, it can be integrated by requesting the
relative SW package
(2)
the protection is not available by default with Ekip G Touch. However, it can be integrated by requesting the
relative SW package

WARNING! The Power flow parameters effect the sign of the power and power factor
values measured by the unit. Power flow must be configured and verified on the
basis of your installation to ensure that all the protections of the Power Protections
package function correctly

RP Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if the reverse total active power exceeds threshold P11 for longer
t than t1.
RP P11
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
t11 • the graph with trip curve (page 106)
Parameters
P Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable OFF
menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
The value is given as both absolute value (kW) and relative value (Sn) and
Threshold f11 can be set within the range: -0.05 Sn to -1 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps 0,1 Sn
NOTE: the threshold expressed in Sn is preceded by the “-” sign to
indicate that inverse power is involved
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and
Time t11 10 s
can be set within a range: 0.05 s to 120 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

72 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

D Protection Function
D protection is very similar to S protection, with the additional capability of recognizing the direction of the
t current during a fault.
I7 D The current direction allows the user to find out whether the fault is on the supply side or load side of the
t7bw device controlled by Ekip Touch.
t7fw In ring type distribution systems, D protection allows the distribution section in which the fault has occurred
to be identified and disconnected without affecting the rest of the installation (using zone selectivity).
I Depending on the direction of the fault, if the current of one or more phases exceeds threshold I7 (I7fw or
I7bw) for longer than time t7 (t7fw or t7bw), the protection activates and sends a TRIP command.
The fault direction is established by comparing the detected fault current with the reference direction.
NOTE: the reference direction is calculated considering the set value of the power flow
direction and the phase sequence (cyclic direction of the phases):

Phase sequence Reference direction

Phase sequence (set) Power flow (set)
(detected) (forward direction)
123 High-->Low 123 High-->Low
123 Bottom --> Top 123 Bottom --> Top
123 High-->Low 321 Bottom --> Top
123 Bottom --> Top 321 High-->Low
321 High-->Low 123 Bottom --> Top
321 Bottom --> Top 123 High-->Low
321 High-->Low 321 High-->Low
321 Bottom --> Top 321 Bottom --> Top

To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• the summary table of the protections with the calculation formulas (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 106)
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable OFF
menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the
Trip Enable ON
alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Establishes the value that activates the protection with forward direction.
Threshold I7 Fw The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In) 4 In
and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
Establishes the value that activates the protection with backward direction.
Threshold i7
The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In) 4 In
Bw
and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the trip time in the case of forward direction.
Time t7 Fw The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 0.8 0,2 s
s, in 0.01 s steps
This is the trip time in the case of backward direction.
Time t7 Bw The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 0.8 0,2 s
s, in 0.01 s steps
Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on the
ZoneSelectivity display.
OFF
(1)
NOTE: configure selectivities S, S2 OFF to ensure that selectivity D
functions correctly, G, Gext and MDGF
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function
Selectivity time activated, forward direction and selectivity input Fw not present.
0,13 s
Fw (1) The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 0.8
s, in 0.01 s steps
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function
Selectivity time activated, backward direction and selectivity input Bw not present.
0,13 s
Bw (1) The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 0.8
s, in 0.01 s steps

Continued on the next page

73 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Parameter Description Default

Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated
StartUp enable OFF
parameters on the display
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in which the
StartUp function is activated and with forward current direction (2).
4 In
Threshold Fw (2)
The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In)
and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in which the
StartUp function is activated and with backward current direction.
4 In
Threshold Bw (2) The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value (In)
and can be set within the range: 0.6 In to 10 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and is
calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded
StartUp Time (2)
0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 30 s,
in 0.01 s steps
Ekip Touch calculates the phase displacement angle between active and
apparent power measured: when phase displacement exceeds the set
Direction Min
Direction Min Angle parameter, the unit considers the fault direction to have 3,6 °
Angle
been identified. The value is given in degrees and can be set within a range
of 15 values from 3.6° to 69.6°

(1)
details on page 81
(2)
details on page 83

Limitations and additional functions

the functions blocking the type of selectivity and the Trip only Forward and Trip Only Backward parameters
can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or communication via system
bus (page 83).
Notes
• activation of D directional protection automatically activates the alarm that monitors phase sequence (which
can also be excluded and activated in the manual mode): note how, in the case of a cyclic sequence of
phases that differs from the set value, in the event of a fault the directional protection inverts the reference
direction with respect to the expected direction; details of the phase sequence protection are available
on page 64
• in the case of small overcurrents, the behavior of the directional protection is influenced by the type of
load: to prevent the direction of the fault current from being incorrectly interpreted in the case of capacitive
loads, it is advisable for the setting of that protection to be made on the basis of real fault conditions and
not overloads

74 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

OQ Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if one or more of the reactive power values detected by the unit
t exceed threshold Q27 for longer than t27.
Q27 OQ To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
t27 • the graph with trip curve (page 107)
Parameters
Q Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold Q27 The value is given as both absolute value (kVAR) and relative value 1 Sn
(Sn) and can be set within the range: 0.4 Sn to 2 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and
Time t27 1s
can be set within a range: 0.5 s to 100 s, in 0.5 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

OP Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if one or more of the active power values detected by the unit exceed
t threshold P26 for longer than t26.
P26 OP To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
t26 • the graph with trip curve (page 107)
Parameters
P Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold P26 The value is given as both absolute value (kW) and relative value (Sn) 1 Un
and can be set within the range: 0.4 Sn to 2 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and
Time t26 1s
can be set within a range: 0.5 s to 100 s, in 0.5 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

75 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

UP Protection Function
The protection sends a TRIP command if one or more of the active power values detected by the unit drop
t below threshold P23 for longer than t23.
UP
P23 The protection is active also for negative (reverse) active power, but is independent from the RP protection
(Reverse active power protection).
t23 The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
P • summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 108)
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as OFF
information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold P23 The value is given as both absolute value (kW) and relative value (Sn) 1 Sn
and can be set within the range: 0.1 Sn to 1 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and
Time t23 1s
can be set within a range: 0.5 s to 100 s, in 0.5 s steps
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the StartUp Time
StartUp enable OFF
parameter in the menu
This is the time for which the threshold remains disabled and is
calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded
StartUp Time 0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
30 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

RQ Protection Function
RQ protection protects against reactive power reversal; the threshold can be adjusted on the basis of the
active power.
The protection sends a TRIP command when inverse reactive power enters the TRIP area, determined by the
protection parameters and power value readings, for longer than t24.
Adjustment of constants Kq and Kq2 allows the trip threshold of the protection (determined by the intersection
of the two TRIP areas, whose limits depend on the parameters configured in the unit) to be changed.

Kq2 Kq

P
Q24
TRIP
Q25

Figure 24

To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 108)

Continued on the next page

76 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable OFF
menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the
Trip Enable OFF
alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Defines the gradient of the line relating to threshold Q24.
Threshold Kq The value is given as absolute value (slope of the line) and can be set within -2
the range: -2 to 2 in 0.01 steps
This is the reactive power required to define the trip line and relative TRIP
area
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (kVAR) and relative value (Sn) and
0,1 Sn
-Q24 can be set within the range: 0.1 Sn to 1 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
NOTE: the threshold expressed in Sn is not preceded by the “-” sign,
but should still be understood as inverse reactive power
Defines the gradient of the line relating to threshold Q24.
Threshold
The value is given as absolute value (slope of the line) and can be set within 2
Kq2
the range: -2 to 2 in 0.01 steps
Defines the reactive power value at which the protection trips and is
required for the purpose of defining the relative TRIP area
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (kVAR) and relative value (Sn) and
0,11 Sn
-Q25 can be set within the range: 0.1 Sn to 1 Sn in 0.001 Sn steps
NOTE: the threshold expressed in Sn is not preceded by the “-” sign,
but should still be understood as inverse reactive power
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can
Time t24 100 s
be set within a range: 0.5 s to 100 s, in 0.1 s steps
This is the minimum activation voltage of the protection. The protection is
not activated if at least one line-to-line voltage value is less than threshold
Threshold
Vmin. 0.5 Un
Vmin
The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and
can be set within the range: 0.5 Un to 1.2 Un in 0.01 Un steps

Limitations and additional functions

• Ekip Touch accepts parameters in accordance with the following limitations: Q24 < Q25 and Kq < Kq2
• the block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

Cos φ Protection The protection activates an alarm when the total Cos φ value drops below the set threshold.
Total cos φ is calculated as ratio between total active Power and total apparent Power.
Parameters
The parameters are available in the Advanced - Signaling menu (page 44)
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and availability of the threshold in the
Enable OFF
menu
Defines the value that activates the protection; can be set within the range:
Threshold 0,95
0.5 to 0.95 in 0.01 steps

77 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 6 - Power protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

7 - ROCOF protections
The ROCOF Protection package is available by default for Ekip G Hi-Touch and configurable in the remaining
models as additional SW package
The protection is described below:

ROCOF Protection Function

ROCOF protection protects against rapid frequency variations: the protection sends a TRIP command if the
t frequency changes faster than control variation f28 set in the unit for longer than t28.
f28 ROCOF

f(Hz) Frequency variation

t28 after failure(1)
Frequency fluctuation
Hz/s
(after a failure)
f28
fmis

t28 t(s)
Figure 25

(1)
example with positive linear variation of the higher frequency of the set f28 value; the protection also
manages negative variations

The protection excludes itself if the maximum value of the line-to-line voltage is less than 30 V.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 93)
• the graph with trip curve (page 109)
Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable OFF
menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the
Trip Enable OFF
alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
establishes the maximum admissible frequency variation rate over time; the
protection trips if this rate is exceeded.
Threshold f28 0,6 Hz/s
The value is given as absolute value (Hz/s) Fn) and can be set within the
range: 0.4 Hz/s to 10 Hz/s in 0.2 Hz/s steps
Establishes whether the protection monitors an increase (Up), a decrease
Trip Direction Up or Down
(Down) or both variations (Up and Down)
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can
Time f28 0,5 s
be set within a range: 0.06 s to 300 s, in 0.01 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or by
connection to the system bus (page 83).

78 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 7 - ROCOF protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

8 - Protection Adaptive
The Adaptive Protection package is available by default for Ekip Hi-Touch and Ekip G Hi-Touch and
configurable in the remaining models as additional SW package.
The protection is described below:

Dual Set The function enables two different protection configurations to be made, one as an alternative to the other,
by means of a set change with programmable events.
The function can be activated in the Settings-Dual Set menu (page 46)
Parameter Description Default
Enable Activates/deactivates the function OFF
Defines the sets of main and secondary protections (which activate in
Default Set Set A
the presence of the programmed event)

The event that determines set change (from default to secondary) can be programmed in the Advanced -
Functions menu, see the paragraph Programmable Functions and Commands (page 89).

79 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 8 - Protection Adaptive
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

9 - Additional protections and functions

Introduction Some protections have additional functions which extend their characteristics and performance:

Name Type of protection Page

Thermal Memory overheating of the cables 80
Zone selectivity management of trip commands in a network of circuit-breakers 80
Blocks blocking of protection on the basis of programmable events 83
Startup different thresholds on the basis of monitoring thresholds 83
Current thresholds Current control with programmable thresholds 88
Programmable
Programmable commands with trip unit events or statuses 89
Commands

Installation of accessory modules allows the respective functions to be activated:

Name Type of protection Page
Gext External earth fault with adjustable delay 84
Rc Residual current 87
Synchrocheck Synchronism between two independent voltage sources 89
MDGF Modified differential ground fault 85

Thermal Memory Protection The function, which is available for L and S protections, allows overheating in the cables connected to the
circuit-breaker to be prevented: in the case of trips within brief intervals, the unit considers the time between
commands and the entity of the faults so as to reduce opening time.
IMPORTANT: for the S protection the function can be activated if the selected curve
is time-dependent.

NOTE: the function also reduces the trip time in the case of overloads which have
not led to the open command (longer than 100ms)

S, S2, I, G zone selectivity The function, which can be activated for S, S2, I, G, Gext and MDGF protections (if available and enabled),
Protection, Gext, MDGF allows several devices belonging to the same installation (including Ekip Touch) to be interconnected, so as
to handle trip commands in the best possible way in the case of S, S2, I, G, Gext and MDGF protections.
The function allows the devices to be coordinated so that, if a fault occurs:
• the device nearest to the fault trips
• the other devices are blocked for a programmable time
NOTE: connection can be made between ABB devices that have the zone selectivity function

Characteristics
Ekip Touch has five selectivity connections, located on the rear connectors of the CB:
Name Type Description Connection
Szi Input S, S2 and I protection selecitivity input From devices on the load side
Szo Output S, S2 and I protection selecitivity output To devices on the supply side
G, Gext and MDGF protection selectivity
Gzi Input From devices on the load side
input
G, Gext and MDGF protection selectivity
Gzo Output To devices on the supply side
output
Szc Common Common connection of selectivity network The entire selectivity network

Continued on the next page

80 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Configuration
To correctly configure the selectivity network of one or more protections:
1. Connect zone selectivity outputs of the same type (example: Szo) of devices belonging to the same zone,
to the zone selectivity input of the device immediately upstream (example: Szi).
2. Connect all the Szc of devices in the same network together.
3. Time t2 must be configured at t2 sel + 50 ms or more, with the exclusion of the device further along its
network.
Logic table
The table includes all cases in which, with zone selectivity enabled in the device, an alarm condition occurs
or a zone selectivity signal is received from another device.
NOTES:

• the table gives the S protection cases, but is also valid for the other protections: G, S2, I, Gext
and MDGF, each with its respective connections
• if the selectivities of protections that share the same connections are active at the same time
(example: S, S2 and I), the inputs/outputs are managed with OR logic
Condition Szi Szo Tripping time Remarks
If < I2 0 0 No TRIP TRIP Il device not in alarm status
The device is not in the alarm status, but sends the
If < I2 1 1 No TRIP
selecitivity signal received from the device upstream
The device is in the alarm status and is the first to detect
If > I2 0 1 t2 sel (1)
the fault: trips within time t2 sel (1)
The device is in the alarm status but is not the first to
If > I2 1 1 t2 (2)
detect the fault: trips within time t2 (2)

(1)
the trip time of protection I is that of protection
(2)
for I protection tripping time is 100ms

D zone selectivity Protection Foreword

This function, which can be activated for D protection (if available and enabled), enables devices belonging
to the same installation (including Ekip Touch) to be connected together so as to handle the trip commands
in a better way in the case of D protection.
It is especially useful in ring and grid type systems where, besides the zone, it is essential to also define the
direction of the power flow that supplies the fault.
The function allows the devices to be coordinated so that, if a fault occurs:
• The device nearest to the fault trips
• The other devices are blocked for a programmable time
NOTES:

• connection can be made between ABB devices that have the zone selectivity function
• disable the zone selectivities of protections S, S2, I, G, Gext and MDGF to correctly use the
selectivity D function
Characteristics
Ekip Touch has five selectivity connections, located on the upper terminal box of the CB:
Name Type Description Denomintion for D
Szi Input Forward direction selectivity input DFin
Szo Output Forward direction selectivity output DFout
Gzi Input Backward direction selectivity input Dbin
Gzo Output Backward direction selectivity output Dbout
Szc Common Common connection of selectivity network SZc

Continued on the next page

81 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Configuration
To correctly configure selectivity D in a ring system:
1. Connect the zone selectivity outputs of each device (example: DFin) to the selectivity input of the same
direction as the device immediately after (example: DFout).
2. Connect all the Szc of devices in the same network together.
Logic table
The table includes all cases in which, with zone selectivity enabled in the device, an alarm condition occurs
or a zone selectivity signal is received from another device.
The Forward output is activated if the fault direction coincides with the reference direction otherwise, if it
is in the opposite direction, the Backward output is activated (page 73)

Fault direc- Tripping

Dbout
Dfout
Condition Remarks

Dbin
DFin
tion time
Forward If < I7 Fw 0 x 0 x
No TRIP Device not in alarm status
Backward If < I7 Bw x 0 x 0
Forward If < I7 Fw 1 x 1 x The device is not in the alarm status, but
No TRIP sends the selecitivity signal received to the
Backward If < I7 Bw x 1 x 1 output of the reference direction
Forward If > I7 Fw 0 x 1 x t7 Fw sel The device is in the alarm status and is the
first to detect the fault: trips within time t7 Fw
Backward If > I7 Bw x 0 x 1 t7 Bw sel sel or t7 Bw sel
Forward If > I7 Fw 1 x 1 x t7 Fw The device is in the alarm status but is not the
first to detect the fault: trips within time t7 Fw
Backward If > I7 Bw x 1 x 1 t7 Bw (or t7 Bw)

NOTE: when zone selectivity is active and the direction of the fault cannot be established,
the unit trips by considering the first threshold to be exceeded between I7 Fw and I7
Bw, without activating any output (DFout or Dbout).; if both the thresholds have been exceeded
(for example, if they have been set with the same value), the unit trips after the shortest time
between t7 Fw and t7 Bw.

Trip Only Forward and D protection can be configured (if available and enabled) with 2 additional parameters via the service
Backward connector (via Ekip Connect) or via system bus communication:
• Trip only Forward: if activated, D protection only controls open commands if forward direction is detected
• Trip only Backward: if activated, D protection only controls open commands if backward direction is detected
faults in the opposite direction are only handled as alarm information.

Type of selectivity The zone selectivity inputs and certain of the outputs can be configured via service connector (via Ekip
Connect) or via system bus communication for protections S, S2, I, G, Gext, MDGF and D (if available and
enabled):
• Standard: operation as by zone selectivity standard logic (default configuration)
• Customized: the event that activates the zone selectivity input or output can be selected in this mode.
IMPORTANT: in the Customized configuration, the only zone selectivity activation
event is the one set and standard selectivity operation is therefore not active
(changes should only be made by expert technical personnel).

82 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Startup Protection The function, which can be activated for protections S, I, G, Gext, MDGF, S2, D and UP (if available and
enabled), allow the protection threshold (StartUp threshold) to be changed for a period that can be set by
the user (Startup time).
NOTE: for UP protection, startup means the time for which the protection is disabled

The period begins after a threshold has been exceeded (activation threshold), user-programmable via Ekip
Connect or system bus, valid and verified for all phase currents.
The Startup condition elapses after Startup time and re-activates the next time the activation threshold is
exceeded
NOTE: startup does not occur again until at least one current remains above activation
threshold level

A graphic representation with S protection follows:

Figure 26

Block functions Six blocks can be configured for certain protections by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect)
or communication via system bus. These blocks are useful for deactivating the protections relating to
programmable events:
Block name Description
BlockOnProgStatusA Block active if programmable status A is true
BlockOnProgStatusB Block active if programmable status B is true
BlockOnProgStatusC Block active if programmable status C is true
BlockOnProgStatusD Block active if programmable status D is true
Block active during StartUp time (if StartUp for the specific protection is
BlockOnStartUp
available and activated)
BlockOnOutOfFrequency Block active if frequency measured is not within 30 Hz to 80 Hz range

Each block is independent and has its own activation command (Block On); however, each protection can be
configured with several block conditions (operation in OR logic condition).
The protections which have blocks are: S, I, G, Gext, MDGF, MCR, S2, D, S(V), S2(V), UV, OV, VU, UV2, OV2,
UP, OP, RP, RQ, OQ, RV, UF, OF, UF2, OF2, ROCOF, UC, U, R Jam, R Stall.
IMPORTANT: the blocks can cause:

• increase of protection trip times (max: + 30 ms), owing to verification of the event itself
(example: (frequency check)
• undesired deactivation of the protection, if the block is associated with statuses or
signals to modules via local bus and auxiliary power supply is absent. In this case, it
may be useful to also consider the status of the auxiliary power supply (Supply from
Vaux) when programming the event
• undesired deactivation of the protection, if the block is associated with frequency
measurements and the voltage is less than the minimum calculation threshold
IMPORTANT: if the function is activated, the blocks are deactivated during startup
(except for BlockOnStartup, which functions during this period)

83 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Gext Protection Function

Gext protection protects against earth faults and detects the fault current with a dedicated external toroid
t S.G.R.
I41 Gext
if S.G.R. toroid current exceeds threshold I41, the protection trips and, after a time established by the value
read and by the parameter settings, transmits the TRIP command.
t41 To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
I • the graph with trip curve (page 100)
Parameters
Sensor configuration is available in the Settings menu (page 46)
Parameter Description Default
External Toroid It allows the presence of external toroid S.G.R. to be activated OFF
Allows the reference current of the protection to be selected from
among four available quantities, from 100 A to 800 A
Toroid size IMPORTANT: the current selected from the menu must be 100 A
consistent with the size of the external toroid S.G.R.
connected to the unit

Protection configuration is available in the Advanced menu (page 44)

Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as ON
information
Establishes curve dynamics and the threshold or trip time calculation:
Curve • t= k: fixed time trip t=k
• t= k/I 2: inverse time-delay dynamic trip
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time.
Threshold I41 0,2 In
The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value
(In) and can be set within the range: 0.1 In to 1 In, in 0.001 In steps
It is the trip time or contributes towards timing calculation, depending
on the type of curve selected.
Time t41 0,4 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
1 s, in 0.05 s steps
Warns that the measured current is near to the protection activation
threshold.
The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set within
Threshold I41 the range 50% I41 to 90% I41, in 1% steps. 90 % I41
The prealarm condition deactivates in two cases:
• current lower than prealarm threshold I41
• current higher than threshold I41

Continued on the next page

84 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Parameter Description Default

Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on
the display (1)
NOTES :
• the function is only available with curve t = k
ZoneSelectivity OFF
• if both selectivities G and Gext are activated, the input and
output are shared with the OR function: it is sufficient for even
only one of the two to be activated to stimulate the inputs and
outputs
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function
activated and selectivity input not present (1)
Selectivity time 0,04 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s
to 0.2 s, in 0.01 s steps
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated
StartUp enable OFF
parameters on the display (2)
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in
StartUp which the function is activated (2)
0,2 In
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value
(In) and can be set within the range: 0.2 In to 1 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and
is calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded (2)
StartUp Time 0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
30 s, in 0.01 s steps

(1)
details on page 80
(2)
details on page83
Limitations and additional functions
• in the presence of curve t= k/I2, the protection trip time is forced to t41 if the calculation results give a
theoretical value lower than t41 itself
• Ekip Touch activates and displays Gext protection parameters if the presence of toroid S.G.R has been
enabled in the Settings menu (page 46);protection activation includes checking for the presence of toroide
S.G.R and signaling on the diagnosis bar in the event of alarm/absence
• the protection is automatically inhibited by the unit if absence of toroid S.G.R is detected
• the block functions and type of selectivity can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via
Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 82)
• with CB in UL standard configuration, some parameters have different maximum values: I41 maximum =
1200A, Startup maximum = 1200A, t41 maximum = 400ms

MDGF Protection Function

MDGF protection protects against earth faults and detects the fault current with a dedicated toroid MDGF.
t
I41 if MDGF toroid current exceeds threshold I41, the protection trips and, after a time established by the value
MDGF
read and by the parameter settings, transmits the TRIP command.
To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
t41 • summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
• the graph with trip curve (page 101)
I Parameters
Sensor configuration is available in the Settings menu (page 46)
Parameter Description Default
External Toroid It allows the presence of toroid MDGF to be activated OFF

Continued on the next page

85 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Protection configuration is available in the Advanced menu (page 44)

Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the
Enable OFF
parameters menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled,
Trip Enable the alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as ON
information
Establishes curve dynamics and the threshold or trip time calculation:
Curve • t= k: fixed time trip t=k
• t= k/I 2: inverse time-delay dynamic trip
Establishes the value that activates the protection and contributes
towards calculating the trip time.
Threshold I41 0,2 In
The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value
(In) and can be set within the range: 0.1 In to 1 In, in 0.001 In steps
It is the trip time or contributes towards timing calculation, depending
on the type of curve selected.
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range:
Time t41 • 0.05 s to 1 s, in 0.05 s steps for t=k 0,4 s
• 0.1 s to 1 s, in 0.05 s steps for t=k/I 2
with CB in UL configuration, the maximum settable value of t41
is 0.4 s
Warns that the measured current is near to the protection activation
threshold.
The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set within
Threshold I41 the range 50% I41 to 90% I41, in 1% steps. 90 % I41
The prealarm condition deactivates in two cases:
• current lower than prealarm threshold I41
• current higher than threshold I41
Activates/deactivates the function and selectivity time availability on
the display (1)
NOTES :
• the function is only available with curve t = k
ZoneSelectivity OFF
• if both selectivities G and MDGF are activated, the input and
output are shared with the OR function: it is sufficient for even
only one of the two to be activated to stimulate the inputs and
outputs
This is the trip time of the protection with the zone selectivity function
activated and selectivity input not present (1)
Selectivity time 0,04 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s
to 0.2 s, in 0.01 s steps
Activates/deactivates the function and availability of the associated
StartUp enable OFF
parameters on the display (2)
Protection threshold valid during Startup time, in the conditions in
StartUp which the function is activated (2)
0,2 In
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative value
(In) and can be set within the range: 0.2 In to 1 In, in 0.1 In steps
This is the time for which the StartUp threshold remains activated and
is calculated from the moment the activation Threshold is exceeded (2)
StartUp Time 0.1 s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to
30 s, in 0.01 s steps

(1)
details on page 80
(2)
details on page 83
Limitations and additional functions
• in the presence of curve t= k/I 2, the protection trip time is forced to t41 if the calculation results give a
theoretical value lower than t41 itself
• Ekip Touch activates and displays MDGF protection parameters if the presence of toroid MDGF has been
enabled in the Settings menu (page 46);
• the block functions and type of selectivity can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via
Ekip Connect) or communication via system bus (page 82)
• with CB in UL standard configuration, some parameters have different maximum values: I41 maximum =
1200A, Startup maximum = 1200A, t41 maximum = 400ms

86 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

RC Protection Function
Rc protection protects against the residual current earth faults by detecting the fault current with the
t appropriate external Rc toroid.
Idn Rc The protection sends a TRIP command if the current from toroid Rc exceeds threshold Idn for longer than
Tdn.
tdn To check and simulate the trip times in relation to all the parameters, please consult:
• summary table of the protections with the operating characteristics (page 92)
I • the graph with trip curve (page 100)
Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Defines the value that activates the protection; the value is given in
Threshold Idn 5A
Amperes and can be set within a range of values from 3 A to 30 A
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and
Time Tdn 0,06 s
can be set within a range of values from 0.05 s to 0.8 s

Limitations and additional functions

Ekip Touch activates and displays the Rc protection parameters if the following conditions are observed:
• Rating Plug Rc model assembled and installed
• Measurement enabler with voltage socket module assembled and installed
protection activation includes checking for the presence of toroid Rc and signaling on the diagnosis bar in
the event of alarm/absence

87 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Current thresholds Function

The Current thresholds allow checks to be set along the current lines, to be associated with the programmable
contacts of the Ekip Signalling modules (in all versions).
Two pairs of programmable contacts are available:
• Threshold 1 I1 and Threshold 2 I1, with control relating to I1
• Threshold Iw1 and Threshold Iw2, with control relating to In
The thresholds can be enabled and set in the Advanced - Signaling menu (page 44).
IMPORTANT:

• the current thresholds do not handle the trip, just the signal
• the function is activated if the trip unit is powered by auxiliary voltage
Parameters
Threshold Available parameters Default
Enable: Activates the protection and availability of the threshold in the menu OFF
Threshold 1 I1 Threshold: The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set
50 % I1
within the range: 50% I1 to 100% I1, in 1% steps.
Enable: Activates the protection and availability of the threshold in the menu OFF
Threshold 2 I1 Threshold: The value is given in percentage of threshold I1 and can be set
75 % I1
within the range: 50% I1 to 100% I1, in 1% steps.
Enable: Activates the protection and availability of the threshold in the menu OFF
Direction: allows the user to choose whether to have the signal when the
Down
Threshold Iw1 current is higher (Up) or lower (Down) than the threshold.
Threshold: The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative
3 In
value (In) and can be set within the range: 0.1 In to 10 In, in 0.01 In steps
Enable: Activates the protection and availability of the threshold in the menu OFF
Direction: allows the user to choose whether to have the signal when the
Up
Threshold Iw2 current is higher (Up) or lower (Down) than the threshold.
Threshold: The value is given as both absolute value (Amperes) and relative
3 In
value (In) and can be set within the range: 0.1 In to 10 In, in 0.01 In steps

Figure 27

88 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Synchrocheck With regard to closing the interconnection switch, the Ekip Synchrocheck module recognizes and reports
whether there are synchronism conditions between two independent voltage sources (example: generator
+ grid).
A description of the module, the protection function and performance is given in the chapter dedicated to
the modules (page 223).

Programmable Functions and Eight commands are available, with activation that can be programmed on the basis of signals or events.
Commands Distributed among different Ekip Touch menus, the commands are:
Name Description Path (page)
External Trip Sends a TRIP command
Advanced - Functions
Trip RESET Reset of the trip signal
(44)
Turn on SET B Changes the protections set, from Set A to Set B
It activates 2I protection, if configured for this Advanced - Functions -
2I Mode
function 2I Menu (59)
Measurements - Energy
RESET Energy Resets the energy meters
(45)
YO Command Sends an open command to YO
Settings - Functions (46)
YC Command Sends a close command to YC (1)
LOCAL Switch On Changes the configuration, from Remote to Local Settings - Modules
Signaling RESET Reset the contacts of the signalling modules -Functions (46)

(1)
the MOE-E storage command must be present
Parameters
Each command provides two programming parameters:
Parameter Description Default
Event or several command activation events (up to eight, in AND
Function or OR logic configuration). The Custom configuration can be Deactivated
programmed via Ekip Connect.
This is the minimum time the expected event must be present in order
Delay to activate the command; the value is given in seconds and can be set 0 s
within a range: 0 s to 100 s, in 0.1 s steps

IMPORTANT: the commands are sent if all the operating conditions expected by the
unit are present (connections, power supplies, alarms, etc.)

89 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 9 - Additional protections and functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

10 - Logic selectivity

Presentation Zone Selectivity via Link Bus is indicated as Logic Selectivity.

Logic Selectivity can be actuated for up to 12 of 15 actors that can be associated with Ekip Touch via Link
Bus (see Ekip Link module, page 212).
Parameters
The function enabling parameter, available from among the parameters that can be set for the protection,
must be set for each protection for which Zone Selectivity must be activated.
In this case, in addition to these parameters, Selectivity time is also activated for the setting.
Otherwise, Zone Selectivity can only be set by means of Ekip Connect software.
NOTE: all the following parameters and configurations are available via Ekip Connect, with
Ekip Link connected and on

Setting Certain parameters can be configured in the Ekip Link configuration page:
• selection of selectivity type: hardware or mixed (hardware and logic)
• entry of the IP address of each actor present; entry of the address enables the configuration parameters
and status indicators to be displayed in the various pages
• the function must be enabled for each actor associated with Ekip Touch via Link Bus and for which logic
selectivity must be actuated (the Actor Selectivity parameter must be given value: True)
selectivity masks are available in the Ekip Link advanced selectivity page for each actor present: the mask
allows the protections of the actors (S, I, G, D-Forward, D-Backward, S2, Gext, MDGF) that activate the
selectivity input of Ekip Touch to be selected (example: actor 1, protection mask S= S2: selectivity S of Ekip
Touch will be active in the presence of signals S2 of actor 1).
In this configuration, if the function is enabled for S protection and is in the alarm status, the S/D-Forward
hardware block signal and the logic selectivity S bit are activated on the output; depending on the block
signals:
• if, on the input, the S/D-Forward hardware block signal and the logic selectivity S2 and Gext/MDGF bits
of actor 1 are not activated, the opening command is sent in accordance with the selectivity time set for
S protection
• a time equal to the trip time of S protection is waited if, on the input, the S/D-Forward hardware block
signal is activated or mixed selectivity has been selected and the S2 or Gext/MDGF logic selectivity bits
of actor 1 are activated (and the opening command is only sent if S protection is still in the alarm status
once this time has elapsed)
NOTES:

• the logic selectivity bits on the output and on the input are those in the data packages shared
by the releases via Link Bus
• the S/D-Forward (G/D-Backward) hardware output is only activated if the S or D-Forward
(G or D-Backward) protections are in the alarm status, and the S/DForward (G/D-Backward)
hardware input only acts as a block for the S and D-Forward (G and D-Backward) protections,
regardless of whether solely hardware or mixed selectivity has been selected
IMPORTANT: if solely hardware selectivity has been selected, the logic selectivity
bits are ignored on the input, but are still activated on the output

Selectivity masks
Remote Programmable States A and B are also included in the selectivity masks: these 2 parameters,
which are available in the Ekip Link configuration page, enable the event (or combination of several events)
and reference actor that activates the selectivity input to be selected.
2 further states are available, C and D, but they cannot be configured for Zone Selectivity. All 4 programmable
states are used for the Programmable Logic function (see Ekip Link module on page 212).
NOTE: the Programmable Logic function is independent from that of Zone Selectivity

90 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 10 - Logic selectivity
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Repetition The Repeat Configuration mask parameter is available in the Ekip Link advanced selectivity page. It
enables the selection of protections whose logic selectivity bit, if present on the input, must be propagated
regardless of the status of the protection on the current unit.
NOTE: the parameter only acts on the selectivity bits. It does not involve the outputs

Diagnostic In the presence of both hardware and logic Selectivity, the diagnosis highlights any errors in the hardware
Selectivity cabling by checking its continuity.
The Ekip Link diagnosis configuration page allows you to: enable diagnosis, configure the interval of time
between one inspection and the next, select the inputs to be checked for each active actor (S/D_Forward,
G/D_Backward).
Then:
• the hardware inputs are checked at regular intervals
• if, in Ekip Touch, the input of an actor is configured for diagnosis (e.g. input S of actor 3) and this input
is not active when the test is performed, the actor stimulates its output (e.g. actor 3 activates output S)
for a short time: Ekip Touch considers the test result to be positive if it receives the signal correctly at its
input, otherwise it will signal error
• the diagnosis check will not be performed if the hw input is active: if the input configured for diagnosis
is active when the test is performed, diagnosis check will not be performed and the Detection state
parameter in the Ekip Link state page will indicate: Unknown

Errors and inconsistencies Regardless of the diagnosis, if a hardware input is active and none of the logic selectivity bits of the associated
actors is active, a line inconsistency for this input is reported in the Ekip Link state page.
NOTE: line inconsistency is ascertained by checking all the actors associated with the unit,
even those for which the function has not been enabled (the Selectivity Actor parameter
has not been assigned value: True)

A line inconsistency (regardless of the diagnosis) is indicative of a possible configuration error (example: a
hardware input of the release is connected to the hardware output of a device not associated via Link Bus,
or of an actor for which the function has not been enabled).
• to prevent a line inconsistency from being signaled, devices whose hardware outputs are connected to the
hardware inputs of Ekip Touch must also be connected to the Link Bus and associated with Ekip Touch,
while the function need not be enabled for them (the Selectivity Actor parameter need not be assigned
value: True)

91 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 10 - Logic selectivity
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

11 - Performance table

General notes: • The performance values given in the next table are valid with  100 ms trip time, temperature and signals
within the operating limits; failure to comply with these limitations could lead to an increase in the tolerances.
• Ekip Touch sends the TRIP command if the signal read exceeds the threshold for longer than the set time
(or the time resulting from the calculation formula)
• With an inverse time-delay trip curve, the calculation refers to a signal with a constant value throughout
the timing: variation of the alarm signal causes a different trip time
• The additional notes are given after all the tables

Standard Protections Protection

Trip time t t (1) Trip threshold tolerance (3) Trip time tolerance
[ANSI code]

(with curve t = k / I 2) Activation for If within range: with If ≤ 6 In: ± 10 % / with

L [49]
(1.05 to 1.2) x I1 If > 6 In: ± 20 %

(with curves 60255-151)

The best between ± 10%
t t = t2 ( with curve t = k )
and 40 ms
with If ≤ 6 In: ± 7 % / with If >
S [50TD / 51]
6 In: ± 10 % with If ≤ 6 In: ± 15 % / with
If > 6 In: ± 20 %
(with curve t = k / I )
2

with If ≤ 6 In: ± 7 % / with If > The best between ± 10%

S2 [50TD] t t = t5
6 In: ± 10 % and 40 ms
I [50] t t ≤ 30 ms ± 10 % --
The best between ± 10%
t t = t4 ( with curve t = k )
and 40 ms (2)
G [50N TD / 51N] ±7%
± 15 %
(with curve t = k / I 2)
MCR t t ≤ 30 ms ± 10 % --
2I [50] (10)
± 10 % --
with t6 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms
/ with t6 < 5 s the best
IU [46] t t = t6 ± 10 %
between ± 10 % and ± 40
ms

Startup

Protection
Trip time t t Trip threshold tolerance (3) Trip time tolerance
[ANSI code]
with If ≤ 6 In: ± 7 % / with If > The best between ± 10%
S StartUp t t = t2 startup
6 In: ± 10 % and 40 ms
I StartUp t t ≤ 30 ms ± 10 % --
The best between ± 10%
G StartUp t t = t4 startup ±7%
and 40 ms
with If ≤ 6 In: ± 7 % / with If > The best between ± 10%
S2 StartUp t t = t5 startup
6 In: ± 10 % and 40 ms

92 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 11 - Performance table
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Voltage protections Protection Trip threshold

Trip time t t Trip time tolerance
[ANSI code] tolerance (3)
with t8 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t8 < 5 s: the
UV [27] / UV2 [27] t t = t8 (t15) ± 2 % (4)
best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
with t9 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t9 < 5 s: the
OV [59] / OV2 [59] t t = t9 (t16) ± 2 % (4)
best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
with t14 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t14 < 5 s: the
VU [47] t t = t14 ± 5 % (11)
best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms

Voltage Advanced protections Protection Trip threshold

Trip time t t Trip time tolerance
[ANSI code] tolerance (3)
S(V) [51V] / S2(V) with t20 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t20 < 5 s: the
t t = t20 (t21) ± 10 %
[51V] best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
with t22 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t22 < 5 s: the
RV [59N] t t = t22 ± 10 %
best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms

Frequency protections Protection Trip threshold

Trip time t t Trip time tolerance
[ANSI code] tolerance (3)
with t12 ≤ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t12 < 5 s: the
UF [81L] / UF2
t t = t12 (t17) ± 1 % (5) best between ± 10 % (min = 30 ms) and ±
[87L]
40 ms
OF [81H] / OF2 with t13 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t13 < 5 s: the
t t = t13 (t18) ± 1 % (5)
[87H] best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms

Power protections Protection Trip threshold

Trip time t t Trip time tolerance
[ANSI code] tolerance (3)
with t23 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t23 < 5 s: the
UP [32LF] t t = t23 ± 10 %
best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
with t26 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t26 < 5 s: the
OP [320F] t t = t26 ± 10 %
best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
with t24 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t24 < 5 s: the
RQ [40 o 32R] t t = t24 ± 10 %
best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
with t27 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t27 < 5 s: the
OQ [320F] t t = t27 ± 10 %
best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms
with If ≤ 6 In: ± 7 % / with t7 ≥ 400 ms: ± 40 ms / with t7 < 400 ms:
D [67] t t = t7
with If > 6 In: ± 10 % ± 20 ms and ± 10%, whichever is the highest
with t11 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t11 < 5 s: the
RP [32R] t t = t11 ± 10 %
best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms

Startup

Protection Trip threshold

Trip time t t Trip time tolerance
[ANSI code] tolerance (3)
con t11 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / con t11 < 5 s: il
D StartUp t t = t7 startup ± 10 %
migliore tra ± 10 % e ± 40 ms
with t23 ≥ 5 s: ± 100 ms / with t23 < 5 s: the
UP StartUp t t = t23 startup ± 10 %
best between ± 10 % and ± 40 ms

ROCOF Protection Protection Trip threshold

Trip time t t Trip time tolerance
[ANSI code] tolerance (3)
ROCOF [81R] t t = t28 ± 10 % (6) the best between ± 20% and 200 ms

93 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 11 - Performance table
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Additional protections Protection Trip threshold

Trip time t t (1) Trip time tolerance
[ANSI code] tolerance (3)
t t = t41 ( with curve t = k ) The best between ± 10% and 40 ms
Gext
±7%
[50GTD / 51G] ± 15 %
(with curve t = k / I )
2

Rc 140 ms @ 0,06 s (9)

t t = tdn -20 % ÷ 0
[64 50N TD 87N] 950 ms @ 0,8 s (9)
t=k The best between ± 10% and 40 ms
MDGF ±7%
t=k/l 2
± 15 %

Startup

Protection Trip threshold

Trip time t t (1) Trip time tolerance
[ANSI code] tolerance (3)
Gext StartUp t t = t41 startup ±7% the best between: ± 10 % and ± 40 ms

(1)
Note on protections use trip and threshold current values expressed in In for calculating t t (example: If = 0.8 In, I1= 0.6 In)
(2)
with t4 = instantaneous, the maximum tolerance is 50 ms
(3)
Tolerance values valid with Trip unit at steady state or on with auxiliary power supply, trip time ≥ 100 ms,
temperature and signals within operating limits; the tolerances in the table after the notes are applicable if the
conditions are not guaranteed
(4)
the trip unit considers a 3% hysteresis for clearing from the alarm condition
(5)
tolerance valid for frequencies within range: fn ± 2 %. A ± 5% tolerance is applicable for off range
frequencies
(6)
± 20% for threshold 0.4 Hz / s
(9)
maximum trip time
(10)
with If ≥ 18 kA, t t ≤ 3 ms;
with 18 kA > If ≥ I31 * 3, t t ≤ 7 ms (If three-phase) or t t ≤ 9 ms (If single-phase);
with If < 18 kA and If < I31 * 3, t t ≤ 15 ms.
(operating parameters guaranteed with Vaux auxiliary power supply)
(11)
tolerance valid with threshold U14 > 10%; with U14 ≤ 10% (and >6%), the tolerance is 10%; with U14 <
5%, the tolerance is 15%

Performance guaranteed in all operating conditions

Protection Trip threshold tolerance Trip time tolerance

L Activation within range: (1.05 to 1.2) x I1 ± 20 %
S ± 10 % ± 20 %
I / 2I ± 15 % ≤ 60 ms
G ± 15 % ± 20 % (60 ms with t4 = instantaneous)
Gext ± 15 % ± 20 %
MDGF ± 15 % ± 20 %
UF / UF2 /
±2% ± 20 %
OF / OF2
± 20 %; in the case of single-phase self-supply:
RV ± 10 %
the highest between ± 20 % and 30 ms
Other -- ± 20 %

94 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 11 - Performance table
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

12 - Functions

Introduction This chapter includes the trip curves of the protections, which are shown in different point charts:
• The curves are illustrated considering the minimum and maximum values and of the parameters of each
protection.
• Protections with several curves (example: S protection), are shown in several graphs.
• The curves do not take account of the effects of special parameters, such as thermal memory and startups.
NOTE: it is advisable to always use the mathematical function in the summary table of the
protections to calculate the trip time (page 92)

This chapter illustrates the electronic trip curves of the available protections with all the protection trip units for
SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers, represented in various dot diagrams. Some notes for reading the diagrams:
• The curves are illustrated considering the minimum and maximum values and of the parameters of each
protection.
• The curves do not take account of the effects of special parameters such as thermal memory, startup, etc.
• Where version is not present, the curves are valid for both the IEC version and the UL version
NOTE: trip curve modeling software should be consulted when conducting a coordination
or arc flash study as these are simplified representations of the protection curves.

Function L (t = k/I 2)

95 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function L (IEC 60255-151 SI)

Function L (IEC 60255-151 VI)

96 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function L (IEC 60255-151 EI)

Function L (t = k/I 4)

97 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function S (t = k/I 2)

Function S (t = k) \ Function S2

98 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function I \ Function MCR

Function 2I

18kA

99 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function G (t = k/I 2) \ Function

Gext (t = k/I 2)

Function G (t = k) \Function
Gext (t = k)

100 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function MDGF (t = k/I 2)

Function MDGF (t = k)

UL MAX SETTING 1200A

0,05 .. 1 IEC

0,05 .. 0,4 UL

101 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function IU

Function UV \ Function UV2

102 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function OV \ Function OV2

Function VU

103 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function S(V) \ Function S2(V)

Function RV

104 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function UF \ Function UF2

Function OF \ Function OF2

105 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function RP

Function D

106 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function OQ

Function OP

107 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function UP

Function RQ

108 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Function ROCOF

Function RC

109 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Protections | 12 - Functions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Ekip Touch - Measurements

1 - Standard Measurements

List The Standard measurements are:

Parameter Description Page

Instantaneous currents Phase current and earth fault measurements in real time 110
Events List of events, status changes, alarms, recorded by the Trip unit 110
Trip List of current protection trips (TRIP) 110
History of minimum and maximum currents, recorded at a
Min-Max measurements 112
settable interval
Maintenance CB status: contact wear and last maintenance 113
Operation counters Number of mechanical and electrical operations 113

Instantaneous currents The instantaneous currents, available in the Measurements pages, are real time measurements of the phase
and earth fault currents expressed in root mean square value; the monitor time and performance depend on
the rated current defined by the Rating plug (In):
Monitor time Normal operating Accuracy of
Measurement
(min-max) range value read (1)
Phase currents (4) 0,004 ÷ 64 In 0,2 ÷ 1,2 In 1% (3)
Internal earth fault current (2) 0,08 ÷ 64 In 0,2 ÷ 1,2 In 2 % (3)
External earth fault current (2) (5)
0,08 ÷ 4 In 0,2 ÷ 1,2 In 2%
Residual current (2) (5) 2 ÷ 32 A 5%

(1)
the accuracies refer to normal operating ranges, as established by IEC 61557-12
(2)
available with LSIG versions
(3)
accuracies based on Ekip Touch without Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package; if the Class 1 Power &
Energy Metering package is present and for all other trip unit models, check the indicated performance values
from page 117
(4)
the higher phase currents are also available in the Histograms, Measuring instruments and Measurement
summary pages
(5)
available by activating the presence of toroid S.G.R or Rc

Special representations
Measurement < Measurement < “_ _ _” displayed:
Type of measurement
min value max value (not available) due to
Internal earth fault and
.... > [64 In] Sensors disconnected
phase currents
External earth fault Sensor not activated
.... > [4 In sensor]
current and/or disconnected
Sensor not activated
Residual current .... > 32 A
and/or disconnected

110 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 1 - Standard Measurements
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Events Ekip Touch can record the last 200 events, mainly concerning variations in the status and operation of the
unit; in particular:
• configuration status of the bus, operating mode, active set, auxiliary supply
• connection statuses or alarms: current sensors, Trip Coil
• connection statuses or alarms: current sensors, Rating Plug, Trip unit, Trip Coil
• protections: timing in progress or alarm
• trip: status of open command, signaling of trips due to protection
NOTE: the first event available in the list is the most recent one; having reached the 200-events
threshold, the oldest events will be progressively overwritten

The complete list is available in the Measurements - Historicals - Events menu, where a set of information is
given for each event: icon of the type of event, name of event, date and time recorded.
There are 4 icons that identify the type of event:
Icon Description
Event reported for information purposes

Timing of a protection in progress, trip expected

Alarm referring to a non-dangerous condition

Alarm concerning operation, a fault or connection failure

Tripping Ekip Touch is able to record the last 30 TRIPs.

The complete list is available in the Measurements - Historicals - Trips menu, where useful information is
given for each trip:
• the protection that caused the trip
• the consecutive number of the trip
• the date and time of the trip (with reference to the internal clock)
• the measurements associated with the tripped protection
NOTE: once the 30-TRIP threshold has been exceeded, the oldest trips are progressively
overwritten

Correlated measurements
The type of protection involved determines the measurements recorded at the moment of tripping:
Protection Measurements recorded Notes
Ne is available with CBs type 4P and 3P + N; Ig is
Current L1, L2, L3, Ne, Ig Currents
available in the case of trips due to G protection
Temperature L1, L2, L3, Ne Currents The temperature cannot be displayed

Access to most recent trips

Besides being available in the Historicals menu, information about the most recent trips can be accessed in
three different ways, depending on the conditions of Ekip Touch:
Condition Access
The main page is temporarily replaced by a trip information page;
Trips that have just occurred with
press the iTEST button to reset and go back to the normal screen
Ekip Touch on
page
Trips that have just occurred with Press the iTEST button to display the trip information page for a few
Ekip Touch off seconds
Rapid consultation in all the other Press the iTEST button four times from any page other than a menu,
conditions or a page accessed via a menu

111 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 1 - Standard Measurements
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Min-Max measurements Ekip Touch records the maximum and minimum phase currents in the Measurements - Historicals -
Measurements menu
The recording interval between one measurement and the next can be set via the Monitor time parameter,
available in the Settings menu (page 46).
Representation
Select one of the measurements to access the graph page containing the records

Each measurement allows up to 25 recordings, each shown in a bar chart (graphic full scale equal to 125%
of the rated value).
The selected recording flashes, to distinguish it from the others.
Touch the sides of the display to select the recordings after (1) and before (2) the selected recording. The
command for quitting the page (3) is in the top left corner.
The selected recording flashes, to distinguish it from the others.
• time elapsed from previous measurement
• phase and value of measurement
• date and time of recording
NOTES:

• if the value is less than the minimum viewable threshold, “…” is indicated instead of the value
• graphic representation is in relation to 1 In, with 1.25 In as maximum value
• the trip unit immediately makes a recording when the “Monitor time” parameter is changed
Reset measurements
The Reset measurements command is available in the Measurements - Historicals - Measurements menu, for
the purpose of resetting all the recordings

112 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 1 - Standard Measurements
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Maintenance Certain information about the status of the CB is available in the Measurements-Maintenance menu.
Contact Wear
Contact wear provides an estimation of the state of wear of the main contacts of the circuit-breaker. The
value is given in percentage form and is 0% if there is no wear and 100% if the contacts are completely worn
It is calculated automatically by the Trip unit whenever a trip is caused by a protection or, in the presence of
auxiliary power supply, whenever the circuit-breaker is opened in the manual mode.
NOTES:

• the percentage is no longer increased once 100% has been reached

• 80% wear is signaled by a prealarm, while 100% is signaled by an alarm
IMPORTANT: 100% wear does not impose any functional limit on the Trip unit; however,
the state of the circuit-breaker must be checked as soon as possible

Maintenance
The Maintenance function allows the user to be alerted by a Warning that:
one year has elapsed since maintenance was last performed
contact wear has increased by over 10% with respect to the last maintenance value
Two areas are available in the Trip unit menu:
• Activation area (Settings - Maintenance menu): allows the Maintenance function to be activated
• Measurement and reset area (Measurements - Maintenance menu): only appears if the Maintenance
function is activated; provides information about maintenance (contact wear and dates) and the command
for confirming that maintenance has been performed (confirming records the actual date and contact wear
values, and resets the alarm signal).
The reference date is that of the internal clock and the time elapsed is calculated with the trip unit both on
and off (so long as the internal battery functions).
NOTE: manual modification of the date may cause variations to the elapsed time calculation,
thus to the next maintenance date

NOTE: the maintenance signal due to increased contact wear is given for values exceeding
20%

Operation counters The CB operations (total manual operations and TRIPs) are recorded by the Trip unit in the presence of
auxiliary power supply and are available in the About-Circuit breaker menu.
The following counters are also available when communication with the Trip unit is activated:
• number of mechanical operations
• number of trips due to protection trips (TRIP)
• number of trips due to failed protection trips (TRIP)
• number of trip tests performed

113 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 1 - Standard Measurements
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Ekip Measuring Measurements

List The Measuring measurements are

Condition Access Page

Instantaneous voltages Phase and line-to-line voltage measurements in real time 114
Real time measurements of the active, reactive, apparent
Instantaneous powers 114
phase and total powers
Instantaneous frequency Measurement of the line frequency 114
List of trips (TRIP) due to voltage, frequency, power
Trip 115
protections
History of minimum, maximum and mean voltages and
Min-Max-Med measurements 115
powers recorded within a settable range
Peak factor Real time measurement of the peak factor of the currents 115
Power factor Real time measurement of the power factor 115
Energy counters Measurement of active, reactive, apparent energy 115

The relative associated measurements are activated by means of the Ekip Synchrocheck module (page 223).

Instantaneous measurements Instantaneous currents, available in the Summary pages, are real time measurements of the line-to-line and
phase voltages expressed in root-mean-square value.
Representation, measuring range and performance depend on the set rated voltage (Un).
Available in the Summary pages, the instantaneous powers are real time measurements of the phase and
total active powers.
Representation, measuring range and performance depend on the set rated voltage (Un) and on the rated
current defined by the rated size of the Trip unit (In); in addition, the reference changes on the basis of the
type of measurement:
• Sn for total powers (Sn = In * Un * √3).
• Pn for phase powers (Pn = In * Un / √3).
NOTE: the phase powers and voltages are available with 4P and 3P + N CBs

Monitor time Normal Accuracy of

Measurement
(min-max) operating range value read (1)
Line-to-line voltages (6) 5 V ÷ 900 V (9) 100 ÷ 690 V 0.5 % (8)
Phase voltages 5 V ÷ 900 V (9) 50 ÷ 400 V 0.5 % (8)
Line frequency 30 ÷ 80 Hz (2)
f -10 % ÷ f +10 % (4)
0,1 % (3)

Total active, reactive and

|Pmin ÷ Pmax| (5) |0,3 ÷ 1,2 Sn| 2% (3)
apparent power (7)
Active, reactive and
|Pmin ÷ Pmax| (5) |0,3 ÷ 1,2 Pn| 2% (3)
apparent phase power

(1)
the accuracies refer to normal operating ranges, as established by IEC 61557-12
(2)
available for voltage values of over 30 V (with Un < 277 V) or 60 V (with Un > 277 V)
(3)
accuracies based on Ekip Touch without Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package; if the Class 1 Power &
Energy Metering package is present and for all other trip unit models, check the indicated performance values
from page 117
(4)
45 to 55 Hz with set frequency = 50 Hz; 54 to 66 Hz with f = 60 Hz
(5)
Pmin = 0,5 In x 5 V; Pmax= 3 x 16 In x 900 V
(6)
the higher line-to-line voltages are also available in the Histograms, Measuring instruments and Measurement
summary pages
(7)
the higher total powers are also available in the Measuring instruments and Measurement summary pages
(8)
without transformers; 0.7 % with class 0.2 external transformers
(9)
without transformers; with transformers, multiply the min and max values for the transformer ratio between
primary and secondary voltages

Continued on the next page

114 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 2 - Ekip Measuring Measurements
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Special representations
Type of measure- Measurement < Measurement < “_ _ _” displayed:
ment min value max value (not available) due to
Line-to-line and phase Measurement module not
.... > [Un x 1,25]
voltages detected
Measurement module not present,
Line frequency 30 Hz 80 Hz
V<5V
Active, reactive and Sensors disconnected,
apparent total and .... > [Pn x 1,25] Measurement module not present,
phase power V < 5 V, I < 0.03 In

Tripping The Measuring Measurements page adds to the range of TRIPs that Ekip Touch is able to record (page 115).
The voltage, frequency or power protection that trips determines the measurements recorded the moment
the trip occurs
Measurements
Protection Notes
recorded
Currents L1, L2, L3, Ne, Ne is available with CBs type 4P and 3P + N; U0 is
Voltage
voltages U12, U23, U31, U0 available in the case of trips due to RV protection
Currents L1, L2, L3, Ne and
Frequency Ne is available with CBs type 4P and 3P + N
grid frequency
Ne is available with CBs type 4P and 3P + N;
Currents L1, L2, L3, Ne and
Power Active or apparent total power depending on which
total power
protection tripped

Min-Max-Med measurements The Measuring Measurements package adds to the range of measurements that Ekip Touch is able to record
(page 111):
• Maximum and medium voltage
• Active, reactive and apparent maximum and medium powers
The type of information given, the available commands and notes are the same as those described for the
current measurements.
NOTES:

• compared to the current measurements, graphic representation is with respect to 1 Un (with

maximum value 1.25 Un) for the voltage recordings and with respect to 1 Sn (with maximum
value 1.25 Sn) for the power recordings
• and the power measurement is negative, the color of the corresponding bar is different from
those with a positive value

Peak factor The peak factors are real time measurements of the ratio between the peak and RMS values of the phase
current; the measurement is supported by the Harmonic distortion protection function (page 61).
Measurement Monitor time Accuracy Notes
“_ _ _” (not available) is indicated
Peak factor 0,3 ÷ 6In 1,5% for currents outside the range and
disconnected sensors

115 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 2 - Ekip Measuring Measurements
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Power factor The power factor is the real time measurement of the ratio between total active power and total apparent
power, expressed as cos φ.
Measurement Monitor time Accuracy Notes
“_ _ _” (not available) is indicated for:
Power factor 0,5 ÷ 1 2,5% (1) active and/or reactive power not available
or outside the admissible ranges

(1)
accuracy based on Ekip Touch without Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package; if the Class 1 Power &
Energy Metering package is present and for all other Trip unit models, check the indicated performance values
from page 117

Energy counters The energy counters are the measurements of the total reactive and apparent active energy, updated every
minute.
Measurement Monitor time Accuracy
Total active, reactive and
1 kWh ÷ 2 TWh; 1 kVARh ÷ 2 TVARh; 1 kVAh ÷ 2 TVAh 2 % (1)
apparent energy

(1)
accuracy based on Ekip Touch without Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package; if the Class 1 Power &
Energy Metering package is present and for all other Trip unit models, check the indicated performance values
from page 117
Reset measurements
The Energy RESET command is available in the Energy menu for the purpose of resetting the energy counters
(page 45).

116 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 2 - Ekip Measuring Measurements
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Class 1 Power & Energy Metering

List and performance Presence of the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package allows higher measuring accuracy to be obtained
for the following quantities:
Accuracy of
Measurement Monitor time (min-max) Normal operating range
read value
Standard IEC61557-12,
Phase currents (6)(8) 0,004 ÷ 64 In 0,5 % (1)
tables 20-22
Standard IEC61557-12,
Internal earth fault current (2) 0,08 ÷ 64 In 0,5 % (1)
table 20
Line frequency 30 ÷ 80 Hz (3)
fn ± 10 % (4)
± 0,02 Hz
Total active and apparent Standard IEC61557-12,
|Pmin ÷ Pmax| (5) 1% (1)
power (7) tables 8-11-14
Active and apparent phase Standard IEC61557-12,
|Pmin ÷ Pmax| (5) 1% (1)
power tables 8-11-14
Total active and apparent 1 kWh ÷ 2 TWh; 1 kVARh ÷ Standard IEC61557-12,
1 % (1)
energy 2 TVARh; 1 kVAh ÷ 2 TVAh tables 8-11-14
Standard IEC61557-12,
Power factor 0,5 ÷ 1 1% (1)
table 27

(1)
the accuracy values refer to the normal operating intervals and conditions established by IEC 61557-12, for
each quantity and class declared
(2)
available with LSIG versions
(3)
available for voltage values of over 30 V (with Un < 277 V) or 60 V (with Un ≥ 277 V)
(4)
47 ÷ 55 Hz with fn = 50 Hz; 54 ÷ 66 Hz with fn = 60 Hz
(5)
Pmin = 0,5 In x 5 V; Pmax= 3 x 16 In x 900 V
(6)
the higher phase currents are also available in the Histograms, Measuring instruments and Measurement
summary pages
(7)
the higher total powers are also available in the Measuring instruments and Measurement summary pages
(8)
internal phase current; in the presence of an external Neutral, the accuracy of current Ne is 1%

Functional characteristics The measuring performance of the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package is guaranteed in the following
conditions (from table 43 of standard IEC61557-12):
Characteristic Value
Classification of performance measuring and
monitoring device (PMD) in accordance with PMD-DD
chapter 4.3 of the standard
Operating: T= -25°C to +70°C; Storage: T = -30°C to
Temperature
+70°C; Class: K70
Up to 90% relative humidity without condensation; From
humidity and altitude
0 to 2000 meters
Performance class for active energy and power 1

Information page Presence of the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package activates the IEC61557 12 information page,
which can be consulted in the About menu

Figure 28

The page shows the activation state of the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package (Activated/Deactivated)
and the serial numbers of certain accessories installed on the CB for the specific purpose of conforming to
the characteristics of the package (electronic units and internal current sensors)

117 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 3 - Class 1 Power & Energy Metering
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

4 - Datalogger

Presentation The datalogger is a function which allows data associated with a trigger event to be recorded. The following
data are recorded:
• Analog measurements: line-to-line voltages and phase currents
• Digital events: protection events or alarms, circuit-breaker status signals, protection trips.
One or two independent recordings can be configured and, via Ekip Connect, all the associated information
can be downloaded, displayed and saved.
Datalogger

Function When the datalogger is enabled and activated (RESTART), Ekip Touch continuously acquires data by filling
and emptying an internal buffer (B).
If a trigger event (A) occurs, Ekip Touch interrupts acquisition (STOP) immediately or after a time that can
be set by the user (C) and stores all the data of the window (D), which can then be downloaded to a PC for
reading and analysis.
IMPORTANT: the function requires an auxiliary voltage supply

Figure 29

Parameters 1 The parameters and commands of the function are available in the Settings menu (page 46).

Parameter Description Default

Activates/deactivates the function and its availability in the parameters
menu
Enable Off
NOTE: il the enable command is hidden when at least one
datalogger is activated
Determines the number of recordings (1 or 2)
Num. of
NOTE: the recordings share the settings of the sampling frequency 1
Datalogger
and type of memory
Establishes the number of samples acquired per second and the
recording window.
Four options are available: 1200 Hz (window= 13.6 s), 2400 Hz (6.8 s),
Sampling 4800 Hz (3.4 s), 9600 Hz (1.7 s)
9600 Hz
frequency NOTE:
• A high frequency allows the data to be analyzed more accurately
• if there are two dataloggers, the recording window of each
recording is halved
Datalogger 1 Menu with the parameters of each Datalogger: trigger event, recording
and 2 delay and Restart/Stop commands
Restart and Synchronized start and stop commands of the two dataloggers, valid and
Stop Both available with Num. of Datalogger = 2

118 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 4 - Datalogger
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Parameters 2 The Datalogger 1 and Datalogger 2 submenus (available if the number of dataloggers selected is: 2) contain
the following options:
Parameter Description Default
Trigger event at which the recording is to be interrupted; the main
protection options (trips, timings, alarms) and the actuator status (open/
Stop Event None
closed) are displayed.
The Custom option can be configured via Ekip Connect
Recording interruption delay, calculated from the trigger; the value is given
Stop delay 0.01 s
in seconds and can be set within a range: 0 s to 10 s, in 0.01 s steps
Restart Recording start command
Stop Manual recording stop command

Memory Type
Ekip Connect enables the Memory Type (Non volatile/Volatile) to be selected:
• Non volatile: Ekip Touch maintains the registration even when off; the life of the internal battery of the unit
can be sensibly less than the declared value in the absence of auxiliary power supply.
• Volatile: Ekip Touch loses the recording if it is switched off; when the unit is switched on again, the datalogger
automatically restarts, losing the previously stored data.
The parameter is configured by default as Non volatile.

Signallings If there is a recording present, Ekip Touch provides the information on the diagnosis bar (DataLog available).

NOTE: Ekip Touch provides a general indication of recording availability in the configuration
with 2 dataloggers: use Ekip Connect to identify which of the 2 recordings (or both) is
available

Ekip Connect Ekip Connect 3 has two specific areas for the Datalogger function:
• Datalogger for configuring the recording parameters with a user-friendly interface, and for downloading
the recordings
• Data Viewer for opening and consulting the recordings
Both areas are available in the Tools menu of Ekip Connect.

119 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 4 - Datalogger
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

5 - Network Analyzer

Presentation The Network Analyzer function allows you to set voltage and current controls over a long period, in order to
analyze your system.
To this purpose, voltages and currents are monitored, so as to find:
• voltage sequences (Over, Under, Pos and neg)
• unbalance between voltages (Unbalance)
• short voltage drops (Interruption) and slow sags (Sag)
• short voltage increases (Spikes) and slow swells (Swell)
• harmonic distortion of voltages and currents (THD)
Each monitoring is associated with control parameters set by the user and updated each time the set control
conditions occur.

Parameters The configuration parameters of the counters are available in the Settings - Network Analyzer menu (page 46).
The Monitor time parameter, which defines the length of each monitoring session, can also be set in the
Settings menu.
NOTE: the parameter is the one used for measuring the maximum currents and voltages

Main Menu
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the function and its availability in the parameters
Enable Off
menu
I Harmonic
Activates harmonic analysis of the currents Off
Analysis
V Harmonic
Activates harmonic analysis of the voltages Off
Analysis
Control threshold of the Under V Th counter
V Threshold Low The value is given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set 85 % Un
within the range: 75% to 95%, in 5% steps.
Control threshold of the Over V Th counter
V Threshold High The value is given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set 110 % Un
within the range: 105, 110, 115 % Un
Alarm threshold for the Unbalance counter.
The value is given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set
Unbalance V Th within the range: 2% to 10% Un, in 1% steps. 3 % Un
NOTE: 0% =symmetrical and balanced system

Control threshold of the V microinterr counter.

V microinterr. Th The value is given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set 95 % Un
within the range: 10% to 95% Un, in 5% steps
Control threshold of the Spike counter.
V Spike Threshold The value is given as a percentage of Un and can be set within the 105 % Un
range: 105% to 125% Un, in 5% steps
Sags Menu with the control parameters of the voltage sags
Swells Menu with the control parameters of the voltage swells
The submenu, which becomes available by enabling the harmonic
Harmonics current and/or voltage analysis, allows the harmonic control
parameters to be configured

Continued on the next page

120 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Sags Menu
All the thresholds are given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set from 10% to 95% Un, in 5%
steps.
All the times are given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to 60 s, in variable steps
Parameter Description Default
V sag Th Short Control threshold of Sags Short counter 10 % Un
Minimum duration of sag below the Short threshold to validate the
V sag dur Short 0,8 s
count of the Sags Short counter
V sag Th Middle Control threshold of Sags Middle counter 45 % Un
V sag dur Minimum duration of sag below the Middle threshold to validate the
0,8 s
Middle count of the Sags Middle counter
V sag Th Long Control threshold of Sags Long counter 95 % Un
Minimum duration of sag below the Long threshold to validate the
V sag dur Long 0,8 s
count of the Sags Long counter

NOTE: Ekip Touch accepts changes to the parameters subject to compliance with the following
limitations: V sag dur Long ≥ V sag dur Middle ≥ V sag dur Short

Swells Menu (Swell)

All the thresholds are given as a percentage of rated voltage Un and can be set from 105% to 125% Un, in
5% steps.
All the times are given in seconds and can be set within the range: 0.04 s to 60 s, in variable steps
Parameter Description Default
V swell Th Short Control threshold of the Swell Short counter 125 % Un
V swell dur Minimum duration of swell above the Short threshold to validate the
0,8 s
Short count of the Swell Short counter
V swell Th Long Control threshold of the Swells Long counter 105 % Un
Minimum duration of swell above the Long threshold to validate the
V swell dur Long 0,8 s
count of the Swells Long counter

NOTE: Ekip Touch accepts changes to the parameters subject to compliance with the following
limitations: V sag dur Long ≥ V sag dur Middle ≥ V sag dur Short

Harmonics (Current and Voltage)

All the thresholds are given as a percentage and can be set within the range: 5% to 20% (total THD) or: 3%
to 10% (single harmonics) in 1% steps.
Menu Parameter Description Default
THD
Control threshold of the THD Voltages counter 5%
Threshold
Current
Single
Control threshold of the single harmonics counters of the voltages 5 %
harmonic th
THD
Control threshold of the THD Current counter 5%
Threshold
Voltage
Single
Control threshold of the single harmonics counters of the currents 5 %
harmonic th

121 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Counters - introduction The main counters of the function are available in the Measurements – Network Analyzer menu, distributed
among several sections (page 45).
The extended list of all the measurements is available via Ekip Connect or by connecting to the bus system
NOTE: the Additional List item in the following paragraphs contains the additional counters
that are only present via Ekip Connect; the type of reference counter is given in the
heading of the additional tables

V Sequences and V 3s Submenus V Sequences and V 3s Sequences have the following counters:
Sequences
Menu Parameter Description
V seq pos Positive sequence of period in progress [V]
V seq neg Negative sequence of period in progress [V]
V Sequences
Last V pos seq Positive sequence of period preceding the one in progress [V]
Last V neg seq Negative sequence of period preceding the one in progress [V]
V seq pos Positive sequence calculated during the last three seconds [V]
V 3s Sequence V seq neg Negative sequence calculated during the last three seconds [V]
Unbalance Voltage unbalance calculated during the last three seconds [%]

Additional List
Counters (Sequences) Description
Last time stamp Date and time of last recording of the sequences

Counters (Sequences) Description

Last value Voltage unbalance relating to the period in progress [%]
Voltage unbalance relating to the period preceding the one in progress
Actual unbalance value
[%]
Last time stamp Date and time of last recording of the unbalances
Counts the number of times that the average value of the ratio
between the positive on negative sequence (with direction of rotation
Actual number of U.
3-2-1) and negative on positive sequence (1-2-3) exceeds the
Unbalance V Th threshold; the count refers to the actual day
Actual [day -1 ... day -7] Counters relating to the number of unbalances detected in the last
number of U. seven days of activity, calculated using the internal clock of the unit
Cumulative counter of all the unbalances detected by the unit (sum of
Cumulative number of U.
the other counters or to be increased also for the previous days?)

NOTE: all measurements of unbalances (Not balanced and Unbalance value) saturate at
200%

THD Current and THD Voltages The THD Current and THD Voltages submenus have the following counters:

Menu Counters Description

THD Current L1, L2, L3, Ne Instantaneous harmonic distortion value of each current phase
THD Voltages U12, U23, U31 Instantaneous harmonic distortion value of each line-to-line voltage

122 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Over V Th and Under V Th Certain counters relating to the sequence measurements are available in the Counters - Day -1 and Counters
- Cumulative submenus:
Counters Description
Counts the number of times that the average value of the positive sequence (in
the set direction of rotation of the phases: 1-2-3) or negative sequence (in the set
Over V Th
direction of rotation of the phases: 3-2-1) exceeds the V Threshold High threshold.
The count refers to the reference menu interval (previous day or cumulative)
Counts the number of times that the average value of the positive sequence (in
the set direction of rotation of the phases: 1-2-3) or negative sequence (in the set
Under V Th
direction of rotation of the phases: 3-2-1) falls below the V Threshold Low threshold.
The count refers to the reference menu interval (previous day or cumulative)

Additional List
Counters (Over Voltage) Description
Last time stamp Date and time of last recording of the Over V Th counter
Last value Value of the last swell above the Over V Th [V] threshold
Actual number of O. Over V Th count for the current day
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] Over V Th count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the
number of O. internal clock of the unit

Counters (Under Voltage) Description

Last time stamp Date and time of last recording of the Under V Th counter
Last value Value of the last sag below the Under V Th [V] threshold
Actual number of O. Under V Th count for the current day
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] Under V Th count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the
number of O. internal clock of the unit

V microinterr. (Interruption) The V microinterr counter should be understood as reduction of the RMS value of the line-to-line voltage
below the V microinterr. Th set threshold for less than 40 ms (short time voltage sag).
The counter is available in the two submenus Counters - Day -1 and Counters - Cumulative (previous day or
cumulative)
NOTE: Since the counter is based on the RMS value calculation, two rapid voltage sags of
equal duration may be evaluated differently, depending on when they occur:

Drop detected Drop not detected

t t

Additional List
Counters
Description
(Interruptions)
Last instant Date and time of last recording of the V microinterr counter
Last value Value of last sag below the V microinterr [V] threshold
Last duration Value of last sag below the V microinterr [ms] threshold
Actual number of I. V microinterr count for the current day
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] V microinterr count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the
number of I. internal clock of the unit

123 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Spikes The Spikes counter should be understood as increase of the RMS value of the line-to-line voltage above the
set V Spike Threshold threshold for less than 40 ms (short time voltage spike).
The counter is available in the two submenus Counters - Day -1 and Counters - Cumulative (previous day or
cumulative)
NOTE: Since the counter is based on the RMS value calculation, two rapid voltage spikes of
equal duration may be evaluated differently, depending on their amplitude:

Increase detected Increase not detected

t t

Additional List
Counters
Description
(Interruptions)
Last time stamp Date and time of last recording of the Spikes counter
Last value Value of last swell above Spikes [V] threshold
Last duration Duration of last swell above Spikes [ms] threshold
Actual number of S. Spikes count for the current day
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] Spikes count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal
number of S. clock of the unit

Sags Certain counters relating to sags are available in the Counters - Day -1 and Counters - Cumulative submenus:

Counters (Interrup-
Description
tions)
Counts the number of times that any line-to-line voltage falls below the V sag
Sags Short
Th Short threshold for longer than V sag dur Short
Counts the number of times that any line-to-line voltage falls below the V sag
Sags Middle
Th Middle threshold for longer than V sag dur Middle
Counts the number of times that any line-to-line voltage falls below the V sag
Sags Long
Th Long threshold for longer than V sag dur Long

The count refers to the reference menu interval (previous day or cumulative)
NOTE: since an event may fall under more than one category, only the counter of the main
type (Long > Middle > Short) is increased

Additional List
Counters
Description
(Interruptions)
Last time stamp Date and time of last recording of the Sags Short counter
Sags Middle Value of last sag below the Sags Short [V] threshold
Sags Long Duration of last sag below the Sags Short [ms] threshold
Actual number of S. Sags Short count for the current day
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] Sags Short count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal
number of S. clock of the unit

Continued on the next page

124 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Counters
Description
(Sags Middle)
Last time stamp Date and time of last recording of the Sags Middle counter
Sags Middle Value of last sag below the Sags Middle [V] threshold
Sags Long Duration of last sag below the Sags Middle [ms] threshold
Actual number of S. Sags Middle count of the current day
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] Sags Middle count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the
number of S. internal clock of the unit

Counters
Description
(Sags Middle)
Last time stamp Date and time of last recording of the Sags Long counter
Sags Middle Value of last sag below the Sags Long[V] threshold
Sags Long Duration of last sag below the Sags Long[ms] threshold
Actual number of S. Sags Long count of the current day
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] Sags Long count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the internal
number of S. clock of the unit

Swells Certain counters relating to swells are available in the Counters - Day -1 and Counters - Cumulative submenus:

Counters
Description
(Sags Middle)
Counts the number of times that any line-to-line voltage exceeds the V swell Th
Swells Short
Short threshold for longer than V swell dur Short
Counts the number of times that any line-to-line voltage exceeds the V swell Th
Swells Long
Long threshold for longer than V swell dur Long

The count refers to the reference menu interval (previous day or cumulative)
NOTE: since an event may fall under more than one category, only the counter of the main
type (long > short) is increased

Additional List
Counters
Description
(Swells Short)
Last time stamp Date and time of last recording of the Swells Short counter
Last value Value of last swell above Swells Short [V] threshold
Last duration Duration of last swell above Swells Short[ms] threshold
Actual number of S. Swells Short count for the current day
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] Swells Short count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the
number of S. internal clock of the unit

Counters
Description
(Swells Long)
Last time stamp Date and time of last recording of the Swells Long counter
Last value Value of last swell above Swells Long[V] threshold
Last duration Duration of last swell above Spikes[ms] threshold
Actual number of S. Swells Long count for the current day
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] Swells Long count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using the
number of S. internal clock of the unit

125 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

THD Voltages and Currents Certain counters relating to harmonic distortion are available in the Counters - Day -1 and Counters -
Cumulative submenus:
Counters (Swells Long) Description
Counts the total number of minutes in which total distortion exceeds
THD Voltages
current threshold THD Threshold
Counts the total number of minutes in which total distortion exceeds
THD Current
voltage threshold THD Threshold

NOTE: the counters saturate at 65535 minutes (45 days); they can be reset by a service
connector command (via Ekip Connect) or via communication from the system bus

Additional List
Counters (Swells Long) Description
Actual minutes THD Current count for the current day [min]
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] THD Current count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using
number of THD C. the internal clock of the unit

Counters (Swells Long) Description

Actual minutes THD Voltages count for the current day [min]
Actual [day -2 ... day -7] THD Voltages count of the last seven days of activity, calculated using
number of THD C. the internal clock of the unit

Waveforms The Network Analyzer - Waveforms menu provides graphic representations of:
• phase currents L1, L2, L3, Ne (for units configured with 4 phases)
• line-to-line voltages V12, V23, V31
When one of the available quantities is selected, Ekip Touch acquires and displays the waveform

Figure 30

The detected waveform and the value at the time of selection are displayed in the window that appears. A
new waveform and the relative measurement can be acquired with the Refresh command (1).
Harmonics
The waveform window will propose the Harmonics (2) command if harmonic analysis of currents and/or
voltages has been selected. This command accesses the histogram of the harmonics (relating to the grid
frequency set in the menu) that make up the waveform.

Figure 31

Touch the sides of the display to scroll the harmonics after (3) and before (4) the selected harmonic, displayed
on a flashing graph with value shown in the center of the page. The command for exiting the page is at the
top left (5).

126 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Measurements | 5 - Network Analyzer
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Ekip Touch - Settings

1 - Main settings

Foreword All the following parameters are available either directly, or from the Settings menu, in the conditions
established by Ekip Touch on the basis of the version and configuration described.
To correctly address parameters which are present in the menu but not described below:
• Circuit-breaker: Hardware Trip, T Protection, Neutral Protection
• Phase Sequence
• Monitor time
• Power Controller
• Load Shedding
• Network Analyzer
• Datalogger
• Dual Set
• Functions
please consult the Settings menu overview (page 46).
WARNING! changes to the settings must be made in the absence of protection alarms

Bluetooth Low Energy - The Bluetooth antenna on the Trip unit can be activated in the Bluetooth Low Energy menu. This is useful
Connection security for launching a communication with an external device (tablet, smartphone) according to the Bluetooth Low
Energy protocol, via the EPiC APP (page 11).
Activation of Bluetooth Low Energy communication requires the Trip unit to be pre-engineered for a wireless
connection: security of the data and Bluetooth Low Energy connection between the Trip unit and its device is
guaranteed thanks to the ABB EPiC application and the pairing configuration described in the next paragraph.
WARNING! It is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure
a secure connection between his device and the Trip unit. The plant manager
must establish and maintain appropriate measures (such as but not limited to the
installation of malware prevention systems, application of authentication measures,
his own system and interface against any kind of security breach, unauthorized
access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information. ABB and its
affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to such security breaches,
unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or information,
use of APPs other than those allowed.

ABB recommends a few general configurations to strengthen the access of data into the Trip unit:
• activate the access PIN code in the Trip unit configure it with a value differing from the default value
• if parameters need not be written, configure the Trip unit only for parameter readout via bus (Test bus
parameter = Off)
• switch off the Bluetooth Low Energy antenna (Bluetooth Low Energy-Enable parameter= Off) after use
IMPORTANT: communications via wireless and via service connector function
alternatively: if Bluetooth Low Energy is activated there can be no communication
with other accessories via the service connector

127 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Settings | 1 - Main settings
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Bluetooth Low Energy - The following parameters are available

Parameters
Parameter Description Default
Enables/disables Bluetooth Low Energy antenna switch-on and availability of
the other parameters in the menu:
Enable • if On, the antenna comes on, on the basis of the Battery Mode parameter Off
configuration
• if Off, the antenna is off
Defines the switch-on mode of the Bluetooth Low Energy antenna, based
on the presence of the devices on the service connector (Ekip T&P, Ekip
Programming, Ekip TT); can have two values:
• --- ; with this option, the state of the antenna depends esclusively on the
presence of devices: on if not present; off if present
• ON ; with this option, the antenna is switched off for 15 seconds when
Battery mode a device is connected, after which: it remains off if communication with ---
the device has been activated; it comes on if no communication has been
activated
IMPORTANT: the typical scenario in which Battery mode should
be configured = On is: Ekip Touch + Ekip TT + communication
with smartphone activated; in all other cases, including System
Update, configure Battery mode = ---
Command which starts Pairing between Trip unit and external device. To
perform the operation correctly:
1. Press Connect on EPiC APP, select the Trip Unit from among the units in
the list and then select Connect again
2. Press Start Pairing in the Trip unit menu, enter the PIN, then press Start
Pairing again
3. Press Start Pairing on EPiC APP and confirm the operations until the code
request appears
Start Pairing ---
4. Check that the pop up with the Passkey appears on the display of the Trip
unit (about 20 seconds) and enter it in EPiC APP
5. The Trip unit will be connected to the external device from this moment on;
for the successive re-connections, it will be sufficient to just repeat point 1
NOTES:
• execute the procedure within 120 seconds
• the command is not available if communication with a device is
activated
Command that deletes the list of devices coupled to the Trip unit
Decouple
NOTE: the command is not available if communication with a device is ---
devices
activated
Version FW version of the Bluetooth Low Energy module installed on board ---

IMPORTANT: when Bluetooth Low Energy antenna is on, communication on the

service connector is not available

IMPORTANT: if Bluetooth is disabled during the order (with the extracode) or disabled
by a Service L3 authorized person, the dedicated menu will neither be present,
nor visible nor usable. The icons will not be shown on the screen if Bluetooth is
disabled

128 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Settings | 1 - Main settings
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Configuration The Circuit breaker-Configuration menu, allowing the presence of the External neutral sensor to be activated,
is available for the 3P CB (page 234).
Activation of the configuration with External neutral (3P + N) enables:
• histograms of phase Ne in the Histograms page
• neutral current measurements
• submenu for configuring the Neutral protection (Neutral Protection)
• neutral current recording in the case of TRIP
With 3P CB, the parameter is set by default as: 3P.

Ground protection In the earth Circuit-breaker-Protections menu of the LSIG version of Ekip Touch you can:
• activate/deactivate the presence of external toroid S.G.R and relative Gext protection (page 233, 84).
• activate the presence of Rc Toroid and relative protection (page 233, 87).
• activate/deactivate the MDGF transformer presence and relative MDGF protection.
NOTE: Rc Toroid can be activated if the Measuring Measurements package and Rc version
Rating plug are present; sensor presence in the menu can only be deactivated afterwards
by replacing the installed Rating plug

With Ekip Touch LSIG, the parameter is set by default as: Absent.

Line frequency Frequency adjustment is performed to set the installation frequency; the choice is between 50 Hz and 60 Hz.

NOTE: the measurements are taken on the basis of the set grid frequency: incorrect configuration
of the parameter may lead to abnormal measurements and protection

Ekip Touch is supplied with the parameter setting that suits the ordered configuration.

Modules The Modules menu provides various options:

Parameter Description Default

The parameter defines the mode in which the parameters are written in
the unit:
• Local: parameter editing only via the display or service connector
• Remote: parameter editing only remotely (Ekip Com modules)
Local/Remote NOTES: Local
• the Remote mode requires the presence of auxiliary power
supply and Ekip Com modules, otherwise it disables automatically
• However, the Local/Remote parameter can still be edited in the
Remote mode
The parameter enables communication between the Trip unit and modules
installed via terminal box or outside the unit to be activated.
Correct communication between unit and modules is confirmed by:
Local bus • population of the Modules menu with all the modules connected Off
• Power Leds of the modules on and synchronized like the power led of
Ekip Touch
• absence of Local Bus alarm in the diagnosis bar
Ekip Signalling 4K Menu with the parameters of the Ekip Signalling 4K module, if present
Ekip Measuring Menu with the parameters of the module Measurement (page 184)
- Menu of every module connected and detected (from page 191)
Access to the LOCAL Switch On and RESET signaling functions (from
Functions
page 89)

129 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Settings | 1 - Main settings
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Test Bus The parameter allows parameter editing via the service connector to be enabled/disabled, thereby limiting
the possibility of configuring all the options on the display (in the Local mode) or via modules Ekip Com (in
the Remote mode).
Disabling the parameter, Local mode and using the password allow security against undesired modification
by unauthorized persons to be increased.
NOTE: with Test Bus= Off, communication via service connector is still guaranteed (reading
enabled)

Ekip Touch is supplied with the parameter set to: On.

System The System menu provides various options:

Parameter Description Default

Date Setting the current date
Time Setting the current time
Language Setting the language in display menus English
Password Password setting (page 50) 00001

IMPORTANT: setting and checking Date and Time is important for all the recording
functions (trips or measurements); in the event of date and time glitches, reset
and if necessary replace the battery inside Ekip Touch (page 256).

View The View menu provides various options:

Parameter Description Default

Enables the orientation of the Alarms List, Measuring Instruments and
TFT orientation Main Measurements pages to be set. The options are: Horizontal, Vertical Horizontal
clockwise, Vertical counter-clockwise
Allows you to activate a supplementary information page, which can
be accessed by pressing the iTEST button twice from any page with a
Customer page Off
diagnosis bar. The information on the new page can be configured via Ekip
Connect (page 132)
Allows the current to be displayed in the Measuring instruments page to be
Ammeter Phase set from among the following options: Imax, I1, I2, I3, Ne (only in the 4P or Imax
3P + N configuration)
Allows the voltage to be displayed in the Measuring instruments page to be
Voltmeter Phase Vmax
set from among the following options: Vmax, V12, V23, V31

Maintenance The parameter allows an alarm, concerning maintenance of the unit, to be enabled/disabled. (page 113).
Ekip Touch is supplied with the parameter set to: On.

130 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Settings | 1 - Main settings
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Additional settings

Presentation Via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or system bus communication, you can:
A description of the different functions is given below.

Programmable States There are sixteen independent programmable states identified by the letters A, B, C, D, E, F, G, H, I, L, M, N,
O, P, Q, R, offering different solutions for event control.
Each programmable status can have two values: True or False. There are also various configuration
parameters available:
• Trigger: event or combination of several status activation events (up to 24, in AND or OR logic configuration).
• On Delay: status activation delay calculated from trigger presence onwards.
• Off Delay: status de-activation delay calculated from trigger absence onwards.
NOTE: the status activates if the trigger is present for longer than the On delay setting and
de-activates if the trigger is absent for longer than the Off delay setting

Figure 32

The statuses can be used with external module Ekip Signalling 10K, on Link Bus or with the programmable
functions, so as to convey the required signaling combination to the contacts.

Filters Measuring filters can be activated on channels S.G.R. or MDGF and Rc and V0:
• GTE filter: available if the external toroid is present (S.G.R., MDGF or Rc).
• V0 filter available with neutral connection activated
If the filter is activated, the measurements and specific protections (Gext or MDGF and Rc for GTE filter, and
V0 for V0 filter) are dealt with differently: Ekip Touch applies a pass-band filter to the signal so as to measure
the fundamental component only (50 or 60 Hz).

TAG Name, User data Tags that can be programmed by the user to facilitate remote identification of units.

NOTE: the Name TAG and communication address form the identification used by Ekip
Connect for the connected devices

131 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Settings | 2 - Additional settings
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Customers Page Enabling and fields for editing the Customers page (5 information lines) that can be viewed on the display of
the unit (page 130).

Installation Date of installation of unit

Load Profile Time The counter indicates the time that has elapsed since the last reset of the energy measurements. It is active
and updated in the presence of at least one of the following: auxiliary supply or supply by Ekip T&P.

Led Alive The parameter enables the behavior of the Power led of the Trip unit and of all the connected modules to be
modified; if activated (Alive Mode on), the Power leds act in the following way:
• Ekip Touch: flashes at 0.5Hz frequency
• Modules: if there are no communication errors, they synchronize with the led of Ekip Touch.
If deactivated, the Power leds on the respective devices come on with a steady light.

Open/Close Remote Direct The parameter controls 2 different command packages for remote opening and closing:
Command • Enabled: command 7 and 8 valid (direct Open and Close commands).
• Disabled: commands 7 and 8 not valid: in this case, remote opening and closing can still be obtained
using the programmable YC COMMAND and YO COMMAND functions and the Request circuit-breaker
opening and Request circuit-breaker closing commands

Change Double Set of If activated, enables the set of parameters (Adaptive Protections) to be changed even when timing alarms
parameters always are in progress.
Disabled by default.

Repeat zone selectivity S/I/G If Enabled, zone selectivity HW signals propagation logic applies in accordance with the table in the QT1
HW technical application notes. 1SDC007100G0205
If Disabled, the HW selectivity signal is not propagated by Ekip Touch

Zone selectivity input functions The zone selectivity inputs and certain of the outputs can be configured in this section:
• Standard: input or output operation as per standard zone selectivity logic; all selectivity functions are set
as Standard. (1SDC007100G0205 or 1SDC007401G0201)
• Customized: the event that activates the zone selectivity input or output can be selected.
IMPORTANT: in the Customized configuration, the only zone selectivity activation
event is the one set and standard selectivity operation is therefore not active
(changes should only be made by expert technical personnel).

Glitch The commands of Glitches 16 to 23 activate the respective glitch registers, which can be used for customizing
programmable functions or output contacts.

Wizard Reset Reset Wizard: the Wizard window appears on Ekip Touch at the first power-on and can be used to enter
some of the parameters of the unit.

132 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Settings | 2 - Additional settings
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Ekip Touch - Test

1 - Test

Presentation The test area can be accessed on the display; the commands available in this area allow certain functions of
the Trip unit to be checked; details of all the commands available in the Test menu are given below (page 47).
Ekip T&P with Ekip Connect has a Test Protections section where the presence of current or voltage alarm
signals can be simulated and times and trips can be checked.

Autotest The Autotest command starts an automatic sequence of the display and leds so as to enable their operation
to be checked.
The sequence comprises the following test phases:
1. Screen with message “www.abb.com”.
2. Darkening of the display.
3. Color sequence with red, green, blue bands, with gradual increase of backlighting
4. Lighting up, for one second, of the Warning and Alarm leds.
NOTE: auxiliary power supply must be present in order to check the gradual increase of
backlighting

Trip Test Selection of the Trip test command accesses the dedicated page where the operator is asked to press the
iTEST key to confirm the test operation.
An open command is transmitted to the Trip coil of the CB when the key is released.
IMPORTANT:

• the open command is sent with the circuit-breaker closed and in the absence of current
• following a command, the user is responsible for checking the effective change in
status of the actuator and the information displayed: make sure that there are no
alarms on the diagnosis bar before performing the test
NOTE: to reset the TRIP signal, go back to the HOME page and press the iTEST key
or transmit a TRIP RESET command (via Ekip Connect or remotely)

Test CB Selection of the Test CB command accesses a submenu with the Open CB and Close CB commands.
The commands allow opening coil YO and closing coil YC to be activated, respectively: a window with the
message "Test Executed" confirms that the command has been transmitted correctly.
Correct operation of the entire command system (Trip unit, Ekip Com Actuator and opening and closing coils)
is checked by opening and closing the circuit-breaker.
IMPORTANT:

• the open and close commands of the coils only function when the Trip unit is on and
powered by an auxiliary supply
• make sure that the coils are connected to the supply source
• release operation is checked by the commands: faults in Ekip Com Actuator or the
coils are not detected by the test

133 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Test | 1 - Test
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Ekip Signalling 4K The menu activates in the presence of module Ekip Signalling 2K and auxiliary power supply.
The Autotest command is available in the menu; it activates the automatic output test sequence (contacts
and leds) and provides for the following operations:
• Opening of the output contacts and switching off of output leds
• Closing in sequence of the four output contacts and switching on of the relative leds
• Reset initial conditions
IMPORTANT: the Autotest command closes the contacts regardless of the configuration
set by the user: the user is responsible for making the devices connected to the
modules secure, checking that the contacts have closed properly and that the leds
have come on

Ekip Signalling 2K The menu activates in the presence of module Ekip Signalling 2K, auxiliary power supply and local bus
enabled.
NOTE: a menu is available for each Ekip Signalling 2K module present, up to a maximum of
three

The Autotest command is available in each submenu; it activates the automatic output test (Contacts and
leds), input test (leds) and provides for the following operations:
1. Resetting of output contacts (= open) and leds (= off).
2. Lighting up of all leds in sequence (output and input)
3. Closing and switch-off in sequence of the two output contacts while the relative leds come on.
4. Reset initial conditions
IMPORTANT: the Autotest command closes the contacts regardless of the configuration
set by the user: the user is responsible for making the devices connected to the
Ekip Signalling 2K modules secure, checking that the contacts have closed properly
and that the leds have come on

ZoneSelectivity The menu has one or two sections, visibility of which depends on the protections available and enabled:

Submenus Reference selectivity Outputs/Inputs managed

S Selectivity S, S2, D (Forward) SZi (DFi), SZo (DFo)
G Selectivity G, Gext, MDGF, D (Backward) GZi (DBi), GZo (DBo)

Each submenu has three fields for checking selectivity inputs and outputs:
Field Description
Input Provides the status of the selectivity input (On/Off)
Force output Selectivity output activated
Force Output Selectivity output deactivated

Consult the description of the putting into service procedure when checking the selectivity contacts in the
manuals 1SDH000999R1002 and 1SDH001000R1002.

RC test The command is available in the presence of Rating plug Rc and Rc toroid.
Selection of the command accesses a window containing the protection settings and test instructions:
1. Press the iTEST button to send a test signal to the toroid.
2. The toroid sends Ekip Touch a signal as though it had measured an alarm current.
3. Ekip Touch sends a TRIP command.
IMPORTANT: the command sends a signal to the Rc toroid and concludes with a TRIP
command: the user is responsible for checking that the initial connections are
correct (of the toroid and power supplies of the unit) and that TRIP is accomplished

134 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Test | 1 - Test
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Ekip Touch - Additional functions

1 - Zone Selectivity

Description Zone Selectivity is an evolution of time selectivity (see chapter "3 - Selectivity between ABB SACE circuit-
breakers"), in which a dialog is created between the trip units through input and output blocking signals: an
active input blocking signal means that the circuit-breaker must remain closed.
Specifically, if a trip unit with the function enabled detects a fault current higher than the threshold set for a
particular protection, it activates the output blocking signal for the protection and, before opening, checks
the corresponding input blocking signal:
• If the input is not active, the trip unit opens with a delay equal to the selectivity time set for the protection
(which must be lower than the protection tripping time).
• If the input is active, it opens only if the fault persists and with a delay equal to the tripping time of the
protection.

Zone Selectivity can be enabled via cabling (Hardware Selectivity) with ABB SACE circuit-breakers, not
Emax 2, where available.
Besides Hardware Selectivity, SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers allow Logic Selectivity to be configured using
the communication via Link Bus between releases equipped with Ekip Link module. For further details,
consult paragraph “Zone Selectivity with SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers".

Zone Selectivity with ABB SACE With electronic trip units not for ABB SACE Emax 2:
circuit-breakers • Zone selectivity can be implemented only for protections S I G and D (Directional).
• If the function is available, the circuit-breaker is equipped with two blocking outputs and two blocking
inputs that is, one output and one input for each S, I and G protection), or as an alternative two outputs
and two inputs for protection D (one output and one input per direction).
• Since only two blocking outputs and two blocking inputs are available, Zone Selectivity for protections S,
I and G and Directional Zone Selectivity are mutually excluding (to implement Directional Zone Selectivity,
the S, I and G protections must be disabled, and vice versa).
• To actuate Zone Selectivity, the releases must be equipped with auxiliary voltage to activate the outputs.
• Zone selectivity for S and I protection share the same restrain signal
• Each S G and D protection has two selectivity parameters: the function enabling parameter and selectivity
time, meaning the opening time of the circuit-breaker if the selectivity input is not active.
• For I protection the selectivity time is fixed (without possibilty to modify the value).
• The blocking outputs and inputs are considered active if the level is high (equal to the auxiliary voltage).
• For protection D, the selectivity time to be set is the same for both directions.

To obtain Zone Selectivity, the protections must be set, and the blocking outputs and must be wired, so that
only those circuit-breakers capable of isolating the overload or fault without the rest of the installation being
de-energized open. Regarding this:
• For each type of selectivity, definitions, operating principles, application fields, advantages and disadvantages,
requirements, indications for setting the protections and examples are provided in the Technical Application
Paper QT1 1SDC007100G0205 "Low voltage selectivity with ABB circuit-breakers".
• For Directional Selectivity, application examples are available in the White Paper 1SDC007401G0201
“Directional protection and directional zone selectivity”.

135 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 1 - Zone Selectivity
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Zone Selectivity with SACE With SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers, Zone Selectivity can be implemented:
Emax 2 circuit-breakers • If the circuit-breakers are equipped with Ekip LCD or Touch trip units (including Hi-, G, and G Hi- trip units).
• For protections S, I, G, D, 2I, MCR, S2, Gext, MDGF (availability depends on the trip unit model).
Hardware Selectivity operation is the same as that described in the previous section for SACE circuit-breakers
other than Emax2, except for the addition of S2, Gext and MDGF in the list of protections supported.
NOTE: S2, Gext and MDGF share the same selectivity inputs/outputs of S (S2) and G (Gext
and MDGF), respectively. If several protections are active with the same channels (e.g.:
S and S2) the trip unit controls the inputs and outputs with OR logic: configure the parameters
with care to avoid undesired signals or actions.

Logic Selectivity, which is available in the presence of Ekip Link modules, has different advantages:
• Each protection is independent. There are no cases of shared or exclusive channels/bits (example: selectivity
D can be actuated without disabling protections S and G).
• Each device connected to Link Bus can be customized with many propagation parameters, mask, diagnosis.
Use of both types of selectivity or just logic selectivity can be selected on trip unit for each protection.
NOTE: for details on how to associate trip units connected to the same Link Bus, see the
chapter "9 - Ekip Link”.

Logic selectivity: setting

For each protection for which you wish to implement Zone Selectivity, you must set the function enabling
among the available parameters. Then, in addition to these parameters, the selectivity time is also activated
for the setting.
Otherwise, Zone Selectivity can only be set up via the Ekip Connect software. Specifically:
• Logic selectivity can be implemented for a maximum of 12 of the 15 actors (trip units) that can be associated
to the trip unit via Link Bus (see the chapter "9 - Ekip Link").
• Only hardware selectivity or mixed selectivity (hardware and logic) must be selected in the Ekip Link
advanced selectivity page.
• The IP address of each actor present must be entered in the Ekip Link configuration. Entry of the
address enables the configuration parameters and state indicators to be displayed in the various pages
(see the chapter "1 - Power Controller").
• For each actor associated to the trip unit via Link Bus and for which you want to enable Logic Selectivity,
the function must be enabled (the value “True” must be assigned to the Selectivity Actor parameter).
• Selectivity masks are available for each actor present in the Ekip Link advanced selectivity page: the
mask enables selection of the protections of the actors (S, G, D-Forward, D-Backward, S2, Gext, MDGF)
that activate the selectivity input of the trip unit (example: actor 1, protection mask S = S2: selectivity S
of the trip unit will be active in the presence of signals S2 of actor 1).
• If selectivity has been enabled for protection S and the protection itself is in the alarm state, the following
are activated on the output: the S/D-Forward hardware signal and logic selectivity bit S.
In addition, with reference to the example, the circuit-breaker opening time varies on the basis of the state of
the selectivity inputs and/or state bits:
• if hardware signal S/D-Forward (SZi) and logic selectivity bits S2 and Gext of actor 1 are not active: the
circuit-breaker is open during the selectivity time for protection S.
• if hardware signal S/D-Forward (SZi) or, with mixed selectivity, logic selectivity bits S2 or Gext of actor
1 are active: the circuit-breaker is open during S protection time (if S protection is still in the alarm state
once this time has elapsed).
IMPORTANT: if hardware-only selectivity is selected, the logical selectivity bits are
ignored in input, but they are however activated in output.

NOTE: the S/D-Forward (G/D-Backward) hardware output is activated only if the protections
S or D-Forward (G or D-Backward) are in alarm, and the S/D-Forward (G/D-Backward)
hardware input acts as a block only for the protections S and D-Forward (G and D-Backward),
regardless of whether hardware-only or mixed selectivity is selected.

Continued on the next page

136 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 1 - Zone Selectivity
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

• Remote Programmable States A and B are also included in the selectivity masks: these 2 parameters,
which are available in the Ekip Link configuration page, enable the event (or combination of several
events) and reference actor that activate the selectivity input of the trip unit to be selected. 2 further states
are available, C and D, but they cannot be configured for Zone Selectivity. All 4 programmable states are
used for the Programmable Logic function described in chapter "9 - Ekip Link".
NOTE: The Programmable Logic function is different from that of Zone Selectivity.

Additional functions: repetition of selectivity information

The Repeat Configuration mask parameter is available in the Ekip Link advanced selectivity page. It
enables the selection of protections whose logic selectivity bit, if present on the input, must be propagated
regardless of the state of the protection on the current trip unit.
NOTE: the parameter only acts on the selectivity bits. It does not involve the hardware outputs.

Additional functions: diagnostics

In the presence of both hardware and logic selectivity, the diagnosis highlights any errors in the hardware
selecitivity cabling by checking its continuity.
In the Ekip Link diagnosis configuration page it is possible to: enable diagnosis, configure the interval
of time between one inspection and the next, select the inputs to be checked for each active actor (S/D_
Forward, G/D_Backward).

Then:
• A check is performed on the hardware inputs at regular intervals.
• If, on the trip unit, the input of an actor is configured for diagnosis (e.g. input S of actor 3) and this input
is not active when the test is performed, the actor stimulates its output (e.g. actor 3 activates output S)
for a short time: the trip unit considers the test result to be positive if it receives the signal correctly at its
input, otherwise it will signal error.
• the diagnosis check will not be performed if the hw input is active.
• if the input configured for diagnosis is active when the test is performed, diagnosis check will not be
performed and the Detection state in the Ekip Link state page will indicate: Unknown.

Error signals (inconsistency)

• Regardless of the diagnosis, if a hardware input is active and none of the logic selectivity bits of the
associated actors is active, a line inconsistency for this input is reported in the Ekip Link state page.
NOTE: to check the line inconsistency, all the actors associated with the trip unit are checked,
including those for which the function has not been enabled (i.e. the value “True” was
not assigned to the Selectivity Actor parameter).

• A line inconsistency (independently of diagnostics) is indicative of a possible configuration error (for example:
a hardware input of the trip unit is connected to the hardware output of a trip unit not associated via Link
Bus, or to an actor for which the function has not been enabled).
• Therefore, to avoid a line inconsistency being reported, the trip units whose hardware outputs are connected
to the hardware inputs of the trip unit must also be connected to the Link Bus and associated to the trip
unit (see the chapter "9 - Ekip Link") while it is not necessary (it is not necessary for the value “True” to be
assigned to the Selectivity Actor parameter).

137 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 1 - Zone Selectivity
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Generator protection
Description
Specific protections and functions have been integrated into SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers equipped with
Ekip LCD or Touch trip units (with Measurement enabler with voltage socket module), or Ekip Hi- or G or G Hi-
(LCD or Touch) trip units to protect low voltage synchronous generators against typical fault conditions and
to connect the generators to the installation. This ensures solutions that are compact and simple to install,
with no need to turn to indirect solutions.

Available information
More information is available in the White Paper 1SDC007409G0202 “Generator protections: Ekip G trip unit
for SACE Emax 2”, which provides:
• A list of the available protections and functions giving both the ABB name and the ANSI codes (example:
protection RQ, with ANSI codes 40 and 32R).
• For each protection, the fault conditions to which it is applied (example: for protection RQ, the inversion
of the sign of the reactive power, positive if outgoing from the generator).
• A description of the malfunctions that can lead to the above fault conditions (example: for reactive power
reversal, the loss of excitation and the consequent loss of the electromotive force, with reactive power
absorption from the network by the generator).
• The types of generator or installation in which such mulfunctions are most likely to take place (for example:
reversal of reactive power, smooth rotor generators).
• The consequences to which they may lead if the trip unit does not trip (example: for reversal of reactive
power, a voltage drop, if the network is not able to supply the required reactive power with the consequent
loss of system stability, and in any case an increase in temperature on the generator windings).
• If the protection can be duplicated using the Hi- version of the trip unit, with the possibility of setting the
two protections independently, and therefore with the possibility of adding redundancy to increase reliability,
or to fine tune the adjustment of the protection.
• For each protection, the parameters to be set, the trip curves and the criteria for the setting of parameters.
• For each of the above parameters, the values that can be assigned.
• For each protection, an application example.
• The description of the synchronism function, which can be implemented with the Ekip Synchrocheck
module (see the chapter “12 - Ekip Synchrocheck”), that permits the parallel connection of two independent
power supply systems.
For a summary of the fault conditions to which the protections are applied and of the parameters to be set,
see the chapter “Ekip Touch - Protections" starting on page 51.

Compatibility
To identify the trip units in which the protections are available, see the chapter “1 - Overview", and the chapter
"4 - Menu” and the paragraph “Advanced menus".

138 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 2 - Generator protection
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

1 - Power Controller

Description The Power Controller function allows the loads of an installation to be managed according to power
consumption, for the purpose of reducing consumption and optimizing energy efficiency.
All the parameters and measurements of the function are available via Ekip Connect; however, the Trip unit
allows certain of them to be set and displayed, as described below.
IMPORTANT: consult the Technical catalog or White paper of the function for full
details (page 13, 16).

Ekip Touch Parameter Certain configuration parameters of the function are available in the Settings - Power Controller menu 46).

Parameter Description Default

Enable Activates/deactivates the function and its availability in the parameters menu OFF
Enables the configuration of each of the 15 programmable loads to be set
Load Operating
(from Load 1 to Load 15); either Automatic or Manual configuration can be Manual
Mode
selected
Enables 10 power limits to be set (from Power Limit 1 to Power Limit 10);
Power Limits the value is given in kW and can be set within range: 10 kW to 10000 kW, in 10 kW
10 kW steps

NOTE: to characterize the parameters of the function, it is advisable to first configure them
via Ekip Connect and only then use the Trip unit to enable or modify the power limits and
loads

Ekip Touch Measure A specific page containing the main measurements is available in the Measurements pages, with Power
Controller activated:
Measurement Description
Ea Expected energy
ΔT Time elapsed in the evaluation window
LOADS Number of loads monitored
LOADS Shed Number of shed loads
Sp Load shedding priority setting
T Evaluation window

The Power Controller menu, with information concerning the 15 loads in two submenus, is available in the
About page when Power Controller is activated (page 47):
Submenus Information provided
Load Input Status Status of the loads (from Load 1 to Load 15): open or closed
Load Active Load configuration (from Load 1 to Load 15): active or inactive

139 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 1 - Power Controller
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Load Shedding

Description The Load Shedding function allows faults to be managed in installations which are able to function thanks
to the energy produced by renewable and local energy sources, especially the absence of power supply
caused, for example, by a fault on the MV voltage side.
This function is available in two versions:
• Basic, supplied with all the Ekip Touch Trip units
• Adaptive; can be purchased by means of the relative additional package and is available for all Trip units
with the Measuring Measurements package
All the parameters and measurements of the function are available via Ekip Connect; however, the Trip unit
allows certain of them to be set and displayed, as described below.
IMPORTANT: consult the Technical catalog or White paper of the function for full
details (page 13, 16).

Ekip Touch Parameter Certain configuration parameters of the function are available in the Settings - Load Shedding menu (page46).

NOTE: it is advisable to first configure the parameters via Ekip Connect, and only then operate
on the Trip unit

Parameter Description Default

Enable Activates/deactivates the function and its availability in the parameters menu Off
Display of the version of the function, Basic or Adaptive
Version NOTE: with the Basic version, the only parameter available is --
Reconnection Timeout
Solar Plant present Establishes whether the microgrid includes a solar energy system (Off/On) Off
Available with Solar Energy System Present = On, defines the rated power of
SolarPlant its solar energy system.
100 kW
NominalPower The value is given in kW and can be set within the range: 100 kW to 65535
kW, in 1 kW steps
ATS Establishes whether the installation has an ATS system (Off/On) Off
Available with ATS=On, defines the power received from the ATS branch;
Generator Power ....
can be set within the range: 0 kW (. . . .) to 10000 kW, in 1 kW steps
Defines the instantaneous frequency variation that activates Load shedding
Frequency slope The value is given as absolute value (Hz/s) and can be set within the range: 0,6 Hz/s
0.6 Hz/s to 10 Hz/s in 0.2 Hz/s steps
Control threshold of the minimum frequency that activates Load shedding
F W Warning (1)
The value is given as absolute value (Hertz) and can be set within the range: 3 Fn
0.9 Fn to 1.1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
Defines the time employed by the Trip unit between reconnection of one load
Reconnection
and the next, after the main CB has reclosed. The value is given as absolute 10 s
Timeout
value (s) and can be set within the range: 1 s ÷ 1800 s, in 1 s steps

NOTE: Load shedding activates if the monitoring conditions defined by the Frequency slope
and F W Warning parameters are present at the same time

140 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 2 - Load Shedding
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Ekip Touch Measure A specific page containing the main measurements is available in the Measurements pages, with Power
Controller activated:
Measurement Description
F Frequency measured
Fn Nominal frequency of the Trip unit
LOADS Number of loads monitored
LOADS Shed Number of shed loads

The Load Shedding menu, with information concerning the 15 loads in two submenus, is available in the
About page when Load Shedding is activated (page 47).
Submenus Information provided
Load Input Status Status of the loads (from Load 1 to Load 15): open or closed
Load Active Load configuration (from Load 1 to Load 15): active or inactive

141 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 2 - Load Shedding
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - IPS Interface protections

Description The IPS Interface protection function allows faults to be managed in installations which are able to function
thanks to the energy produced by renewable and local energy sources, especially the absence of power
supply, e.g. caused by a fault on the MV voltage side.
The function is available for all the Ekip Hi-Touch Trip units.
All the parameters and measurements of the function are available via Ekip Connect; however, the Trip unit
allows protection 59 S1, V DIR, V INV and control thresholds Voltage stability, Frequency stability and F W1
to be set, as described below.
IMPORTANT: consult the Technical catalog or White paper of the function for full
details (page 13, 16).

Protection 59.S1 [ANSI 59S1] The protection sends a TRIP command if the maximum mean value of the three line-to-line voltages,
calculated in a 10-minute floating menu, exceeds the threshold for longer than the set time.
The Protections-Advanced menu includes the protection submenu in which the parameters can be entered:
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable Off
menu
Activates/deactivates transmission of the open command: if disabled, the
Trip Enable Off
alarm and exceedance of protection time are only managed as information
Establishes the value that activates the protection.
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and 1,1 Un
can be set within the range: 1 Un to 1.3 Un, in 0.05 Un steps
This is the trip time of the protection; the value is given in seconds and can
Time 3s
be set within a range: 3 s to 999 s, in 3 s steps

Limitations and additional functions

The block functions can also be accessed by means of the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or
communication via system bus (page 83).

Protection V DIR [ANSI 27VD] If the positive sequence measured by the Trip unit exceeds or falls below threshold Upos (depending on the
direction set), the corresponding alarm will be activated (no TRIP).The Protections-Advanced menu includes
the protection submenu in which the parameters can be entered:
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the control threshold of the parameters and their
Enable Off
availability in the menu
Defines whether sequence monitoring is performed after the measured
Direction Down
sequence has dropped (Down) or been exceeded (Up)
Establishes the value that activates the alarm.
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and 0,8 Un
can be set within the range: 0.1 Un to 1.5 Un in 0.05 Un steps

Protection V INV [ANSI 59VI] If the negative sequence measured by the Trip unit exceeds or falls below threshold Uneg, the corresponding
alarm will be activated (no TRIP).
The Protections-Advanced menu includes the protection submenu in which the parameters can be entered:
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates monitoring of the parameters and their availability in
Enable Off
the menu
Establishes the value that activates the alarm. The value is given as both
Threshold absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un) and can be set within the range: 0,05 Un
0.05 Un to 0.5 Un in 0.05 Un steps

142 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 3 - IPS Interface protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

VS Warning A warning signal is activated if all three of the line-to-line voltages measured by the Trip unit are within the
window defined by the control thresholds for the set time.
The Protections-Advanced-Warnings menu includes the control threshold submenu in which the parameters
can be entered:
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates monitoring of the parameters and their availability in
Enable Off
the menu
Defines whether the line-to-line voltages to be verified are those from the
internal sockets (Measurement module) or from Ekip Synchrocheck, if
Signal source present. Meas.
NOTE: if Ekip Synchrocheck is set, monitoring will refer to one single
voltage
Establishes the lower limit value of the control band, given as both absolute
Threshold
value (Volts) and relative value (Un), which can be set within the range: 0.5 0,9 Un
DOWN
Un to 1 Un in 0.001 Un steps
Establishes the upper limit value of the control band, given as both absolute
Threshold UP value (Volts) and relative value (Un), which can be set within the range: 1 Un 1,1 Un
to 1.5 Un, in 0.001 Un steps
This is the monitoring time that activates the signal; the value is given in
Time 30 s
seconds and can be set within a range: 0.1 s to 900 s, in 0.1 s steps

FS Warning A warning signal is activated if the frequency measured by the Trip unit is within the window defined by the
control thresholds for the set time.
The Protections-Advanced-Warnings menu includes the control threshold submenu in which the parameters
can be entered:
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates monitoring of the parameters and their availability in
Enable Off
the menu
Defines whether the line-to-line voltages to be verified are those from the
internal sockets (Measurement module) or from Ekip Synchrocheck, if
Signal source present. Meas.
NOTE: if Ekip Synchrocheck is set, monitoring will refer to one single
voltage
Establishes the lower limit value of the control band, given as both absolute
Threshold
value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn), which can be set within the range: 0.9 0,998 Fn
DOWN
Fn to 1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
Establishes the lower limit value of the control band, given as both absolute
Threshold UP value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn), which can be set within the range: 1 Fn 1,002 Fn
to 1.1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps
This is the monitoring time that activates the signal; the value is given in
Time 30 s
seconds and can be set within the range: 0.1 s to 900 s, in 0.1 s steps

F W1 Warning If the frequency measured by the Trip unit exceeds or falls below the threshold (depending on the direction
set), the corresponding alarm will be activated (no TRIP).
The Protections-Advanced-Warnings-F W Warnings menu includes the control threshold submenu in which
the parameters can be entered:
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the control threshold of the parameters and their
Enable Off
availability in the menu
Defines whether frequency monitoring is performed after the measured
Direction Down
sequence has dropped (Down) or been exceeded (Up)
Establishes the value that activates the alarm.
Threshold The value is given as both absolute value (Hertz) and relative value (Fn) and 3 Fn
can be set within the range: 0.9 Fn to 1.1 Fn in 0.001 Fn steps

143 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Additional functions | 3 - IPS Interface protections
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Ekip Touch - Default

1 - Ekip TOUCH default parameters

Foreword Given the number of parameters available with Ekip Touch, each chapter describing their characteristics also
includes their default value settings.
The configurations of the main parameters are given below.

Protections All Ekip Touch models are supplied with the protections (and relative correlated functions) off, with the
exception of the protections listed below:
Protection Configuration
L (1) I1= 1 In; t1= 144 s; curve= t= k/I 2; prealarm: 90% I1
I I3= 4 In; startup= OFF
Harmonic distortion On
Rc (2) Idn= 3 A; Tdn= 0,06 s

(1)
protection always active; a model L Disable rating Plug must be used to disable it
(2)
protection available and active if model Rc Rating Plus is present

Parameters Unless different specifications are requested when ordering, all Ekip Touch models are supplied with the
following configurations:
Parameters Configuration
Frequency 50 Hz (IEC) / 60 Hz (UL)
Configuration 3P (3P circuit-breaker) / 4P (4P circuit-breaker)
Neutral Off (3P circuit-breaker) / 50% (4P circuit-breaker)
Rated voltage 400 V
Power flow Top → Bottom
Phase Sequence 1-2-3
Local bus Off
Mode Local
Language English
Bluetooth Low Energy Off
Password 00001
Home page Histograms
Led Alive Disabled
View Horizontal
Maintenance On
Test Bus On
Modbus RTU par Address: 247; baudrate: 19.2 Kbit/s
Profibus Address: 125
DeviceNet TM
MAC ID: 63; baudrate: 125 Kbit/s
Modbus TCP/IP Static IP: 0.0.0.0

144 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Ekip Touch - Default | 1 - Ekip TOUCH default parameters
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Mechanical characteristics

1 - E1.2 description

Description of circuit-breaker Emax E1.2 circuit-breakers consist of a structure containing the poles, the operating mechanism and the
auxiliary parts. Each pole, enclosed in a plastic box, consists of a breaking part and a current transformer.
The structure of the breaking part differs between selective or current-limiting circuit-breaker.
The circuit-breaker is available in two types:
• fixed version
• withdrawable
The circuit-breaker in fixed version (see Figure 33) has its own terminals for connection to the power circuit.
The withdrawable circuit breaker consists of a mobile part (see Figure 34 for IEC and Figure 35 for UL) and
of a fixed part (see Figure 36 for IEC and Figure 37 for UL) for connection through its own terminals to the
power circuit.
The coupling between the mobile part and the fixed part is via disconnection contacts mounted on the fixed
part.

Figure 33 Figure 34

Figure 35 Figure 36

Figure 37

145 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Description of the circuit-

breaker front panel The following are the main components of the circuit-breaker:

3
1
9
8 4
7
6 5

Figure 38

Pos. Description
1 Lever for manually charging the closing springs
2 SACE Ekip protection trip unit
3 Name of the circuit-breaker
4 CB open (O) / closed (I) indicator
5 Closing pushbutton
6 Opening pushbutton
7 Mechanical signalling of tripped TU
8 Springs charged-discharged signalling device
9 Electrical data plate

Description of electrical data 1 2 3 4

plate IEC

11
10 5
9
8
7
6 Uimp 12Kv 12
Figure 39

Pos. Description
1 Type of circuit-breaker
2 Utilization category
3 Device type: Circuit-breaker or switch-disconnector
4 Rated current
5 Rated operating frequency
6 Admissible rated short-time current
7 Rated duty short-circuit breaking capacity
8 Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
9 Rated service voltage
10 Standards
11 Circuit-breaker serial number
12 Impulse voltage

Continued on the next page

146 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Description of electrical data

plate UL 1 2

SACE E1.2S-A Iu 1200A

8 S/ N: 000000000000000 ABB SA CE M ade in Italy
FXX XXXXXXXX
7 ANSI C37.13 - UL1066 50-60 Hz 3
6 R a t e d M a x i m u m Vo l t a g e (V) 254 508 635
5 R a t e d S h o r t - C i r c ui t (kA ) 66 66 42
Low-V ol t age A C
S hor t Ti me (kA ) 42
4 P ower Ci r c ui t B r ak er 63FA

Figure 40

Pos. Description
1 Type of circuit-breaker
2 Rated current
3 Rated operating frequency
4 Admissible rated short-time current
5 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
6 Rated service voltage
7 Standards
8 Circuit-breaker serial number

147 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Manual operations for opening The following is the sequence of steps for closing and opening the circuit-breaker:
and closing the circuit-breaker 1. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open / closed indicator "O - OPEN"), and check that the springs
are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING") as indicated in Figure 41.
2. Charging the springs - Pull the lever [A] downwards several times until the springs charged signalling
device [B] is “yellow - CHARGED SPRING” as indicated in Figure 42.

A B
Figure 41 Figure 42

3. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open/closed signalling device “O - OPEN”), and check that the
springs are charged (springs signalling device “yellow - CHARGED SPRING”) as indicated in Figure 43.
4. Closing - Press the closing pushbutton “I - Push ON” as indicated in Figure 44.

Figure 43 Figure 44

5. Check that the circuit-breaker is closed (open/closed indicator "I - CLOSED"), and check that the
springs are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING" as indicated in
Figure 45.
6. Opening - Press the opening pushbutton “O - Push OFF” as indicated in Figure 46.

Figure 45 Figure 46

Continued on the next page

148 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

7. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open / closed indicator "O - OPEN"), and check that the springs
are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING") as indicated in Figure 47.

Figure 47

Mechanical status indicators The following are the possible states in which you can find the circuit-breaker:
1. Circuit-breaker open with springs discharged (see Figure 48).
2. Circuit-breaker open with springs charged (see Figure 49).
3. Circuit-breaker closed with springs discharged (see Figure 50).
4. Circuit-breaker closed with springs charged (see Figure 51). This state occurs when after closing (see
step 4 - Figure 51) the springs are recharged manually or automatically by the gearmotor (if provided).

Figure 48 Figure 49 Figure 50

Figure 51

149 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Circuit breaker racking-in/ The following is the procedure for the insertion of the moving part in the fixed part:
racking-out operations
WARNING!

• Make sure the circuit-breaker is disconnected from all sources of energy.

• Switch the circuit-breaker to the open position with springs discharged.
WARNING! Before proceeding, remove all equipment used during the work and remove
processing waste and materials used.

1. Turn plate through 90° before inserting the moving part.

“CLICK”

Figure 52

2. Make sure that signalling device on the fixed part indicates the DISCONNECT position. See Figure
53.

Figure 53

3. Position the moving part in the fixed part and push until it comes to a stop. See Figure 54 and Figure
55.

Figure 54 Figure 55

Continued on the next page

150 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

4. Extract the disconnection crank from its housing See Figure 56.
5. Press the lock pushbutton and fit the handle into the moving part. In this phase, the moving part will
still be in the DISCONNECT position. See Figure 57.

Figure 56 Figure 57

6. Keep breaker pushed. Turn handle clockwise until pushbutton projects and signaling device indicates
that circuit-breaker is in position TEST. See Figure 58.

2
Figure 58

7. Press the lock button and then rotate the crank clockwise until the button comes out and the indicator
shows that the circuit-breaker is in the CONNECT position. See Figure 59.

Figure 59

Continued on the next page

151 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

8. Extract the crank. See Figure 60.

9. Replace the crank in its housing See Figure 61.

Figure 60 Figure 61

To extract the moving part from the fixed part, perform the same steps indicated for insertion in reverse order.
After extraction, in order to remove the moving part, unlock the safety lock. See Figure 62.

2
Figure 62

WARNING! The inserted circuit-breaker must be opened in order to be able to reach

the test position. On the UL version, the fail safe prevents the removal of the
circuit-breaker from the fixed part with springs charged. Discharge the springs before
removing the circuit-breaker from the fixed part. For further details, consult the
Mechanical safety accessories chapter.

Mechanical position indicators The following are the possible positions where you can find the mobile part of a withdrawable circuit-breaker
during its use:
• circuit breaker in DISCONNECT position (see Figure 63).
• circuit-breaker in test position (see Figure 64).
• circuit-breaker in CONNECT position (see Figure 65).

Figure 63 Figure 64 Figure 65

152 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 1 - E1.2 description
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description

Description of circuit-breaker The Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers consist of a steel structure in which the operating mechanism, the
poles and the auxiliary parts are located.
Each pole, isolated from the others, contains the breaking parts and the current transformer of its own phase.
The structure of the poles differs between selective or current-limiting circuit-breaker.
The circuit-breaker is available in two types:
• fixed version
• withdrawable

The circuit-breaker in fixed version (see Figure 66) has its own terminals for connection to the power circuit.
The withdrawable circuit breaker consists of a mobile part (see Figure 67) and of a fixed part (see Figure 68
for IEC and Figure 69 for UL) for connection through its own terminals to the power circuit.
The coupling between the mobile part and the fixed part is via disconnection contacts mounted on the fixed
part.

Figure 66 Figure 67

Figure 68 Figure 69

153 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Description of the circuit- The following are the main components of the circuit-breaker:
breaker front panel
2

3
1 4
5
6
7

8
9

Figure 70

Pos. Description
1 Lever for manually charging the closing springs
2 Ekip protection trip unit
3 Name of the circuit-breaker
4 CB open (O) / closed (I) indicator
5 Opening pushbutton
6 Mechanical signalling of tripped TU
7 Closing pushbutton
8 Springs charged-discharged signalling device
9 Electrical data plate

Description of electrical data 1 2 3 4

plate IEC
12
11 5
10
9
8
7
Uimp 12 kV 13

Figure 71

Pos. Description
1 Type of circuit-breaker
2 Utilization category
3 Device type: Circuit-breaker or switch-disconnector
4 Rated current
5 Rated operating frequency
6 Rated voltage of accessories
7 Admissible rated short-time current
8 Rated duty short-circuit breaking capacity
9 Rated ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity
10 Rated service voltage
11 Standards
12 Circuit-breaker serial number
13 Impulse voltage

Continued on the next page

154 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Description of electrical data

1 2
plate UL

SACE E2.2V- u 2000 A

S/N: 000000000000000 ABB SACE M ade in Italy

8 ANSI C37.13 - UL1066 50-60 Hz 3

254 508 635
7 R a t e d M a x i m u m Vo l t a g e

R a t e d S h o r t - C i r c ui t
(V)
(kA ) 100 100 85
6 S hor t Ti me (kA ) 85 Low-V ol t age A C

5
P ower Ci r cui t B r ak er 63FA

Accessories
A UX 4 3 A 400 V AC 220 V - 250 V AC/DC
4 A UX 6
RT C 220 V - 250 V AC/DC
YR YC2
220 V - 250 V AC/DC U
Figure 72

Pos. Description
1 Type of circuit-breaker
2 Rated current
3 Rated operating frequency
4 Rated voltage of accessories
5 Rated short-circuit breaking capacity
6 Rated service voltage
7 Standards
8 Circuit-breaker serial number

155 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Manual operations for opening The following is the sequence of steps for closing and opening the circuit-breaker:
and closing the circuit-breaker 1. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open / closed indicator "O - OPEN"), and check that the springs
are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING") as indicated in Figure 73.
2. Charging the springs - Pull the lever [A] downwards several times until the springs charged signalling
device [B] is “yellow - CHARGED SPRING” as indicated in Figure 74.

A
B
Figure 73 Figure 74

3. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open/closed signalling device “O - OPEN”), and check that the
springs are charged (springs signalling device “yellow - CHARGED SPRING”) as indicated in Figure 75.
4. Closing - Press the closing pushbutton “I - Push ON” as indicated in Figure 76.

Figure 75 Figure 76

5. Check that the circuit-breaker is closed (open/closed indicator "I - CLOSED"), and check that the
springs are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING" as indicated in
Figure 77.
6. Opening - Press the opening pushbutton “O - Push OFF” as indicated in Figure 78.

Figure 77 Figure 78

Continued on the next page

156 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

7. Check that the circuit-breaker is open (open / closed indicator "O - OPEN"), and check that the springs
are discharged (spring signalling device "white - DISCHARGED SPRING") as indicated in Figure 79.

Figure 79

Mechanical status indicators The following are the possible states in which you can find the circuit-breaker:
1. Circuit-breaker open with springs discharged (see Figure 80).
2. Circuit-breaker open with springs charged (see Figure 81).
3. Circuit-breaker closed with springs discharged (see Figure 82).
4. Circuit-breaker closed with springs charged and not ready to close (see Figure 83). This state occurs
when after closing (see step 4 - Manual operations for opening and closing the circuit-breaker) the
springs are recharged manually or automatically by the gearmotor (if provided).
5. Circuit-breaker open with springs charged and not ready to close (see Figure 84). This state occurs
in the following cases:
• The circuit-breaker is open due to tripping of protection trip units and the Reset signal has not been
reset. To close the circuit-breaker press the TU Reset pushbutton on the front of the circuit-breaker.
• The key lock or padlock is active in the open position.
• The undervoltage coil is de-energized
• The opening coil is permanently energized.
• The closing coil is permanently energized.
• The pushbutton for enabling the insertion/extraction crank of a withdrawable circuit-breaker is pres-
sed.

Figure 80 Figure 81 Figure 82

Figure 83 Figure 84

157 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Circuit breaker racking-in/ The following is the procedure for the insertion of the moving part in the fixed part:
racking-out operations
WARNING!

• Make sure the circuit-breaker is disconnected from all sources of energy.

• Switch the circuit-breaker to the open position with springs discharged.
WARNING! Before proceeding, remove all equipment used during the work and remove
processing waste and materials used.

1. Turn plate through 90° before inserting the moving part.

1 2 “CLICK” 3

Figure 85

2. Position the lifting plates on the mobile part making sure that the tongue of the plates is latched
properly. See Figure 86.

1 2 3

Figure 86

3. Extract the guides of the fixed part using the appropriate levers. See Figure 87.
4. Position the moving part on the guides of the fixed part. Latch by inserting the hollow part of the side
in the latch of the guide of the fixed part See Figure 88.

1
2

Figure 87 Figure 88

Continued on the next page

158 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

5. Unlatch the tongue and remove the lifting plates from the moving part. See Figure 89.

1 2 3

Figure 89

6. Make sure that the signalling device indicates the DISCONNECT position. See Figure 90.

Figure 90

7. Grip the guide levers of the fixed part and push them until the moving part stops. See Figure 91.

Figure 91

Continued on the next page

159 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

8. Extract the disconnection crank from its housing See Figure 92.
9. Press the lock pushbutton and fit the handle into the moving part. In this phase, the moving part will
still be in the DISCONNECT position. See Figure 93.

Figure 92 Figure 93

10. Turn handle clockwise until pushbutton projects and signaling device indicates that circuit-breaker is
in position TEST. See Figure 94.

Figure 94

11. Press lock pushbutton and turn handle clockwise until pushbutton projects and signaling device
indicates that circuit-breaker is in position CONNECT. See Figure 95.

Figure 95

Continued on the next page

160 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

12. Extract the crank. See Figure 96.

13. Replace the crank in its housing See Figure 97.

Figure 96 Figure 97

WARNING! The inserted circuit-breaker must be opened in order to be able to reach

the test position. On the UL version, the fail safe prevents the removal of the
circuit-breaker from the fixed part with springs charged. Discharge the springs before
removing the circuit-breaker from the fixed part. For further details, consult the
Mechanical safety accessories chapter.

To extract the moving part from the fixed part, perform the same steps indicated for insertion in reverse order.

Figure 98

Continued on the next page

161 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Always use both levers of the guides on the fixed part when racking out the circuit-breaker. See Figure 98.

= =

OK

NO!

Figure 99

WARNING! When withdrawing the moving part, make sure that both guides on the
fixed part travel to the same extent, thereby keeping the moving part parallel to
the fixed part. See Figure 99.

Mechanical position indicators The following are the possible positions where you can find the mobile part of a withdrawable circuit-breaker
during its use:
• circuit breaker in DISCONNECT position (see Figure 100)
• circuit-breaker in test position (see Figure 101)
• circuit-breaker in CONNECT position (see Figure 102)

Figure 100 Figure 101 Figure 102

162 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 2 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 description
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Environmental conditions

Installation environment Install the circuit-breaker in a dry environment, without dust or corrosive acids, and so that it is not subject
to shock or vibration.
If this is not possible, mount the circuit-breaker in a compartment protecting it adequately.
For the dimensions to be considered for installation, see the chapter "4 - Installation" on page 165 where the
references for following information can be found:
• minimum installation volumes of the circuit-breakers and derived versions in a cell
• overall dimensions of the circuit-breakers and the fixed parts
• drilling of mounting holes
• drilling of the cell door

Temperatures of the installation The mechanical and electrical characteristics are guaranteed between -25 ° C and +70 ° C, -13 °F e +158 °F.
environment

Particular weather conditions The circuit breaker is designed to operate in particularly difficult industrial environments.
It was tested according to:
• IEC 60068-2-1: endurance at low temperatures
• IEC 60068-2-2: hot dry climate
• IEC 60068-2-30: hot humid climate
• IEC 60068-2-52 severity 2: saline mist atmosphere
• IEC 60947 (pollution level ≤ 3)
• IEC60721-3-6 class 6C3
• IEC60721-3-3 class 3C2
NOTE: the circuit-breaker is suitable for installation in environments with saline concentrations
no higher than 10 mg/m3.

Dusty environments It is recommended to install the circuit breaker in suitably ventilated switchgear where penetration by dust is
minimized.
In case of dusty environments (dust> 1 mg/m3) second level maintenance procedures must be followed.

Vibration The circuit-breaker is insensitive to mechanical or electromagnetic vibrations that meet the following
standards:
• IEC 60068-2-6 a) From 1 to 13 Hz with movement equal to 1 mm - 0.04 in b) From 13 to 100 Hz with
constant acceleration equal to 0.7 g - 0.025 lbs
• Shipping Registers' specifications: RINA, BV, GL, ABS, LRs, DNV

163 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 3 - Environmental conditions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Altitude The circuit breaker maintains its rated operating characteristics up to 2000 m above sea level.
Once this altitude is passed, you need to consider reduction of dielectric strength and reduced cooling
capacity of the air.
The following are the corrections expressed as a percentage to be applied to the parameters according to
altitude:
2000 m / 3000 m / 4000 m / 5000 m /
Altitude
6600 ft 9900 ft 13200 ft 16500 ft
Rated service voltage (V) Ue 100% 88% 78% 68%
Rated current (A) at 40°C 100% 98% 93% 90%

Electromagnetic compatibility The use of specific devices in industrial installations may cause electromagnetic interference in the electrical
system.
The SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers were developed and tested in an EMC environment in accordance with
IEC 60947-2, Annex J and F.

Storage Environment Store the circuit breaker in a dry, dust-free environment free of harsh chemicals.
The storage ambient temperature must be:
• Circuit-breaker in the original packaging, without protection trip unit or Ekip Dip trip unit, between -40 °
C and +85 ° C, -40 °F e +185 °F.
• Circuit-breaker in the original packaging, with Ekip Touch protection trip unit, between -25°C and + 85°C,
-22°F e +185°F.
NOTE: the storage conditions may differ from the usage conditions.

164 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 3 - Environmental conditions
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

4 - Installation

Overall Dimensions E1.2 Information on the overall dimensions is available on the website:
http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/.
The following drawings are also available in .dxf format:
• 1SDH000999R0101 - E1.2 III-IV Fixed F EF IEC-UL
• 1SDH000999R0102 - E1.2 III-IV Fixed FC IEC-UL
• 1SDH000999R0103 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable EF IEC-UL
• 1SDH000999R0104 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable ES IEC-UL
• 1SDH000999R0105 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable SHR IEC
• 1SDH000999R0106 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable FC IEC
• 1SDH000999R0107 - E1.2 III-IV Fixed HR-VR Positionable IEC
• 1SDH000999R0108 - E1.2 III-IV Fixed ES IEC-UL
• 1SDH000999R0109 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR IEC
• 1SDH000999R0120 - E1.2 Flange Fixed Withdrawable IEC-UL
• 1SDH000999R0121 - E1.2 Floor mounting IEC-UL
• 1SDH000999R0303 - E1.2 III-IV Withdrawable Rear Terminals HR-VR UL
• 1SDH000999R0307 - E1.2 III-IV Fixed Rear Terminals HR-VR UL

Positioning anchor plates E1.2 The following diagram shows the distance for positioning the first anchor plate for E1.2 circuit-breakers
according to the peak current:
500/
19.69

450/ L L
17.72

400/
15.75

350/
13.78

L L
300/
11.81

250/
9.84

200/
7.87

150/
5.91
L L
100/
3.94
40 60 80 100 120 140 160

Figure 103

(1): distance of the first anchor plate from the circuit-breaker terminals
(2): peak current

165 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Overall dimensions E2.2-E4.2 Information on the overall dimensions is available on the website:
-E6.2 http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/.

The following drawings are also available in .dxf format:

• 1SDH001000R0100 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed HR VR IEC
• 1SDH001000R0101 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed F IEC-UL
• 1SDH001000R0102 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR IEC
• 1SDH001000R0103 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable F IEC
• 1SDH001000R0104 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed SHR IEC
• 1SDH001000R0105 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable SHR IEC
• 1SDH001000R0106 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed SVR IEC
• 1SDH001000R0107 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable SVR IEC
• 1SDH001000R0110 - E2.2 2000 III-IV Withdrawable FL IEC
• 1SDH001000R0111 - E2.2 2500 III-IV Withdrawable FL IEC
• 1SDH001001R0100 - E4.2 III-IV Fixed HR VR IEC
• 1SDH001001R0101 - E4.2 III-IV Fixed F IEC
• 1SDH001001R0102 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR IEC
• 1SDH001001R0103 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable F IEC
• 1SDH001001R0104 - E4.2/E9, E4.2/E III-IV Fixed SHR IEC
• 1SDH001001R0105 - E4.2/E9, E4.2/E III-IV Withdrawable SHR IEC
• 1SDH001001R0106 - E4.2/E9, E4.2/E III-IV Fixed SVR IEC
• 1SDH001001R0107 - E4.2/E9, E4.2/E III-IV Withdrawable SVR IEC
• 1SDH001001R0110 - E4.2 3200 III-IV Withdrawable FL IEC
• 1SDH001001R0111 - E4.2 4000 III-IV Withdrawable FL IEC
• 1SDH001060R0100 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed HR IEC
• 1SDH001060R0101 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed VR IEC
• 1SDH001060R0102 - E6.2 IV FS Fixed HR-VR IEC
• 1SDH001060R0104 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed F IEC
• 1SDH001060R0105 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR IEC
• 1SDH001060R0106 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable VR IEC
• 1SDH001060R0107 - E6.2 IV FS Withdrawable HR-VR IEC
• 1SDH001060R0108 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable F IEC
• 1SDH001060R0110 - E6.2 6300 III-IV Withdrawable FL IEC
• 1SDH001000R0120 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 Fixed Withdrawable Flange IEC-UL
• 1SDH001000R0121 - E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 Fixed internal mounting IEC-UL
• 1SDH001000R0300 - E2.2 III-IV Fixed HR-VR UL
• 1SDH001000R0302 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR UL
• 1SDH001000R0303 - E2.2 III-IV Withdrawable F UL
• 1SDH001001R0300 - E4.2 III-IV Fixed HR-VR UL
• 1SDH001001R0302 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR UL
• 1SDH001001R0303 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable F UL
• 1SDH001001R0304 - E4.2 III-IV Fixed HR-VR UL
• 1SDH001001R0305 - E4.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR-VR UL
• 1SDH001001R0306 - E4.2 3600 III-IV Fixed UL
• 1SDH001060R0300 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed HR UL
• 1SDH001060R0301 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed VR UL
• 1SDH001060R0302 - E6.2 IV FS Fixed HR-VR UL
• 1SDH001060R0305 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable HR UL
• 1SDH001060R0306 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable VR UL
• 1SDH001060R0307 - E6.2 IV FS Withdrawable HR-VR UL
• 1SDH001060R0308 - E6.2 III-IV-IV FS Withdrawable F UL
• 1SDH001060R0309 - E6.2 III-IV Fixed VR UL
• 1SDH001060R0310 - E6.2 IV FS Fixed VR UL
• 1SDH001060R0311 - E6.2 III-IV Withdrawable VR UL
• 1SDH001060R0312 - E6.2 IV FS Withdrawable VR UL
• 1SDH001060R0313 - E6.2 6000 III Withdrawable VR UL

166 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Positioning anchor plates The following diagram shows the distance for positioning the first anchor plate for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-
E2.2-E4. 2-E6.2 breakers according to the peak current:

500/
19.69

450/ E2.2 E4.2 E6.2

17.72

400/
15.75

350/
13.78

300/
11.81

250/
9.84 L

200/
(1)

7.87
L [mm]

150/
5.91

100/
3.94
40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300

Ipk [kA] (2)

Figure 104

(1): distance of the first anchor plate from the circuit-breaker terminals
(2): peak current

Positioning anchor plates E4.2-A 3200A / 3600A Fixed

The anchor plates must be positioned as indicated in the figure.

30 mm max.

Bus Bracing

Figure 105

Continued on the next page

167 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation

 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Positioning of anchor plates for Terminals FL

The anchor plates must be positioned as indicated in the figure.

Bus Bracing

150mm
110mm
Bus Bracing
Figure 106

>690V version IEC circuit- >690V disconnectors and circuit-breakers are available in the following configurations:
breakers
Circuit-breaker Voltage Version
800V F (1)
E1.2/E9
800V W (2)
E2.2/E9 800V/900V F (3)
E4.2/E9 800V/900V F (3)
E6.2/E9 800V/900V F (3)

(1)
With front terminals (F) and high terminal covers (HTC)
(2)
With positionable rear terminals (HR/VR) and phase separators (PB)
(3)
With insulating protections
Details about assembling insulating protections are available at http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/
DownloadCenter/, especially in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0746.

>635V version UL circuit- >635V disconnectors and circuit-breakers are available in the following configurations:
breakers
Circuit-breaker Voltage Version
E4.2H-A/E 730V F (1)

(1)
With insulating protections
Details about assembling insulating protections are available at http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/
DownloadCenter/, especially in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0746.

168 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Earthing (for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 The circuit-breakers in fixed version and the fixed part of withdrawable circuit-breakers are equipped with a
only) screw for the ground connection.
The connection must be implemented by means of a conductor of suitable cross-section according to the
IEC 61439-1 Standard.
Clean and degrease the area around the screw before making the connection.
After assembly of the conductor, tighten the screw with a torque of 2 N m - 17.7 lb in.

Figure 107 Figure 108

Clearances Information on clearances is available on the website:

http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/
The following layout is also available 1SDH001301R0001 - Cubicle E1.2-E2.2-E4.2-E6.2

Phase separators (for E2.2- Phase barriers are mandatory for 2ps configuration. For the 4ps configuration it is possible to place isolation
E4.2-E6.2 only) barriers for the segregation of live parts.In addition, the phase separators are mandatory:
• If, between two phases, the minimum distance between the screws that fix the circuit-breaker terminals
to the connection bars is less than 14 mm - 0.55".
• For circuit breakers version IEC >690V and UL >635V.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0810.

169 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Connection to the power circuit The connection of a circuit-breaker to the power circuit is performed using the connection busbars of the
electric switchgear fixed to the terminals of the circuit-breaker. The sizing of the busbars is specified by the
designer of the electrical switchgear.
IMPORTANT: before proceeding with the connection between terminals and connection
busbars:
• Make sure that the contact surfaces of the busbars are free of burrs, dents, traces of
rusting, dust or traces of grease.
• Make sure, if aluminium busbars are used, than they are tin plated in the contact areas.
• Make sure that the busbars do not exert forces in any direction on the terminal.
• Tightening: for E1.2 use M10 screws with resistance class 8.8 equipped with spring
washers and lock them with a torque of 45 Nm - 398.3 lb in
• Tightening: for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 use M12 screws with resistance class 8.8 equipped with
spring washers and lock them with a torque of 70 Nm - 619.5 lb in
IMPORTANT: it is possible to obtain different capacities for the connections by altering
the thickness and number of busbars in parallel.

NOTE: the information on the performances of the circuit-breakers in switchboards is available

on the website:

http://new.abb.com/low-voltage/products/circuit-breakers/emax2.

The connection for the E1.2 circuit-breaker is shown below as swell as the tables with some examples of the
amount and sizes of the connections that can be used for each type of circuit-breaker:

Figure 109 Figure 110

Dimension of busbars (mm)

circuit-breaker IEC 60947 Iu (A)
Horizontal terminals Vertical terminals
E1.2 630 2x40x5 2x40x5
E1.2 800 2x50x5 2x50x5
E1.2 1000 2x50x10 2x50x8
E1.2 1250 2x50x10 2x50x8
E1.2 1600 3x50x8 2x50x10

Dimension of busbars (inches)

circuit-breaker UL 1066 Iu (A)
Horizontal terminals Vertical terminals
E1.2-A 800 2x1/4x2 1x1/4x3
E1.2-A 1200 3x1/4x2 2x1/4x2

Continued on the next page

170 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation

 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

The connection for the E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers is shown below as swell as the tables with some
examples of the amount and sizes of the connections that can be used for each type of circuit-breaker:

Figure 111 IEC Figure 112 UL

Dimension of busbars (mm)

circuit-breaker IEC 60947 Iu (A)
Horizontal terminals Vertical terminals
800 1x50x10 1x50x10
1000 2x50x5 2x50x5
1250 2x50x10 2x50x10
1600 2x60x10 1x100x10
E2.2
3x60x10 2x80x10
2000
3x60x10 (1)
2x80x10 (1)

3x60x10 4x100x5
2500
3x60x10 (1)
4x100x5 (1)

2000 2x80x10 2x80x10

2500 2x100x10 2x100x10
E4.2
3200 3x100x10 3x100x10
4000 4x100x10 4x100x10
4000 4x100x10 4x100x10
E6.2 5000 5x100x10 5x100x10
6300 6x100x10 6x100x10

(1)
values for spread terminals
Dimension of busbars (inches)
circuit-breaker UL 1066 Iu (A)
Horizontal terminals Vertical terminals
4x1/4x2 3x1/4x2
1600
E2.2-A 3x1/4x2.5 2x1/4x3
2000 4x1/4x2.5 4x1/4x2
2000 4x1/4x2.5 4x1/4x2
2500 4x1/4x4 3x1/4x4
E4.2-A
3200 - 4x1/4x4
3600 - 4x1/4x5
4000 4x1/4x5 4x1/4x5
E6.2-A 5000 8x1/4x5 6x1/4x5
6000 - 6x1/4x6

Continued on the next page

171 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation

 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

To optimize the thermal efficiency, it is recommended to adhere to the following installation

guidelines:
• Guarantee the maximum possible distance between the input and output busbars. See the example
Figure 113.
• Guarantee the maximum use of the surface of the terminal. See the example Figure 114.
• Make sure that the distance between the holes and the end of the terminal and between the holes and
extremity of the busbar is the same. See the example Figure 115.
• Make sure that, accordingly to the number of busbars and terminal tangs, the busbars of the lateral phases
are as distant as possible from the busbars of the central phase. See the example Figure 116.

NO
OK
Figure 113

OK

NO
Figure 114
OK

NO

= = ≠ ≠

Figure 115

OK NO

OK NO
Figure 116

172 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 4 - Installation

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

5 - Technical characteristics

Protection degree SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers guarantee the following protection degrees:
• IP20 for circuit-breakers in fixed or withdrawable versions, excluding the terminals
• IP30 for the front parts of the circuit-breaker when it is installed in a switchboard with IP30 flange mounted
on the door
• IP54 in circuit-breakers equipped with an optional IP54 transparent flange fitted to the front door of the
switchboard.

Dissipated power To guarantee the performance of the switchgear in terms of uninterrupted rated capacity, the design of the
switchgear must take into account the power dissipated by switchgear and controlgear and by the installed
live parts. Dissipated powers are calculated according to the standard IEC 60947. The values indicated in
the table refer to the total power for each three-phase circuit-breaker with balanced loads with a current flow
equal to the rated uninterrupted current Iu. These power dissipations are measured according to the standard
IEC 60947. The values indicated in the table refer to the total power of the circuit-breakers in three-pole and
four-pole versions with balanced loads and a current flow equal to the rated uninterrupted current Iu at 50/60
Hz.
Dissipated power [W]
Iu E1.2 B/C/N E2.2 B/N/S/H E4.2 N/S/H/V E6.2 H/V/X
F (1)
W (2)
F (1)
W (2)
F (1)
W (2)
F (1) W (2)
630A 31 62
800A 50 100 34 72
1000A 78 156 53 113
1250A 122 244 83 176
1600A 201 400 136 288
2000A 212 450
2500A 267 550
3200A 425 743
4000A 465 900 309 544
5000A 483 850
6300A 767 1350

Dissipated power [W]

E2.2 H/V - A E4.2 L - A
E1.2 E2.2 E4.2 E6.2
Iu E2.2 2000A E4.2 3200A E6.2 L - A
B/N/S - A B/N/S - A S/H/V - A H/V - A
B/N/S - A S/H/V - A
F (1) W (2) F (1) W (2) F (1) W (2) F (1) W (2) F (1) W (2) F (1) W (2) F (1) W (2)
250A 7 14
400A 17 35 15 22 15 22
800A 59 118 48 73 48 68 44 58 42 49
1200A 125 250 100 152 99 138 86 114 81 111
1600A 170 260 167 233 143 189 132 181
2000A 250 350 211 279 193 264
2500A 310 410 280 384
3200A 445 610 323 438
3600A 578 395 536
4000A 476 646 476 646
5000A 700 950 700 950
6000A 1484

(1)
Fisso - Fixed - Fest - Fixe - Fijo
(2)
Estraibile - Withdrawable - Ausfahrbarer - Débrochable - Extraíble

173 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 5 - Technical characteristics
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Derating due to temperature In certain installations, the circuit-breakers could end up operating at a temperature above the reference
temperature (40 °C). In such cases the rated capacity of the circuit-breaker may be reduced. To find out the
percentage of reduction to be applied to the capacity consult the following table:
Emax 2 E1.2 Temperature [°C]
< 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
E1.2 250 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E1.2 630 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E1.2 800 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E1.2 1000 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E1.2 1250 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E1.2 1600 100% 100% 100% 98% 95% 93% 90%

Emax 2 E2.2 Temperature [°C]

< 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
E2.2 250 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E2.2 630 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E2.2 800 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E2.2 1000 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E2.2 1250 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E2.2 1600 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 98%
E2.2 2000 100% 100% 100% 100% 95% 91% 87%
E2.2 2500 100% 100% 100% 100% 98% 94% 90%

Emax 2 E4.2 Temperature [°C]

< 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
E4.2 2000 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E4.2 2500 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E4.2 3200 100% 100% 97% 93% 89% 86% 82%
E4.2 4000 100% 100% 94% 90% 86% 83% 80%

Emax 2 E6.2 Temperature [°C]

< 40 45 50 55 60 65 70
E6.2 4000 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 100%
E6.2 5000 100% 100% 100% 100% 100% 98% 95%
E6.2 6300 100% 100% 95% 91% 87% 84% 81%

174 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 5 - Technical characteristics
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Current limiting curve SACE Emax 2 series offer current-limiting circuit-breakers in E1.2 size up to 1600 A. These circuit-breakers
are characterized from the constructional point of view by the following features:
• Dedicated stored energy operating mechanism that reduces opening times.
• Specific main contacts that, by exploiting the electrodynamic forces generated by the short-circuit,
accelerate the opening of the main contacts.

These features enable rapid breaking and consequently reduce the electromechanical and thermal stress
suffered by the installation during a short-circuit. The Current-limiting circuit-breakers are characterized by
short-time withstand currents that are not particularly high and are therefore not suitable for applications
where selectivity towards more downstream devices is required or in case of devices with high inrush currents
in the start-up phase.

E1.2 L - Current-limiting curves E1.2 L - Pass-through specific energy limitation curves

175 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical characteristics | 5 - Technical characteristics
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Accessories

1 - Overview
Introduction All the circuit-breakers have a series of electrical and mechanical accessories that can be applied according
to the circuit-breaker type, and a series of electronic accessories that can be applied according to the type
of Ekip trip unit equipping the circuit-breaker.

Mechanical and electrical The following table shows the possible combinations of the electrical and mechanical accessories for E1.2:
accessories
Switch-
Type of accessory Accessory Circuit-breakers
disconnectors
AUX 4Q S R
AUX 15Q R R
Ekip AUP (1)
R R
Electrical signalling
Ekip RTC R R
S51 S -
S33 M/2 R R
YO (4)
- YC R R
YO2 (4) R R
Electrical control YU (2)(4) R R
M R R
YR R -
KLC - PLC R R
KLP - PLP (1) R R
SL (1) S S
Security mechanical DLC R R
Anti-insertion lock S S
MOC R R
FAIL SAFE (3)
R R
PBC R R
IP54 R R
Protection mechanical
HTC-LTC R R
PB R R
Interlocks MI R R

S: Standard. R: on request.
(1)
For withdrawable version only.
(2)
Incompatible with FAIL SAFE. Can be ordered for UL on request
(3)
Incompatible with YU; standard for UL version.
(4)
A maximum of two accessories are available for YO and YU.

Continued on the next page

176 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Accessories | 1 - Overview

 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

The following table shows the possible combinations of the electrical and mechanical accessories for E2.2-
E4.2-E6.2:

Circuit- Switch- Derived versions

Type of accessory Accessory
breakers disconnectors CS MV MTP
AUX 4Q S R - - -
AUX 6Q R R - - -
AUX 15Q (5) R R - - -
Ekip AUP (1) R R R R R
Electrical signalling
Ekip RTC R R - - -
S51 S - - - -
S51/2 (6) R - - - -
S33 M/2 R R - - -
YO (4) - YC R R - - -
YO2 (4) - YC2 R R - - -
YU (2)(4)
R R - - -
Electrical control
YU2 (2)(4) R R - - -
M R R - - -
YR R - - - -
KLC - PLC R R - - -
KLP - PLP (1)
R R - - R
SL (1) S S - - S
DLR (1)
R R - - R
Security mechanical DLP (1) R R - - R
DLC (5)
R R - - R
Anti-insertion lock S S - - S
MOC R R - - R
FAIL SAFE (3) R R - - R
PBC R R - - R
Protection mechanical
IP54 R R - - R
Interlocks MI (5) R R - - R

S: Standard. R: on request.
(1)
For withdrawable version only.
(2)
Incompatible with FAIL SAFE. Can be ordered for UL on request
(3)
Incompatible with YU; standard for UL version.
(4)
A maximum of two accessories are available for YO and YU.
(5)
Not available for withdrawable circuit-breakers with lateral fastening.
(6)
Incompatible with YR

177 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Accessories | 1 - Overview

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Electronic accessories
The following table shows the possible combinations of the electronic accessories:
Trip units
Type of accessory Accessory Ekip Ekip Ekip G Ekip G
Ekip Dip
Touch Hi-Touch Touch Hi-Touch
Power supply Ekip Supply R R R R R
Ekip Com - R R R R
Ekip Com Redundant - R R R R
Ekip Com Actuator R R R R R
Connectivity
Ekip Link R R R R R
Ekip Signalling Modbus
R R R R R
TCP
Ekip Signalling 2K - R R R R
Ekip Signalling 3T - R R R R
Signal
Ekip Signalling 4K - R R R R
Ekip Signalling 10K R R R R R
Measurement enabler - R - - -
Measurement enabler
- R S S S
with voltage socket
Measurement and Ekip Synchrocheck - R R R R
Protection Rating Plug R R R R R
Toroid S.G.R. - R R R R
Rc Toroid - R R R R
External neutral sensor R R R R R
Ekip Multimeter R R R R R
Display and Supervision
Ekip Control Panel R R R R R
Ekip TT R S S S S
Testing and
Ekip T&P R R R R R
Programming
Ekip Programming R R R R R

S: Standard. R: on request.
NOTE: Ekip Signalling 4K module available for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers.

Wiring diagrams The internal connections of the circuit-breaker, the connections to the external terminal box of all accessories
and all related notes are indicated on the wiring diagrams.
There is one document and it is valid for all SACE Emax 2 CBs, with certain considerations distinguishing the
various models/versions also described on the actual diagrams:
• access to certain connections and accessories in the terminal box differs, depending on whether the
version is fixed or withdrawable
• Emax E1.2 can be fitted with three modules (one Ekip Supply + two other modules); E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 can
be fitted with up to four modules (one Ekip Supply + three other modules)
• Ekip Signalling 4K module: Emax E1.2 does not have the connections for Q5...Q10 / Ekip Signalling 4K

Information about the wiring diagram is available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/

DownloadCenter/, especially in document 1SDM000091R0001.

178 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Accessories | 1 - Overview

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Standard accessories

Accessories for fixed circuit- Fixed version SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers and switch-disconnectors are always supplied with the following
breakers accessories as standard:
• IP30 protection for the switchgear door
• lifting plates for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers
• front terminals for E1.2 circuit-breakers
• orientable rear terminals for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers, mounted in HR – HR position
• screws for mounting in switchboards
In addition, for automatic circuit-breakers only, the following accessories are always supplied:
• four standard open/closed auxiliary contacts - AUX 4Q
• four terminals for the auxiliary connections
• mechanical signalling for protection trip unit tripping - Ekip TU Reset
• Ekip TT power supply and test unit, when a protection unit is present on display
• Ekip protection trip unit tripping signalling contact S51

Accessories for withdrawable Withdrawable version SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers and switch-disconnectors are always supplied with the
circuit-breakers following accessories as standard:
• anti-extraction locking mechanism with the circuit-breaker closed
• lifting plates for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers
• racking-in/racking-out lever
• anti-insertion lock
In addition, for automatic circuit-breakers only, the following accessories are always supplied:
• four standard open/closed auxiliary contacts - AUX 4Q
• four terminals for the auxiliary connections
• mechanical signalling for protection trip unit tripping - Ekip TU Reset
• Ekip TT power supply and test unit, when a protection unit is present on display
The fixed parts of the withdrawable versions are always supplied with:
• IP30 protection for the switchgear door
• anti-insertion lock
• standard shutter lock - SL
• screws for floor mounting
• orientable rear terminals

179 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Accessories | 2 - Standard accessories

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Assembly and disassembly

Mounting The circuit-breaker is supplied with the ordered accessories already assembled. If ordered individually and
separately from the job order of the circuit-breaker, the accessories are supplied with a Kit Sheet describing
all the assembly operations.

Disassembly operations for To dismantle the accessories, the following parts must be removed from the circuit-breaker:
circuit breakers E1.2 • Front cover (A) and protection (F) by removing the screws (B and C).
• For 4-p circuit-breakers, the lateral protection (D) by fixing the screws (C and E).

D B

C
Figure 117 - Removing the front cover and protections

After reassembling the accessories, the parts previously dismantled must be reassembled as indicated:
• Front cover (A) and protection (F) by screwing the fixing screws (B and C) with tightening torque 0.8 Nm
- 7 lb in (B) and 1.5 Nm - 13 lb in (C).
• For 4-p circuit-breakers, the lateral protection (D) by fixing the screws (C and E) with tightening torque
1.5 Nm - 13 lb in.

D B
C

Figure 118 - Assembly of front cover and protections

180 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Accessories | 3 - Assembly and disassembly
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Disassembly operations for To dismantle the accessories, the following parts must be removed from the circuit-breaker:
circuit breakers E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 • Transparent flange (A) of the trip unit, by turning the screws (B).
• Front cover of the circuit-breaker (C), by removing the mounting screws (D).

1
2
C 2
1
90°

A
B

D
Figure 119 - Removing the flange and front cover

After reassembling the accessories, the parts previously dismantled must be reassembled as indicated:
• Front cover of the circuit-breaker (C), by screwing in the mounting screws (D) with tightening torque 1.1
Nm - 9.74 lb in.
• Transparent flange (A) of the trip unit, by turning the screws (B).

C 2
1
2

1
90°

A
B

D
Figure 120 - Assembly of flange and front cover

181 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Accessories | 3 - Assembly and disassembly
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

4 - Introduction to the electronic accessories

Operating conditions Ekip Synchrocheck, Ekip Com and Ekip Signalling function correctly:
• In the presence of auxiliary supply voltage
• With the circuit-breaker in the Racked-in position (if the CB version is withdrawable)
The limitations listed below apply in all the other cases:
Ekip Signalling 2K
Module\ Ekip
Ekip Com Ekip Signalling 3T Ekip Signalling 4K
Condition Synchrocheck
Ekip Signalling 10K
Module power Synchronism Communication: Output contacts:
Output contacts: open
supply absent contact open absent open
CB in Test (1)(2) Synchronism: Communication: Inputs and output Inputs and output
position not available (4) active contacts: available contacts: available
CB in Inputs and output Module power supply
Synchronism: Communication:
DISCONNECTED (1)(3) contacts: partial off (Output contacts::
not available (4) partially active (5)
position available (6) open)

(1)
the description refers to the module when correctly on and with the CB in the indicated position
(2)
in the Test position, the Trip unit is connected to the modules and all information is available on the display or
via external communication
(3)
in the Racked-out position, connection and communication between Trip unit and modules is interrupted.
Information is not available/valid
(4)
due to voltage not connected to the internal sockets
(5)
see System Interface, INFORMATION WITH PROTECTION TRIP UNIT DISCONNECTED section (next page)
(6)
the outputs only function correctly if configured as: input status (of module itself) or non-communication with
Trip unit. For all other configurations, the module forces the Outputs as per Contact Type parameter (NO, NC).

System Interface Document 1SDH001140R0001.zip, describing how to use the Ekip Com communication modules correctly,
is available in ABB library; the file contains:
Document Description
Guidelines with details about how to put the communication modules into
1SDH001140R0001.pdf
service, with reference to the protocols and supporting documents
Table with the references of all the registers for parameters, controls,
1SDH001140R0001.xlsx
measurements, etc.

The .zip file contains the files for supplementing Ekip Touch in the available communication networks, with the
specific Ekip Com module and an IMPORTANT file with notes on how to use the files:
File (1)(2) Protocol / Ekip Com module
ABBS0E7F.gsd + EkiDPB.bmp File .gsd and module image for configuring Ekip Com Profibus DP
Ekip_COM_EtherNetIP_M4_v03_06.eds File .eds for configuring Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM
Ekip_COM_DeviceNet_v02_08.eds File .eds for configuring Ekip Com DeviceNet TM
ABBEC0304_Ed1.icd
File .icd for configuring Ekip Com IEC 61850
ABBEC0304_Ed2.icd
GSDML-V2.3-ABB S.p.A.-Ekip Com
File .xml for configuring Ekip Com Profinet
Profinet-20180823.xml

(1)
The files are also valid for the respective Redundant versions.
(2)
Check the Firmware version of your module so as to choose the file with the correct configuration.

182 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Accessories | 4 - Introduction to the electronic accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Internal electronic accessories

1 - Rating Plug

The Rating Plug, supplied with the trip unit establishes the rated current In required by the measuring range
and for setting the current protections (with reference to In).
It is installed on a dedicated front connector which can be accessed by the user.
The trip unit continuously checks for the presence of the Rating Plug and signals its absence or any assembly
or installation errors.
If a new model is installed, the Trip unit displays the request for installation when first powered.
In Ekip Touch, field Nom.Curr in the About-Circuit breaker menu displays the In quantity read by the unit.

Versions Various models of different sizes are available and can be ordered in three versions: a classic version, a
version which activates Rc protection and one that deactivates L protection; the three versions have different
labels:

Figure 121

IMPORTANT: the Rating plug labels have a black background; if the colour is different,
they may be incompatible with the trip units described in this document: consult
ABB for assistance

Replacement The module can be replaced by the user; any Rating Plug with maximum rated current equal to the nominal
size of the CB (Iu) can be installed.
WARNING!

• with Iu ≤ 400 A size circuit-breakers, Rating Plugs from 100 A to the Iu size of the CB
can be installed
• with Iu > 400 A size circuit-breakers, Rating Plugs from 400 A to the Iu size of the CB
can be installed
Further details about assembly and the Rating Plug installation procedure are available in ABB Library,
particularly in document 1SDH001000R0510.
IMPORTANT: to avoid alarms or undesired trips, the Rating Plug must be replaced
when Trip unit is off, the CB open and in the absence of primary currents and
voltages

183 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Internal electronic accessories | 1 - Rating Plug
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Measurement

Presentation Two Measurement modules are available:

• Measurement enabler installed by default on Ekip Touch and enabled in the presence of the Measuring
Measurements package (enabling can be obtained both at the time the circuit-breaker is ordered or at a
later date, via Market Place)
• Measurement enabler with voltage socket is installed by default on Ekip Hi-Touch, Ekip G Touch and Ekip
G Hi-Touch; can be installed in conjunction with Ekip Touch if requested when circuit-breaker is ordered
Both modules measure voltages, frequencies, power and energy values; in addition, the Measurement
enabler with voltage socket module allows:
• the Trip unit to be supplied directly by the voltage sockets to which it is connected
• management of the synchronism function when the Ekip Synchrocheck module is installed (see chapter
dedicated to Ekip Synchrocheck from page 223).

Measurement performance The measurement performance provided when the Measurement modules are installed (described on page
114), are more accurate when the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package is present (described on page
117.

Configurations available Both modules can be ordered with different connection configurations:
• connections to internal terminals or in an external terminal box
• connections to the upper or lower terminals of the poles on the basis of the expected power flow
• with normal or reverse pole order
For full details about ordering and the connections, consult technical catalog 1SDC200023D0906 and the
wiring diagrams 1SDM000091R0001.

Electrical characteristics The Measurement modules function correctly in the electrical conditions described on page 17.
Installations with up to 1150 VAC line-to-line voltage can be connected and configured in the presence of
connections to external sockets and an isolation transformer.

Isolation transformer The isolation transformer must conform to standard IEC 60255-27 and possess the following characteristics:

Characteristics Description
• Accuracy class: ≤ 0,2
• Performance: ≥ 10 VA
• Overload: 20 % permanent
• Insulations: 4 kV between inputs and outputs, 4 kV between shield and
Electrical
outputs, 4 kV between shield and inputs
• Frequency: Fn +-10%
• Primary voltage: 100 to 1150 V (nominal, to be configured via menu)
• Secondary voltage: 100 to 230 V (nominal, to be configured via menu)

184 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Internal electronic accessories | 2 - Measurement
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Menu The specific configuration area will activate in the Settings - Modules - Ekip Measuring menu if the Measurement
module is detected correctly by Ekip Touch.
The following parameters can be configured in this menu:
Parameter Description Default
Voltage Transf. Selects the presence or absence of the external transformer Absent
Available in the absence of a transformer; defines rated voltage Un.
Rated voltage The value is given as absolute value (Volts) and can be set within 400 V
the range: 100 V to 690 V with variable steps.
Available in the presence of a transformer; defines rated voltage Un
of the installation.
Primary voltage 400 V
The value is given as absolute value (Volts) and can be set within
the range: 100 V to 1150 V with variable steps.
Available in the presence of a transformer; defines the secondary
voltage of the transformer.
Secondary voltage 100 V
The value is given as absolute value (Volts) and can be set within
the range: 100 V to 230 V with variable steps.
Defines the power flow required for D protection; there are 2
options available (page 73):
Positive Power flow • High → Low: the power flows from the low terminals to the high High → Low
ones (load connected low)
• Low → High: opposite power flow (load connected high)
Available with 3P CB; allows the presence of the external Neutral
to be enabled.
Neutral connection Absent
NOTE: presence of the neutral activates phase voltage
measurement

About The About-Modules menu contains the specific menu of the module with the serial number and version of
the module itself.

Test The Measurement module must be disconnected from Ekip Touch (according to the procedure available on
the front label) and the external sockets must be disconnected from the terminal box in the following cases:
Module Measurement enabler
Test Module Measurement enabler (1)
with voltage sockets
Dielectric test x
Isolation between phases x x

(1)
disconnection to be performed also in the presence of Ekip Touch without Measuring package

Replacement The Measurement module can be replaced on its Trip unit, for details consult document 1SDH001000R0528.
If the Measurement module is replaced, module change is indicated on the display by an alarm in the
diagnosis bar when the apparatus is powered for the first time.
To install the new module:
• Confirm the installation module which appears automatically on the display
• Execute manual control, available in the Settings menu (page46)
WARNING! if the Class 1 Power & Energy Metering package is present, module
replacement could impair the performance values indicated on page 117; consult
ABB to assess solutions able to comply with your requirements

185 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Internal electronic accessories | 2 - Measurement
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Ekip Signalling 4K

Ekip Signalling 4K is an accessory signaling module allowing programmable inputs/outputs to be managed.

This module has:
• four outputs and relative state led: O 01, O 02, O 03, O 04
• four digital inputs and relative state led: I 01, I 02, I 03, I 04
• a Power led with the startup status of the module

The module can be installed on Emax 2 E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers equipped with Ekip Touch trip unit.
NOTE: Ekip Signalling 4K can be installed on circuit-breakers in which AUX 6Q contacts are
not present

Connections The module connects directly to the Mainboard, in the dedicated slot on the left-hand side of the display;
the outputs and inputs of the module can be accessed from the upper terminal box of the circuit-breaker.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0516.
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001.

Power supply Ekip Signalling 4K functions with Ekip Touch energized by auxiliary supply, with Ekip Supply or direct power
supply, or via the Measurement enabler with voltage sockets module.
The Power led comes on when the module is activated and functioning.
NOTE: when the module is off, the output contacts are always in the open position and the
state of the inputs is not valid

Output Each output consists of two contacts (O 01: K3-K7; O 02: K4-K8; O 03: K5-K9; O 04: K6-K10), isolated
from the trip unit and other outputs, which have two physical states (contacts open or closed) and provide
the following electrical characteristics:
Characteristics Maximum limit (1)
Maximum switchable voltage 150 VDC / 250 VAC.
2 A @ 30 VDC, 0,8 A @ 50 VDC, 0,2 A @ 150 VDC,
Breaking capacity
4A @ 250 VAC
Dielectric strength between open contacts 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz).
Dielectric strength between each contact and coil 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz).

(1)
data relating to a resistive load

All the outputs are independent and can be programmed so as to activate when one or more events occur
(see Menu on page 187).

Input Each input consists of two contacts (I 01: H1-HC; I 02: H2-HC; I 03: H3-HC; I 04: H4-HC) and has two
physical states: open circuit (> 100 kΩ) and short circuit (< 50 Ω)
All the inputs are independent and can be programmed so that an action or signaling are executed at the time
of a specific change of state (see Menu on page 188).
Ekip Touch interprets the state of each input differently, on the basis of the electrical condition detected and
the configuration of the contact programmed via the (polarity) menu:
Electrical condition Contact configuration (polarity) State detected
Active open ON
Circuit open
Active closed OFF
Active open OFF
Short-circuit
Active closed ON

186 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Internal electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Signalling 4K
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Interface The module has nine signaling leds:

Figure 122

LEDs Description
Power Signals the state of the module (on or off)
Indicate the physical state of the contacts of each output:
O 01, O 02, O 03, O 04 • off: contact open
• on: contact closed
Indicate the physical state of the contacts of each input:
I 01, I 02, I 03, I 04 • off: circuit open
• on: short circuit

Menu The specific configuration area will activate in the Settings-Modules menu if the Ekip Signalling 4K module is
connected correctly to Ekip Touch.
The programming submenus of the inputs and outputs are present inside.

Output parameters All the available outputs enable the following parameters to be configured:

Parameter Description Default

Event which activates the output and changes the state of the contacts.
Different protection proposals, statuses and thresholds are available in the
Signal source None
menu; the Custom mode can be configured via Ekip Connect so as to extend
the solutions and combine several events.
Minimum presence of Source for output activation; the Delay is given in
seconds and can be set within a range between 0 s and 100 s, in 0.01 s steps.
Delay NOTES: 0s
• output will not activate if Source deactivates before Delay has elapsed
• if delay = 0 s Source must still be present for longer than 300 mS
Defines the rest status of the contact with Source not present between either:
Contact Type normally open (NO) and closed (NC). NO
Output activation coincides with the change in state with respect to that of rest.
Allows the output to be managed differently when Source disappears: either
keep contact activated (On) or deactivate it (Off).
Latched (1)
Off
NOTE: if Self-latching = On, the output resets if the module switches off,
or in the case of a module auto test or signal reset command

Continued on the next page

187 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Internal electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Signalling 4K
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Parameter Description Default

If Self-latching = Off, defines the minimum activation time of the output in the
presence of rapid Sources:
• Source duration < Min activ. time = the output remains activated for the
min Activation
duration of the Min activ. time 0 ms
Time (2)
• Source duration < Min activ. time = the output remains activated for as long
as the Source persists
Choose between: 0 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms

(1)
deactivate the self-latchings of the outputs used for Power Controller if the module is used for the Power
Controller function
(2)
the Pulse Mode option will be available as well as those described if the module is used for the Power
Controller function. If selected, the output is maintained active for a fixed time pertaining to the function itself,
regardless of whether the event that activated it persists or not.

Input parameters All the inputs enable the following parameters to be configured:

Parameter Description Default

Defines whether the state of the input is ON when the contacts are open Active
Polarity
(Active open) or short-circuited (Active Closed) closed
Minimum activation and deactivation time of an input enabling a change of
state to be recognized by the trip unit; the Delay is given in seconds and can
be set within a range between 0 s and 100 s, in 0.01 s steps.
Delay NOTES: 0.1 s
• the trip unit will not detect a change of state if it is present for less
than the set Delay
• if Delay = 0 s, the change of state must still be more than 300 mS|ii|

About The About-Modules menu contains the specific area for Ekip Signalling 4K, in which the states of the inputs
(On/Off) and outputs (Open/Closed) are present.

Test The dedicated area in the Test menu is activated if Ekip Signalling 4K is detected correctly by the trip unit.
For details of the test characteristics, please consult page 134.

Commands and functions If Self-latching = On, the activated output contacts can be reset with:
• automatic command RESET signaling, which can be programmed in the Settings-Modules-Functions
menu of Ekip Touch or via Ekip Connect
• manual command via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via system bus communication

188 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Internal electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Signalling 4K
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

4 - Ekip LCD

The LCD version of the protection trip unit can be requested for installations in particularly aggressive
environments (low temperatures, high degree of humidity, dust or chemical substances). The LCD version
differs from the version with touchscreen display in:
• Black and white LCD display.
• Menu navigation by buttons.
• The HOME button provides direct access to the page Menu. The Measurements pages can be accessed
using the ARROW UP and ARROW DOWN buttons from the page Histograms. (Main Page and Measuring
Instruments area are not available).
All the protection, measurement and accessory options are the same as those of the touchscreen version.

189 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Internal electronic accessories | 4 - Ekip LCD
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

External electronic accessories

1 - Ekip Supply

Ekip Supply is an accessory supply module. It is available in two models, depending on the incoming voltage
to be provided.
It performs three functions:
• supplies auxiliary power to Ekip Touch
• allows the terminal box modules to be supplied and connected to Ekip Touch
• acts as a bridge for the Local Bus between Ekip Touch and the external electronic accessories (e.g. Ekip
Signalling 10K and Ekip Multimeter)
The module has a Power led to signal the presence of incoming power supply:
• off: no supply
• on (steady): supply present

Electrical characteristics Ekip Supply Ekip Supply

Model
24-48VDC 110-240 VAC/DC
Power supply voltages 21,5 ÷ 53 VDC 105 ÷ 265 VAC/DC
Frequency -- 45 ÷ 66Hz
Maximum power consumption without modules (1)
3W 3 VA/W
Maximum power consumption with modules (2) 10 W 10 VA/W
Maximum inrush current 2 A for 20 ms 2 A for 20 ms

(1)
Ekip Touch with just Ekip Supply
(2)
Ekip Touch with three modules connected with Ekip Cartridge

Connections The module must be assembled in the first slot of the terminal box on the circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on
the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; use
AWG 22-16 cables with 1.4 mm maximum outer diameter for the external cabling.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0511.

190 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 1 - Ekip Supply
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Ekip Com Modbus RTU

Ekip Com Modbus RTU is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an RS-
485 network with Modbus RTU communication protocol, remote supervision and monitoring functions, in two
different modes, master and slave.
You can perform the following operations remotely:
• read Ekip Touch measurements and information
• manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator
• access information and parameters not available on the display
• If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if
Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)

Ekip Com Modbus RTU is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234.
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the
required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182).

Models Two different modules compatible with the Modbus RTU protocol are available: Ekip Com Modbus RTU and
Ekip Com Modbus RTU Redundant.
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus,
cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for
both models

The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit
(e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The
configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com Modbus RTU Redundant)

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
To connect the module to its communication network and for references about the terminals, please consult
document 1SDM000091R0001; use Belden 3105A type cables or equivalent for the external cabling.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0512.

Power supply Ekip Com Modbus RTU is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

191 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 2 - Ekip Com Modbus RTU
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

Figure 123

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and
Power
communication with Trip unit present.
• flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second):
module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the status of the communication between network master and module (slave):
Rx • off: Modbus RTU communication not activated
• on with fast flashes: Modbus RTU communication activated
Indicates the status of the communication between network master and module (slave):
Tx • off: communication between Modbus RTU not activated
• on with fast flashes: Modbus RTU communication activated

Configurations

ON

1 2 3 4

Figure 124

Resistor Dip Description Default

120 Ω termination resistor
Rterm 1 and 2 Off
Move dip-switches 1 and 2 to the ON position to connect Rterm
220 Ω pull-up or pull-down resistor
Rpol 3 and 4 Off
Move dip-switches 3 and 4 to the ON position to connect Rpol

IMPORTANT: move the dip-switches before connecting the module to Ekip Supply
and the communication network

192 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 2 - Ekip Com Modbus RTU
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is
available in the Settings menu (page 130).
Two areas are activated if Ekip Touch detects the module correctly:
• information area in the About-Modules menu, containing the software version and serial number of the module
• specific configuration area in the Settings-Modules menu, where the following communication parameters
can be configured
Parameter Description Default
Module address; 1 to 247 range available
Serial address IMPORTANT: devices connected to the same network must 247 / 246 (1)
have different addresses
Data transmission speed; 3 options are available: 9600 bit/s, 19200
Baudrate 19200 bit/s
bit/s, 38400 bit/s
Defines the stop and parity bit; 4 options are available:
• 8,E,1 = 8 data bits, 1 EVEN parity bit, 1 STOP bit
Physical
• 8,O,1 = 8 data bits, 1 ODD parity bit, 1 STOP bit 8,E,1
protocol
• 8,N,2 = 8 data bits, no parity bit, 2 STOP bits
• 8,N,1 = 8 data bits, no parity bit, 1 STOP bit

(1)
247 default of the Ekip Com Modbus RTU module; 246 default of the Ekip Com Modbus RTU Redundant
module

Remote configurations The operating configuration can be changed from slave to master via the service connector (via Ekip Connect)
or via system bus communication so as to integrate the module into an interactive data exchange network
(see description of Ekip Com Hub, page 216).
IMPORTANT:

• In the Master configuration, the module does not allow data exchange as in the normal
Slave function
• the presence of several masters in the same network can cause faulty operation

Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service
connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot
version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).

193 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 2 - Ekip Com Modbus RTU
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Ekip Com Profibus DP

Ekip Com Profibus DP is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an RS-
485 network with Profibus communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring functions.
The module is configured as a Slave and remotely, you can:
• read Ekip Touch measurements and information
• manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator (MOE-E)
• access information not available on the display
• If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if
Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)

Ekip Com Profibus DP is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the
required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182).

Models Two different modules compatible with the Profibus protocol are available: Ekip Com Profibus DP and Ekip
Com Profibus DP Redundant
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus,
cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for
both models

The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit
(e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The
configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com Profibus DP Redundant)

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; use
Belden 3079A type cables or equivalent for the external cabling.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0512.

Power supply Ekip Com Profibus DP is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

Figure 125

Continued on the next page

194 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Com Profibus DP
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and
Power
communication with Trip unit present.
• flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second):
module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the status of the communication between network master and module (slave):
Rx • off: communication between master and module not activated
• on steady: communication between master and module activated
Indicates the status of the communication between network master and module (slave):
Tx • off: communication between master and module not activated
• on flashing: communication between master and module activated

Configurations Resistors can be connected to the RS-485 bus by configuring the dip-switches at the side of the module:

ON

1 2 3 4

Figure 126

Resistor Dip Description Default

220 Ω termination resistor
Rterm 1 and 2 Off
Move dip-switches 1 and 2 to the ON position to connect Rterm
390 Ω pull-up or pull-down resistor
Rpol 3 and 4 Off
Move dip-switches 3 and 4 to the ON position to connect Rpol

IMPORTANT: move the dip-switches before connecting the module to Ekip Supply
and the communication network

Menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is
available in the Settings menu (page 46).
Two areas are activated if Ekip Touch detects the module correctly:
• information area in the About - Modules menu, containing the software version and serial number of the
module
• specific configuration area in the Settings - Modules menu, where the following communication parameters
can be configured:
Parameter Description Default
Module address; 1 to 126 range available
Serial address IMPORTANT: devices connected to the same network must 125 / 124 (1)
have different addresses

125 default of the Ekip Com Profibus DP module; 124 default of the Ekip Com Profibus DP
(1)

Redundant module

Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service
connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot
version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).

195 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 3 - Ekip Com Profibus DP
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

4 - Ekip Com DeviceNet TM

Ekip Com DeviceNet TM is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into a CAN
network with DeviceNet TM communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring functions.
The module is configured as a Slave and remotely, you can:
• read Ekip Touch measurements and information
• manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator (MOE-E)
• access information and parameters not available on the display
• If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if
Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)

Ekip Com DeviceNet TM is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the
required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182).

Models Two different modules compatible with the DeviceNet TM protocol are available: Ekip Com DeviceNet TM and
Ekip Com DeviceNet TM Redundant.
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus,
cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for
both models

The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit
(e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The
configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com DeviceNetTM Redundant)

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; use
Belden 3084A type cables or equivalent for the external cabling.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0512.

Power supply Ekip Com DeviceNet TM is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.
To function correctly, the DeviceNet TM bus must be supplied on terminals V+ and V- with a signal of over 12
VDC.
NOTE:

• the ABB PLC with DeviceNet (CM575-DN) communication module provides V+ V- supply
• communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of power
supplies from Ekip Supply and on the supply terminals of the bus

196 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 4 - Ekip Com DeviceNet TM
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

1 2

Figure 127

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and
Power
communication with Trip unit present.
• flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per second):
module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication status on the bus:
Network • off: device off line (with Status led off) (1), or in the error condition (with Status led on)
Status (1) • on steady: device on line, and assigned to a master (operating condition)
• on flashing: device on line, but not assigned to a master (device ready to communicate)
Indicates the communication status on the bus:
Network • Off: no error.
Status (2) • On fixed: device in bus off, or Network Power absent.
• On flashing: I/O connection (cyclic data) in timeout

(1)
the device has not yet sent the Duplicate ID sequence in line

Configurations Resistors can be connected to the CAN bus by configuring the dip-switches at the side of the module:

ON

1 2 3 4

Figure 128

Resistor Dip Description Default

120 Ω termination resistor
Rterm 1 and 2 Off
Move dip-switches 1 and 2 to the ON position to connect Rterm

IMPORTANT:

• move the dip-switches before connecting the module to Ekip Supply and the network
• the termination resistors must never be included in the nodes; inclusion of this capacitance
could lead to a network with improper termination (impedance too high or too low), which could
potentially cause a failure. For example, removal of a node comprising a termination resistor
could lead to network failure
• the termination resistors must never be installed at the end of a drop line but only at the ends
of the main trunk line

197 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 4 - Ekip Com DeviceNet TM
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is
available in the Settings menu (page 46).
Two areas are activated if Ekip Touch detects the module correctly:
• information area in the About - Modules menu, containing the software version and serial number of the
module
• specific configuration area in the Settings - Modules menu, where the following communication parameters
can be configured:
Parameter Description Default
Module address; 1 to 63 range available
MAC Address IMPORTANT: devices connected to the same network must 63 / 62 (1)
have different addresses
Data transmission speed; 3 options are available: 125 kbit/s, 250
Baudrate 125 kbit/s
kbit/s, 500 kbit/s

(1)
63 default of the Ekip Com DeviceNet TM module; 62 default of the Ekip Com DeviceNet TM Redundant
module

Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Parameter Description Default
Class ID Defines the addressing class of the module, either 8 or 16 bits. 8-bit Class ID
Defines the behavior of the module following loss of communication
Bus-Off (Bus-Off), with a choice between Standard (supply reset is awaited DeviceNet
Behavior if the communication is lost) and Advanced (the module attempts to standard
reset itself if it detects the error status).

Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service
connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot
version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).

198 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 4 - Ekip Com DeviceNet TM
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP

Ekip Com Modbus TCP is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an
Ethernet network with Modbus TCP communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring
functions.
The module is configured as master and remotely, you can:
• read Ekip Touch measurements and information
• manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator (MOE-E)
• access information and parameters not available on the display
• If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if
Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)

Ekip Com Modbus TCP is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the
required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182).
Depending on the parameter settings, described in the next pages, the ports used by the module are:
Port Service Notes
502/tcp Modbus TCP Valid for the Modbus TCP mode
319/udp
IEEE 1588 Valid with IEEE 1588 protocol enabled
20/udp
68/udp DHCP client DHCP client enabled alternatively as: Static address = On

Safety and cyber security Since the module allows the actuator connected to Ekip Touch and access to the data in the unit to be
checked, it can only be connected to networks equipped with all the necessary security and prevention
measures against unauthorized access (for example, the network of the control system of an installation).
IMPORTANT:

• it is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure

connection between the module and customer network or any other network (as the
case may be). The plant manager must establish and maintain appropriate measures
(such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication
measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the
product, the network, the customer system and interface against any kind of security
breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or
information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to
such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or
theft of data or information.
• The module cannot be connected directly to the Internet. Only connect to dedicated
Ethernet networks with Modbus TCP communication protocol

Models Two different modules compatible with the Modbus TCP protocol are available: Ekip Com Modbus TCP and
Ekip Com Modbus TCP Redundant.
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus,
cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for
both models

The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit
(e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The
configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com Modbus TCP Redundant)

199 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable
of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.

Power supply Ekip Com Modbus TCP is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

2 1

Figure 129

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and
Power
communication with Trip unit present.
• flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per
second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state:
Link (1) • off: incorrect connection, signal absent.
• on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state:
Activity (2) • off: no activity on line
• flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)

200 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Configurations via menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is
available in the Settings menu (page 127).
The following communication parameters can be configured if the module has been correctly detected by
Ekip Touch in the Settings-Modules menu:
Parameter Description Default
Defines whether the module has the dynamic (Off) or static (On) IP
Static IP
address. Off
address ON
Se = On all the associated parameters are enabled
Static address
Enables the static IP to be selected 0.0.0.0
IP address
Static Network
Enables the subnet mask to be selected 0.0.0.0
Mask
Static Gateway When there are several subnets, enables the IP address of the node to
0.0.0.0
address which the module is connected to be selected

Information in menu The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module
correctly:
About Description
SN and version Identifier and SW version of the module
Address of the module, assigned to the module by a DHCP server at the time of
connection to the network in the case of configuration with a dynamic IP, or can be
IP address xset via the menu in the event of a static IP.
NOTE: without a DHCP server, the module automatically adopts a random IP
address within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range
Subnet mask; identifies the method for recognizing the subnet to which the modules
Network Mask
belong and enables modules to be searched for within a defined set of recipients.
IP address of the node to which the module is connected, in the presence of several
Gateway address
subnets
TCP Client 1, 2, 3 IP addresses of the client devices connected to the module (in the Server mode)
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to
MAC address
ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device

201 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Parameter Description Default
Parameter for changing the configuration of the module from Server
Only to Client and Server and for integrating it into an interactive data
Client/Server exchange network (see Ekip Com Hub on page 216) Server only
IMPORTANT: if Client/Server, the module allows data
exchange like a normal Server function
IEEE 1588 Allows the IEEE 1588 protocol for distribution of the clock and
OFF
enable synchronization signal to be enabled (1).
Master IEEE Enables the module to be set up as a master in the the network
OFF
1588 segment to which it belongs (synchronization clock).
IEEE 1588 delay Allows the data exchange mode between module and master, either
End-to-End
mechanism Peer-to-Peer or End-to-End, to be selected.
SNTP Client Allows the SNTP protocol for distribution of the clock and
OFF
enable synchronization signal to be enabled (1)
Force Static IP
Allows the network server that supplies the SNTP to be set. 0.0.0.0
Address
Time zone Defines the time zone to be used for synchronism +00:00
Daylight Saving Used to select whether daylight saving time is present (ON) or not
OFF
Time (OFF) in the country to which the synchronization time refers
Permits (Enabled ARP) the periodic generation of a Gratuituos ARP
Disabilita
message, used by Ekip Connect to rapidly find the modules via ARP Enabled
Gratuitos ARP
Ethernet scan without knowing the IP address beforehand
Access
Enables the writing operations performed via the network to be
protected by Standard mode
protected by a password (Request password)
password
Password With access protected by enabled password, this is the password to
Local access
Modbus TCP use before each writing session (2).

(1)
Enable IEEE 1588 and Enable SNTP client must not be enabled at the same time
(2)
the parameter can only be changed via system bus in the remote configuration

Remote information Additional information can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Information Description
Boot and HW version General module information
Flash CRC status e result Information about the correctness of the SW in the module
Stato Ekip Link Signals Ethernet cable connection errors
SNTP Server Error Error in communication with SNTP server
SNTP Server
State of synchronism with SNTP server
Synchronisation
Valid with Master IEEE 1588= ON, notifies the presence (Slave or PTP Master
IEEE 1588 status
Active) or absence (PTP Master but Passive) of the higher level master

202 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 5 - Ekip Com Modbus TCP
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

6 - Ekip Com Profinet

Ekip Com Profinet is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an Ethernet
network with Profinet communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring functions.
The module is configured as master and remotely, you can:
• read Ekip Touch measurements and information
• manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator
• access information not available on the display
• If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if
Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)

Ekip Com Profinet is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the
required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182.
The ports used by the module are:
Ethertype Port Service Notes
0x88CC - LLDP Link Layer Discovery Protocol
0x8892 (Profinet) - Profinet IO Specific for real time communications (RT)
Profinet-cm
0x0802 34964/udp DCE/RPC
(Context manager)

Safety and cyber security Since the module allows the actuator connected to Ekip Touch and access to the data in the unit to be
checked, it can only be connected to networks equipped with all the necessary security and prevention
measures against unauthorized access (for example, the network of the control system of an installation).
IMPORTANT:

• it is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure

connection between the module and customer network or any other network (as the
case may be). The plant manager must establish and maintain appropriate measures
(such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication
measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the
product, the network, the customer system and interface against any kind of security
breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or
information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to
such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or
theft of data or information.
• The module cannot be connected directly to the Internet. Only connect to dedicated
Ethernet networks with Profinet communication protocol

Models Two different modules compatible with the Profinet protocol are available: Ekip Com Profinet and Ekip Com
Profinet Redundant.
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus,
cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for
both models

The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit
(e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The
configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com Profinet Redundant)

203 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 6 - Ekip Com Profinet
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable
of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.

Power supply Ekip Com Profinet is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

2 1

Figure 130

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on and
Power
communication with Trip unit present.
• flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per
second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state:
Link (1) • off: incorrect connection, signal absent.
• on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state:
Activity (2) • off: no activity on line
• flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)

Menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is
available in the Settings menu (page 46).
The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module
correctly:
Information Description
SN and version Identifier and SW version of the module
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to
MAC address
ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device

Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service
connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot
version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).

204 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 6 - Ekip Com Profinet
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

7 - Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM

Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an
Ethernet network with EtherNet/IP TM communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring
functions.
The module is configured as master and remotely, you can:
• read Ekip Touch measurements and information
• manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator
• access information and parameters not available on the display
• If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if
Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration and the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)

Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the
required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182.
Depending on the parameter settings, described in the next pages, the ports used by the module are:
Port Protocol Notes
44818 TCP Encapsulation Protocol (example: ListIdentity, UCMM, CIP Transport Class 3)
44818 UDP 44818 UDP Encapsulation Protocol (example: ListIdentity)
2222 UDP 2222 UDP CIP Transport Class 0 or 1
68/udp DHCP Client DHCP client enabled alternatively as Static address = On

Safety and cyber security Since the module allows the actuator connected to Ekip Touch and access to the data in the unit to be
checked, it can only be connected to networks equipped with all the necessary security and prevention
measures against unauthorized access (for example, the network of the control system of an installation).
IMPORTANT:

• it is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure

connection between the module and customer network or any other network (as the
case may be). The plant manager must establish and maintain appropriate measures
(such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication
measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the
product, the network, the customer system and interface against any kind of security
breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or
information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to
such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or
theft of data or information.
• The module cannot be connected directly to the Internet. Only connect to dedicated
Ethernet networks with EtherNet/IP TM communication protocol

Models Two different modules compatible with the EtherNet/IP TM protocol are available: Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM and
Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TMRedundant.
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus,
cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for
both models

The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit
(e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The
configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM Redundant)

205 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 7 - Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable
of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.

Power supply Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

2 1

Figure 131

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on
Power
and communication with Trip unit present.
• flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per
second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state:
Link (1) • off: incorrect connection, signal absent.
• on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state:
Activity (2) • off: no activity on line
• flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)

Configurations via menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is
available in the Settings menu (page 46).
The following communication parameters can be configured if the module has been correctly detected by
Ekip Touch in the Settings-Modules menu:
Parameter Description Default
Defines whether the module has the dynamic (Off) or static
Static IP address ON (On) IP address. OFF
Se = On all the associated parameters are enabled
Static address IP address Enables the static IP to be selected 0.0.0.0
Static Network Mask Enables the subnet mask to be selected 0.0.0.0
When there are several subnets, enables the IP address of
Static Gateway address 0.0.0.0
the node to which the module is connected to be selected

206 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 7 - Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Information in menu The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module
correctly:
Information Description
SN and version Identifier and SW version of the module
Address of the module, assigned to the module by a DHCP server at the time of
connection to the network in the case of configuration with a dynamic IP, or can be
IP address set via the menu in the event of a static IP.
NOTE: without a DHCP server, the module automatically adopts a random IP
address within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range
Subnet mask; identifies the method for recognizing the subnet to which the modules
Network Mask
belong and enables modules to be searched for within a defined set of recipients.
IP address of the node to which the module is connected, in the presence of several
Gateway address
subnets
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to
MAC address
ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device

Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Parameter Description Default
Enable IEEE Allows the IEEE 1588 protocol for distribution of the clock and
OFF
1558 synchronization signal to be enabled (1).
IEEE 1558 Enables the module to be set up as a master in the the network
OFF
Master segment to which it belongs (synchronization clock).
IEEE 1558 Delay Allows the data exchange mode between module and master, either
End-to-End
mechanism Peer-to-Peer or End-to-End, to be selected.
Enable client Allows the SNTP protocol for distribution of the clock and
OFF
SNTP synchronization signal to be enabled (1)
ANTP Server
Allows the network server that supplies the SNTP to be set. 0.0.0.0
address
Time zone Defines the time zone to be used for synchronism +00:00
Daylight Saving Used to select whether daylight saving time is present (ON) or not
OFF
Time (OFF) in the country to which the synchronization time refers

(1)
Enable IEEE 1588 and Enable SNTP client must not be enabled at the same time

Remote information Additional information can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Information Description
HW and Boot version General module information
Flash CRC status and result Information about the correctness of the SW in the module
Ekip Link status Signals Ethernet cable connection errors
SNTP Server Error Error in communication with SNTP server
SNTP Server Synchronization State of synchronism with SNTP server
Valid with Master IEEE 1588= ON, notifies the presence (Slave or PTP
IEEE 1558 status Master Active) or absence (PTP Master but Passive) of a higher level
master

207 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 7 - Ekip Com EtherNet/IP TM
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850

Ekip Com IEC 61850 is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an Ethernet
network with IEC 61850 communication protocol, with remote supervision and monitoring functions.
The module is configured as master and remotely, you can:
• read Ekip Touch measurements and information
• manage certain controls, including opening and closing the actuator
• access information and parameters not available on the display
• transmit vertical communication (report) to superior supervision systems (SCADA), with statuses and
measurements (re-transmitted whenever and only if they change with respect to the previous report)
• transmit horizontal communication (GOOSE) to other actuator devices (example: medium voltage
circuit-breakers), with all the information about status and measurements normally shared by Ekip Com
communication modules via bus.
• If connected to a withdrawable version of the circuit-breaker, the allows the racked-in/racked-out status
to be detected
NOTE: the remote open and close commands of the circuit-breaker can only be executed if
Ekip Touch is in the Remote configuration the circuit-breaker is equipped with the
Ekip Com Actuator module (page 234)

Ekip Com IEC 61850 is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).
The System Interface document is available for mapping the module in its communication network. All the
required communication and command details are listed in the document (page 182).
The document also describes the configuration files for the IEC 61850 protocol and relative uploading
procedure for assigning the Technical Name and enabling GOOSE messages if required (by setting the
relative MAC Addresses)
Depending on the parameter settings, described in the next pages, the ports used by the module are:
Ethertype Port Protocol
0x0800-IP 102 ISO Transport Service on top of the TCP (RFC 1006)
0x88B8 - GOOSE Messages
0x0800-IP 123 UDP NTP - Network Time Protocol
0x0800-IP 69 UDP TFTP - Trivial File Transfer Protocol

Safety and cyber security The module uses the HTTPS protocol and can be connected to the Internet
Since the module allows the actuator connected to Ekip Touch and access to the data in the unit to be
checked, it can only be connected to networks equipped with all the necessary security and prevention
measures against unauthorized access (for example, the network of the control system of an installation).
IMPORTANT:

• it is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure

connection between the module and customer network or any other network (as the
case may be). The plant manager must establish and maintain appropriate measures
(such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication
measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the
product, the network, the customer system and interface against any kind of security
breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or
information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to
such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or
theft of data or information.
• The module cannot be connected directly to the Internet. Only connect to dedicated
Ethernet networks with IEC 61850 communication protocol

208 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Models Two different modules compatible with the IEC 61850 protocol are available: Ekip Com IEC 61850 and Ekip
Com IEC 61850 Redundant.
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus,
cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for
both models

The two modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of the unit
(e.g. for applications where high grid reliability is required).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The
configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Com IEC 61850 Redundant)

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable
of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.

Power supply Ekip Com IEC 61850 is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

2 1

Figure 132

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on
Power
and communication with Trip unit present.
• flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per
second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state:
Link (1) • off: incorrect connection, signal absent.
• on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state:
Activity (2) • off: no activity on line
• flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)

209 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Configurations via menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is
available in the Settings menu (page 46).
The following communication parameters can be configured if the module has been correctly detected by
Ekip Touch in the Settings-Modules menu:
Parameter Description Default
Defines whether the module has the dynamic (Off) or static (On)
Static IP address ON IP address. OFF
Se = On all the associated parameters are enabled
Static address IP address Enables the static IP to be selected 0.0.0.0
Static Network Mask Enables the subnet mask to be selected 0.0.0.0
When there are several subnets, enables the IP address of the
Static Gateway address 0.0.0.0
node to which the module is connected to be selected
Allows the SNTP protocol for distribution of the clock and
Enable SNTP client OFF
synchronization signal to be enabled.
SNTP Server Addr. Allows the network server that supplies the SNTP to be set. 0.0.0.0

Information in menu The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module
correctly:
Information Description
SN and version Identifier and SW version of the module
Address of the module, assigned to the module by a DHCP server at the time
of connection to the network in the case of configuration with a dynamic IP, or
IP address can be set via the menu in the event of a static IP.
NOTE: without a DHCP server, the module automatically adopts a
random IP address within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range
Subnet mask; identifies the method for recognizing the subnet to which the
Network Mask modules belong and enables modules to be searched for within a defined set
of recipients.
IP address of the node to which the module is connected, in the presence of
Gateway address
several subnets
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to
MAC address
ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device
Cfg file Name of the configuration file uploaded to the modules
Cfg file error Code of the error concerning the configuration file (0 = no error)

210 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Parameter Description Default
Preferred If several configuration files are present, allows file hierarchy between
.cid
configuration file .cid and .iid to be defined
Allows the IEEE 1588 protocol for distribution of the clock and
Enable IEEE 1558 OFF
synchronization signal to be enabled (1).
Enables the module to be set up as a master in the the network
IEEE 1558 Master OFF
segment to which it belongs (synchronization clock).
IEEE 1558 Delay Allows the data exchange mode between module and master, either End-to-
mechanism Peer-to-Peer or End-to-End, to be selected. End
Time zone Defines the time zone to be used for synchronism +00:00
Used to select whether daylight saving time is present (ON) or not
Daylight Saving Time OFF
(OFF) in the country to which the synchronization time refers
Defines the file loading procedure:
• TFTP always On = port open, loading always possible
• TFTP enable required = port normally closed. To start loading, TFTP
TFTP Security level
Enable TFTP must be run at the start of the procedure and Disable always On
TFTP must be run at the end of the procedure (disable not necessary,
security command).
Defines the limitations to remote opening and closing command
execution:
CB Open/CB Close • Standard commands = standard commands (unrestricted) activated Standard
command • CB operate request = standard commands not activated. Use commands
programmable functions YC COMMAND and YO COMMAND, and
Request breaker open (28) and Request breaker close (29) commands
Falg word hex Sets a filter on the selectivity statuses 0

Remote information Additional information can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Information Description
HW and Boot version General module information
Flash CRC status and result Information about the correctness of the SW in the module
Ekip Link status Signals Ethernet cable connection errors
SNTP Server Error Error in communication with SNTP server
SNTP Server Synchronization State of synchronism with SNTP server
Valid with Master IEEE 1588= ON, notifies the presence (Slave or PTP
IEEE 1558 status Master Active) or absence (PTP Master but Passive) of a higher level
master
GOOSE Missing Signals that an expected GOOSE has not been received
Configure Mismatch
Decode Error A GOOSE received does not conform to the expected structure
Sequence number error
Remote programmable statuses Condition (true/false) of the programmable states and information on
(from E to R) selectivity arising from logic defined in the configuration files loaded in
Zone selectivity remote inputs module IEC 61850

211 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip Com IEC 61850
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

9 - Ekip Link

Ekip Link is a communication accessory which allows Ekip Touch to be integrated into an internal Ethernet
network with ABB proprietary protocol.
The following functions can be performed with the remote module:
• Programmable Logic
• Power Controller
• Zone selectivity
To perform these functions, the system units involved must be equipped with their own Ekip Link and for each
of these, the IP addresses of all the other Ekip Link connected must have been entered.
Each devices is defined as an Actor in the Link network.
Each Ekip Link can interface with up to 15 actors, of which up to 12 for the Zone Selectivity function.
The ports used by the module are:
Port Service Notes
18/udp ABB proprietary In the case of rapid exchanges of information among ABB devices
319/udp
IEEE 1588 Valid with IEEE 1588 protocol enabled
320/udp
68/udp DHCP client DHCP client enabled alternatively as Static address = On

Ekip Link is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).

Network The Ekip Link modules must be connected to a dedicated network that includes only Ekip Link and Ethernet
switches for which support for level L2 multicast is declared in the datasheet.
If the network also includes routers, multicast must be enabled and configured in all the level L3 VLAN
interfaces.

Programmable Logic Activation of up to four bits of the Ekip Link can be programmed via the Programmable Logic function, each
bit according to any combination of the status bits of an actor of which the IP address has been entered.
These four bits are indicated as Statuses A B C and D; they are remotely programmable and their value is
transmitted to the device to which Ekip Link is connected

Power Controller Using the Power Controller function, each actor can:
• Acquire the status and control the loads
• Act as master and collect the energy measurements of actors entered as Energy Meters
• Supply energy measurements to actors entered as masters
The state of the loads can be acquired by checking the status of the inputs of the signaling modules
connected to the actors of which the IP Addresses have been entered, while load control can be performed
by programming the outputs.
Remote acquisition of the statuses of the loads and their control can also be performed with Ekip Signalling
10K connected to the network.
Further details about the potential of the function are available in White Paper 1SDC007410G0201 “Load
management with Ekip Power Controller for SACE Emax 2”.

212 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 9 - Ekip Link
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Zone selectivity With the Zone Selecitivity function:

• the IP addresses entered refer to actors with the role of interlock with respect to the current role
• the protections for which selectivity must be actuated by setting a mask, must be selected for each interlock
actor entered. Thus set, the function will now be indicated as logic in the following text so as to distinguish
it from the standard function, now also indicated as hardware in the following text
• thus selected, the protections add to those of the hardware S, I, G, D-Backward and D-Forward
• hardware selectivity only, or both hardware and logic selectivity can be selected
• diagnosis can be set, for each interlock release, to ascertain whether there is consistency between the
hardware and logic selectivity information
• a mask can be set for the purpose of identifying those protections whose received selectivity information
must be re-transmitted, regardless of whether the actor is in the alarm status. The mask is only applicable
to logic selectivity information
For further details about the Zone Selectivity function with Ekip Link, please consult page 90.

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable
of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.

Power supply Ekip Link is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

2 1

Figure 133

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on
Power
and communication with Trip unit present.
• flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per
second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state:
Link (1) • off: incorrect connection, signal absent.
• on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state:
Activity (2) • off: no activity on line
• flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)

213 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 9 - Ekip Link
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Configurations via menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is
available in the Settings menu (page 46).
The following communication parameters can be configured if the module has been correctly detected by
Ekip Touch in the Settings-Modules menu:
Parameter Description Default
Defines whether the module has the dynamic (Off) or static
Static IP address ON (On) IP address. OFF
Se = On all the associated parameters are enabled
Static address IP address Enables the static IP to be selected 0.0.0.0
Static Network Mask Enables the subnet mask to be selected 0.0.0.0
When there are several subnets, enables the IP address of the
Static Gateway address 0.0.0.0
node to which the module is connected to be selected

Information in menu The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module
correctly:
Information Description
SN and version Identifier and SW version of the module
Address of the module, assigned to the module by a DHCP server at the time of
connection to the network in the case of configuration with a dynamic IP, or can be
IP address set via the menu in the event of a static IP.
NOTE: without a DHCP server, the module automatically adopts a random IP
address within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range
Subnet mask; identifies the method for recognizing the subnet to which the
Network Mask modules belong and enables modules to be searched for within a defined set of
recipients.
IP address of the node to which the module is connected, in the presence of
Gateway address
several subnets
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to
MAC address
ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device

Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Parameter Description Default
Parameter for changing the configuration of the module from Server
Only to Client and Server and for integrating it into an interactive
Client/Server data exchange network (see Ekip Com Hub on page216). Server only
IMPORTANT: if Client/Server, the module allows data
exchange like a normal Server function
Allows the IEEE 1588 protocol for distribution of the clock and
Enable IEEE 1558 OFF
synchronization signal to be enabled (1).
Enables the module to be set up as a master in the the network
IEEE 1558 Master OFF
segment to which it belongs (synchronization clock).
IEEE 1558 Delay Allows the data exchange mode between module and master, either
End-to-End
mechanism Peer-to-Peer or End-to-End, to be selected.
Allows the SNTP protocol for distribution of the clock and
Enable client SNTP Off
synchronization signal to be enabled (1)
ANTP Server address Allows the network server that supplies the SNTP to be set. 0.0.0.0
Time zone Defines the time zone to be used for synchronism +00:00
Used to select whether daylight saving time is present (ON) or not
Daylight Saving Time OFF
(OFF) in the country to which the synchronization time refers

Continued on the next page

214 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 9 - Ekip Link
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Parameter Description Default

Permits (Enabled ARP) the periodic generation of a Gratuituos
ARP message, used by Ekip Connect to rapidly find the
Disable Gratuitous ARP ARP Enabled
modules via Ethernet scan without knowing the IP address
beforehand
Password protected Enables the writing operations performed via the network to be Standard
access protected by a password (Request password) mode
With access protected by enabled password, this is the
Password Modbus TCP Local access
password to use before each writing session (2).

(1)
Enable IEEE 1588 and Enable SNTP client must not be enabled at the same time
(2)
the parameter can only be changed via system bus in the remote configuration

Remote Link configurations Regarding the Link functions, the following further parameters are available:

Parameter Description Default

Link Actor (1÷15) IP address of each actor (from 1 to 15) 0.0.0.0
Configuration parameters of the configurable states:
• selection of actor (actor from 1 to 15) which activates the
Remote Programmable Actor 1
programmable status
Status (A÷D) None
• event of the actor that determines change of programmable
status
Configuration parameters of the words:
Remote Status word • selection of actor (actor from 1 to 15) from which the word None
(A÷D) status is taken 1 global
• selection of the taken word
Active (Passive diagnosis) or deactivated (No diagnosis) cabled
Diagnostic No Diagnostic
selectivity diagnosis
30 s, 1 min, 10 min, 60 min diagnosis frequency intervals
Diagnostic check timeout 30 seconds
available, if activated
Configuration of hardware selectivity (Only HW) or hardware
Zone Selectivity Type HW only
and logic (Mixed)
Repeat Configuration Interactive mask for selecting selectivity to be sent also to the
0x0000
mask upper levels (even if not active in the programmed device)

Remote information Additional information can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Information Description
HW and Boot version General module information
Flash CRC status and
Information about the correctness of the SW in the module
result
Ekip Link status Signals Ethernet cable connection errors
SNTP Server Error Error in communication with SNTP server
SNTP Server
State of synchronism with SNTP server
Synchronization
Valid with Master IEEE 1588= ON, notifies the presence (Slave or PTP Master
IEEE 1558 status
Active) or absence (PTP Master but Passive) of a higher level master

Remote Link information Regarding the Link functions, the following further parameters are available:

Information Description
Information about the state and inconsistency of HW and logic
Line Congruency detection
selectivity (state and type of selectivity inconsistent)
Remote Programmable Status Status (true/false) of remote programmable statuses A, B, C and D
Remote Status Word Value of remote programmable Words A, B, C, D
Logic Zone Selectivity Logic selectivity states (inputs and outputs)

215 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 9 - Ekip Link
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

10 - Ekip Com Hub

Ekip Com Hub is a communication accessory that enables the data and measurements of Ekip Touch and
other devices connected to the same installation to be gathered and then made available on the server
through an Ethernet network.
The configuration of the module is available via Ekip Connect or with the System Interface document, which
contains all the details. (page 182).
The ports used by the module are:
Port Service Notes
67/udp 68/udp DHCP client DHCP client enabled alternatively as Static address = On
443/tcp HTTPS Always active when module is enabled
123/udp SNTP Active with SNTP client enabled
53/udp DNS Always active

The Ekip Com Modbus RTU and Ekip Com Modbus TCP modules can be configured to support Ekip Com
Hub in the collection of data to send to Cloud. See Getting Started 1SDC200063B0201.
Ekip Com Hub is always supplied with contacts Ekip AUP and Ekip RTC (page 234).

Safety and cyber security The module uses the HTTPS protocol and can be connected to the Internet

IMPORTANT:

• it is the customer's sole responsibility to provide and continuously ensure a secure

connection between the module and customer network or any other network (as the
case may be). The plant manager must establish and maintain appropriate measures
(such as but not limited to the installation of firewalls, application of authentication
measures, encryption of data, installation of antivirus programs, etc.) to protect the
product, the network, the customer system and interface against any kind of security
breaches, unauthorized access, interference, intrusion, loss and/or theft of data or
information. ABB and its affiliates are not liable for damages and/or losses related to
such security breaches, unauthorized accesses, interference, intrusion, loss and/or
theft of data or information.

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; a cable
of the Class 6 S/FTP type (Class 6 with double screening S/FTP) must be used for the communication bus.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0514.

Power supply Ekip Com Hub is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

216 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 10 - Ekip Com Hub
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

2 1

Figure 134

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module
Power
on and communication with Trip unit present.
• flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per
second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicates the communication state:
Link (1) • off: incorrect connection, signal absent.
• on steady: connection correct
Indicates the communication state:
Activity (2) • off: no activity on line
• flashing: activity on line present (receiving and/or transmitting)

Configurations via menu Local bus activation, which is essential for starting the communication between module and Ekip Touch, is
available in the Settings menu (page 46).
The following communication parameters can be configured if the module has been correctly detected by
Ekip Touch in the Settings-Modules menu:
Parameter Description Default
Enable Switches communication between module and server on/off.
Defines whether the module has the dynamic (Off) or static (On)
Static IP address ON IP address. Off
If = On all the associated parameters are enabled
Static address IP address Enables the static IP to be selected 0.0.0.0
Static Network Mask Enables the subnet mask to be selected 0.0.0.0
When there are several subnets, enables the IP address of the
Static Gateway address 0.0.0.0
node to which the module is connected to be selected
Allows the SNTP protocol for distribution of the clock and
Enable SNTP client Off
synchronization signal to be enabled.
SNTP Server Addr. Allows the network server that supplies the SNTP to be set. 0.0.0.0
Password code required to register module on Cloud ---
Enables the firmware of the module to be updated. There are two
parameters: Off
Remote firmware update
• Enable, to configure firmware download Automatic
• Automatic, to automate module updating

217 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 10 - Ekip Com Hub
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Information in menu The following information will be available in the About-Modules menu if Ekip Touch has detected the module
correctly:
Information Description
SN and version Identifier and SW version of the module
Address of the module, assigned to the module by a DHCP server at the time of
connection to the network in the case of configuration with a dynamic IP, or can be
IP address set via the menu in the event of a static IP.
NOTE: without a DHCP server, the module automatically adopts a random IP
address within the 169.254.xxx.xxx range
Subnet mask; identifies the method for recognizing the subnet to which the modules
Network Mask
belong and enables modules to be searched for within a defined set of recipients.
IP address of the node to which the module is connected, in the presence of several
Gateway address
subnets
Address assigned by ABB, with OUI (Organizationally Unique Identifier) equal to
MAC address
ac:d3:64, which uniquely identifies the manufacturer of an Ethernet device

Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Parameter Description Default
Allows the CRL (Certificate Revocation List) to be used to ascertain
CRL Enable
whether the server certificate is valid
Clock update
hardening Enables control of the time reference transmitted by the SNTP server
enable
SNTP Server Enables the position of the SNTP server to be set in relation to the
Location network in which the module is installed
SNTP Time zone Defines the time zone to be used for synchronism +00:00
SNTP Daylight Used to select whether daylight saving time is present (ON) or not
OFF
Saving Time (OFF) in the country to which the synchronization time refers
Permits (Enabled ARP) the periodic generation of a Gratuituos ARP
Disable
message, used by Ekip Connect to rapidly find the modules via ARP Enabled
Gratuitous ARP
Ethernet scan without knowing the IP address beforehand

218 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 10 - Ekip Com Hub
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Remote information Additional information can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Information Description
HW and Boot version General module information
Flash CRC status and result Information about the correctness of the SW in the module
Publish enable configuration State of enabling in Security File
Name of the file dedicated to the information to transmit
Configuration file
(measurements, etc.)
Name of the file dedicated to the information requested by the module
Security file
for transmission purposes (addresses, certificates, etc.)
Certificate Revocation List Name of the file containing the revoked certificates
Executable file Name of the executable firmware update file
Configuration error Module configuration error state
Sample time Period of data acquisition from the connected devices
Log time Period within which the acquired data are saved in the log
Upload time Period (calculated by the module) between each data transmission
Configured device Number of modules involved in the network with Hub module
Polling period API events Period in which the module communicates with the API device
Connection client 1, 2, 3 Address of TCP modbus clients connected to the module
Recordings of the latest saving operations and percentage of
Statistics
resources being used
Information about the quality of the communication with the other
Status plant side
devices
State of the errors concerning the TLS session established between
Status Cloud side
module and server
Application status Operation progress indicators
General indicators of the module: SNTP status, flash, cable
Status
connection, FW availability, file errors, etc.

219 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 10 - Ekip Com Hub
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

11 - Ekip Signalling 2K

Ekip Signalling 2K is an accessory signaling module allowing programmable inputs/outputs to be managed.

This module has:
• two contacts for output signals and relative status led
• two digital inputs and relative status led
• a Power led with the startup status of the module

Models Three different Signalling 2K modules are available: Ekip Signalling 2K-1, Ekip Signalling 2K-2 and RELT - Ekip
Signalling 2K-3.
The modules are identical in terms of characteristics and installation methods, except for: display menus,
cabling and addresses for system communication, which are specific for each module.
NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for all
three models

Two of the three modules can be connected at the same time to Ekip Touch so as to expand the potential of
the unit (e.g. to increase the number of control outputs and inputs).
IMPORTANT: each Ekip Touch can be fitted with only one module per type. The
configuration with two or three modules of the same model is not allowed
(example: two Ekip Signalling 2K-1 modules)

RELT - Ekip Signalling 2K-3

The RELT - Ekip Signalling 2k-3 module has a dedicated command (RELT Wizard) for auto-programming
a set of trip unit parameters; The wizard ensures the activation of the 2I protection when the input of the
RELT – Ekip Signalling 2k-3 module active. In addition, the 2I is placed in local model and the RELT module’s
outputs are activated.
Below is a complete list of the parameters configured by the command:
Parameter Configuration from RELT Wizard command Page
2I Protection (1) On; Threshold I31 = 1,5 In 59
Delay = 100 ms; Activation = depentent function;
2I Protection Function 59, 89
Function = RELT - Ekip Signalling 2K-3 Input 1 (I31)
Input I31 (RELT - Ekip
Polarity = active closed; Delay = 0,1 s 221, 222
Signalling 2K-3)
Output O31 and O32 Signal source = 2I protection active; Delay = 0 s; Contact
222
(RELT - Ekip Signalling 2K-3) type = NO; Self-latching = OFF; min Activation Time = 0 ms
SwitchOnLocal Function Function = 2I protection active; Delay = 0 s 89

(1)
if Dual set is present, programming performed for both Set A and Set B
The RELT setup Wizard can be found in the 2I protection menu and also the first time the trip unit is switched
ON.
In the case that the wizard is not executed (or is rejected during the initial trip unit start up), the functionality
and the characteristic of the RELT – Ekip Signalling 2k-3 module will be as described in the following pages.
NOTE: The input is able to operate with a maximum input resistance of 25 Ohm. Wiring
distance limitation have to be calculated from this value. As example: considering an
AWG20 cable with 29.5 Ohm/km and a microswitch with a resistance of few milliohm (negligible
for the calculation) the limitation is: 25 (Ohm)/29.5 (Ohm/km)/2wires=0.423 km=423mt

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001 and
1SDM000019A1002; use AWG 22-16 cables with 1.4 mm maximum outer diameter for the external cabling.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0524.

220 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 11 - Ekip Signalling 2K
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Power supply Ekip Com Signalling 2K is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

Input Ekip Touch can be configured so that the status of the inputs corresponds to actions or signals, with different
programming options (page 222).
The connection of each input (H11 and H12 for model 2K-1, H21 and H22 for model 2K-2, H31 and H32 for
model 2K-3) must be made with reference to the common contacts (HC).
The module permits two logic statuses, interpreted differently by Ekip Touch depending on the configuration
selected for each contact:
State Electrical condition Contact configuration Status detected by Trip unit
Active open ON
Open Circuit open
Active closed OFF
Active open OFF
Closed Short-circuit
Active closed ON

Output Ekip Touch can be configured so that the contacts of each output are closed or opened upon the occurrence
of one or more events, with different programming options (page 222).
The output of each module consists of 2 contacts (K11-K12 and K13-K14 for model 2K-1; K21-K22 and
K23-K24 for model 2K-2; K31-K32 and K33-K34 for model 2K-3), which are isolated from the unit and from
the other outputs, and have the following electrical characteristics:
Characteristics Maximum limit (1)
Maximum switchable voltage 150 VDC / 250 VAC
2 A @ 30 VDC, 0,8 A @ 50 VDC, 0,2 A @ 150 VDC,
Breaking capacity
4A @ 250 VAC
Dielectric strength between open contacts 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz).
Dielectric strength between each contact and coil 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz).

(1)
data relating to a resistive load

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

Figure 135

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on
Power
and communication with Trip unit present.
• flashing not synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch (2 fast flashes per
second): module on and communication with Trip unit absent.
Indicate the status of the contacts of each output:
I 11, I 12 • off: contact open
• on: contact closed
Indicate the status of the contacts of each input:
O 11, O 12 • off: circuit open
• on: short circuit

221 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 11 - Ekip Signalling 2K
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Menu The specific configuration area will activate in the Settings - Modules menu if the Ekip Signalling 2K module
is detected correctly by Ekip Touch.
A specific menu containing the submenus of all the available and configurable inputs and outputs is available
for each Ekip Signalling 2K module detected by Ekip Touch.

Input parameters All the available inputs enable the following parameters to be configured:

Parameter Description Default

Defines whether the input is interpreted as ON by Ekip Touch when it is open Active
Polarity
(Active open) or when it is closed (Active Closed) closed
Minimum activation time of the input before status change is recognized; the
delay is given in seconds and can be set within range: 0 s to 100 s, in 0.01 s
steps
Delay NOTES: 0.1 s
• if the input is deactivated before this time has elapsed the status
change is not recognized
• if delay = 0 s status change must still be more than 300 µS

Output parameters All the available inputs enable the following parameters to be configured:

Parameter Description Default

Event which activates the output and switches the contacts.
Different protection proposals, statuses and thresholds are available on the
Signal source None
display; the Custom mode can be configured via Ekip Connect so as to
extend the solutions and combine several events
Minimum duration of the presence of the source before the output is
activated; the delay is given in seconds and can be set within range: 0 s to
100 s, in 0.01 s steps
Delay NOTES: 0s
• the output will not be switched if the source is deactivated before this
time has elapsed
• if delay = 0 s the source must still be present for longer than 300 µS
Defines the rest status of the contact with source not present between: open
Contact Type NO
(NO) and closed (NC)
Allows the output (and relative status led) to be kept activated (On) or
Latched (1) OFF
deactivated (Off) when the event disappears
Defines the minimum closing time of the contact following the rapid presence
of sources:
• Source duration < min. activation = contact is activated for the minimum
min Activation
activation time 0 ms
Time (2)
• Source duration ≥ min. activation = contact is activated for as long as the
source persists
Choose between: 0 ms, 100 ms, 200 ms

(1)
deactivate the latchings of the outputs used if the Measurement module is used for the Power Controller
function
(2)
if the Measurement module is used for the Power Controller function, the Power Controller option will also
be available; if selected, the output is kept activated for a set time that depends on the function, regardless of
whether the event that activated it persists

About The specific menu of the module available in the About - Modules menu contains:
• the serial number and version of the module
• the statuses of the inputs (On/Off) and outputs (Open/Closed)

Test The test area in the Test menu is activated if the Ekip Signalling 2K module is detected correctly.
For details of the test characteristics, please consult page 134.

Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service
connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot
version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).

222 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 11 - Ekip Signalling 2K
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

12 - Ekip Synchrocheck

Ekip Synchrocheck is an accessory module that is used to control closing of an actuator when synchronism
conditions, programmable by the user, exist.
To actuate synchronism:
• Ekip Synchrocheck and the internal sockets measure, respectively, the voltage on the external contacts
(external voltage) and on the internal contacts (internal voltage) of the actuator
• Ekip Synchrocheck manages a closing contact
NOTES:

• the actuator is described as a circuit-breaker in the following description and in the menus
• with a generator and the actuator being configured: Normally, the external voltage is that of the
grid and the internal voltage is that of the generator
IMPORTANT: only one Ekip Synchrocheck can be installed on each CB

Mode The module operates in two modes, configurable by the user (manual-mode configuration) or managed
automatically by the unit (automatic-mode configuration).
Conditions Description
Operation with external voltage other than zero:
• synchronism search starts if the external voltage is (0.5 Un by default) or more, for
at least (1 s by default)
Busbar active
• synchronism is considered to have been reached if the differences between RMS
values and frequencies and the voltage phases are (0.12 Un, 0.1 Hz, and 50° by
default) or less
Operation with one of the voltages nil:
Dead busbar and • synchronism search starts if the internal voltage is (0.5 Un by default) or more, for
configuration: at least (1 s by default)
Normal • synchronism is considered to have been reached if the external voltage is (0.2 Un
by default) or less, for at least (1 s by default)

NOTE: with dead busbar and configuration: Reversed, the roles of the internal and external
voltages are reversed

Synchronism signal:
• is activated and maintained, after synchronism has been reached, for at least 0.2 s
• is deactivated when synchronism ends or the circuit-breaker is opened (with condition: Evaluate CB status
= enabled) or communication with Ekip Touch is interrupted

Additional functions Certain options can be remotely configured in the synchronism conditions described above:
• the open circuit-breaker condition can be added (disabled by default)
• removal of the frequency and phase controls can be disabled
IMPORTANT: to be able to disable the frequency and phase controls, first make sure
that the required frequency and phase correspondence between external and
internal contacts already exists

223 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Connections The module must be assembled in the first vacant slot of the terminal box after Ekip Supply, either on the
circuit-breaker (fixed version) or on the fixed part (withdrawable version).
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001; use
AWG 22-16 cables with 1.4 mm maximum outer diameter for the external cabling.
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0513.

Power supply Ekip Com Synchrocheck is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

Input Ekip Synchrocheck has an input (V S1 - V S2) for reading voltage, operation of which is ensured within the
ranges and with the performance given below:
Component Operating range Normal operating range Accuracy (1)
Voltage 0÷120 VAC 10 ÷ 120 VAC 1 % (2)
Frequency (3) 30÷80 Hz 30 ÷ 80 Hz 0,1 % (4)
Phase (5) - -180 ÷ +180 ° 1°

(1)
the accuracy values refer to normal operating ranges, as established by IEC 61557-12
(2)
with busbar activated
(3)
with the busbar activated, frequency measurement starts at ≥ 36 V AC and ends at ≤ 32 V AC measured
voltage
(4)
in the absence of harmonic distortion
(5)
phase measurement refers to the phase difference between internal and external voltage

Isolation transformer
An isolating transformer with the characteristics given below must always be installed between the external
contacts of the circuit-breaker and the input of the module:
Characteristics Description
• fixing: EN 50022 DIN43880 rail
• material: self-extinguishing thermoplastic
Mechanical
• protection class: IP30
• electrostatic protection: with earth connector shield
• accuracy class: ≤ 0,2
• performance: ≥ 4 VA
• overload: 20% permanent
Electrical
• insulations: 4 kV between inputs and outputs, 4 kV between screen and outputs,
4 kV between screen and inputs
• frequency: 45 to 66 Hz

Output Ekip Synchrocheck has an output (K S1 - K S2) used as synchronism contact.

The output is insulated from the unit and input, and has the following electrical characteristics:
Characteristics Maximum limit (1)
Maximum switchable voltage 150 VDC / 250 VAC.
2 A @ 30 VDC, 0,8 A @ 50 VDC, 0,2 A @ 150 VDC,
Breaking capacity
4A @ 250 VAC
Dielectric strength between open contacts 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz).
Dielectric strength between each contact and coil 1000 V AC (1 minute @ 50 Hz).

(1)
data relating to a resistive load

224 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Interface the module has three signaling leds:

Figure 136

LEDs Description
Signals the on status and correct communication with Ekip Touch:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the Power led of Ekip Touch: module on
Power
and communication with Trip unit present, flashing not synchronized with the Power
led of Ekip Touch (two fast flashes per second): module on and communication with
Trip unit absent
Indicate the status of the contacts of each output:
• off: contact open
O SC • on: contact closed
NOTE: The LED shows the output status: it indicates synchronization OK or
KO, depending on the contact rest configuration (normally open or closed)

Configurations via menu The specific configuration area will activate in the Advanced - Synchrocheck menu if the Ekip Synchrocheck
module is detected correctly by Ekip Touch.
Parameter Description Default
Activates/deactivates the protection and its availability in the parameters
Enable Off
menu
Dead bar option On = busbar activated; Off = dead busbar present Off
Maximum external voltage (with dead busbar and configuration: Normal (2)

Udead T is the first synchronism condition)

0.2 Un
hreshold (1)(2) The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
and can be set within the range: 0.02 Un to 2 Un, in 0.001 Un steps
Minimum voltage for starting monitoring of external voltage (with busbar
Ulive activated) or internal voltage (with dead busbar and Normal configuration)
0.5 Un
Threshold (2)(3) The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
and can be set within the range: 0.5 Un to 1.1 Un, in 0.001 Un steps
Minimum time within which the Ulive Threshold condition must be
obtained in order to activate voltage monitoring
Stability Time 1s
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 100 ms to
30 s, in 1 ms steps
Maximum difference between internal and external voltage (first
synchronism condition)
Delta Voltage 0.12 Un
The value is given as both absolute value (Volts) and relative value (Un)
and can be set within the range: 0.02 Un to 0.12 Un, in 0.001 Un steps
Maximum difference between internal and external frequency (second
synchronism condition)
Delta frequency (4)
0.1 Hz
The value is given in Hertz and can be set within the range: 0.1 Hz to 1
Hz in 0.1 Hz steps
Maximum difference between internal and external phase (third
synchronism condition)
Delta phase (4) 50 °
The value is given in degrees and can be set within the range: 5° to 50° in
5° steps

Continued on the next page

225 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Parameter Description Default

With dead busbar and generator:
Dead bar • Reversed = Ekip Synchrocheck/external contacts connected to the
Standard
configuration generator
• Normal = Ekip Synchrocheck/external contacts connected to the grid
Enables automatic synchronism control to be activated:
Auto Live-dead • Manual = Ekip Touch considers the Dead bar option parameter
Manual
detect • Automatic = Ekip Touch automatically assesses the configuration to be
actuated between the dead busbar and active busbar
Configuration for detecting dead busbar:
Auto Deadbar • Manual = Ekip Touch considers the Dead bar configuration parameter
Manual
detect • Automatic = Ekip Touch automatically assesses the configuration to be
actuated between: Reversed and Normal
Rated voltage Un of installation; the value is given as absolute value
Primary voltage 100 V
(Volts) and can be set within the range: 100 V to 1150 V in variable steps.
Secondary voltage of the transformer; the value is given as absolute value
Secondary voltage 100 V
(Volts) and can be set within the range: 100 V to 120 V in variable steps.
Concatenated Ref Line-to-line voltage entering the module among the 3 installation voltages U12
Defines the rest status of the contact with synchronism not present
Contact Type NO
between: open (NO) and closed (NC)

(1)
parameter not available with busbar active and Auto deadbar detect= Manual
(2)
with dead busbar and configuration: Reversed, the roles of the internal and external voltages are reversed
(3)
10% hysteresis is applied to the minimum voltage condition: once reached, the condition is lost if the
voltage drops below 90% of the set limit
(4)
parameter not available with dead busbar and Auto deadbar detect= Manual

NOTE: all the thresholds have ±10% tolerance with the exception of:

• Voltage Delta; the tolerance is the higher value between: ±10% of the set threshold and 0.5%
Un (with Un > 220 V) or 1% Un (with Un ≤ 220V)
• Frequency Delta; the tolerance is the higher value between ±10% of the set threshold and 0.02
Hz

Remote configurations Additional parameters can be accessed via the service connector (via Ekip Connect) or via a system bus
communication:
Parameter Description Default
Frequency Activates (ON) or deactivates (OFF) frequency control for synchronism
ON
check assessment
Phase check Activates (ON) or deactivates (OFF) phase control for synchronism assessment ON
Activates (YES) or deactivates (NO) circuit-breaker open status control for
Evaluate CB synchronism assessment
NO
status NOTE: fourth synchronism condition with busbar active; second
synchronism condition with dead busbar
With active busbar, minimum time within which the Delta Phase condition must
be obtained
The value is given in seconds and can be set within the range: 100 ms to 3 s,
in 10 ms steps
Minimum
NOTE: this is not a synchronism condition, but a parameter allowing a 100 ms
matching time
discrimination to be made between correct and incorrect combinations of
the Delta Frequency and Delta Phase conditions. Owing to worst case
latencies, the time that effectively elapses before synchronism is
recognized may be longer than the set time (approx. 20 ms)

226 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Measurements The specific measurement area will activate in the Measurements - Synchrocheck menu if the Ekip
Synchrocheck module is detected correctly by Ekip Touch.
Measurement Description
• Ok = Synchronism conditions fulfilled
Module
• Not Ok = Synchronism conditions not fulfilled or function disabled
• Ok = Synchronism condition regarding frequencies fulfilled
• Not Ok = Synchronism condition regarding frequencies not fulfilled or synchronism
Frequency function disabled, or frequencies outside measuring range limits.
• --- = Synchronism condition regarding frequencies not available (example: for
operation with dead busbar)
• Ok = Synchronism conditions regarding voltages fulfilled.
Voltage • Not Ok = Synchronism conditions regarding voltages not fulfilled or synchronism
function disabled
• Ok = Synchronism condition regarding phase difference fulfilled
• Not Ok = Synchronism condition regarding phase difference not fulfilled or
Phase synchronism function disabled, or frequencies outside measuring range limits
• --- = Synchronism condition regarding phase difference not available (example: for
operation with dead busbar)
• Voltage measured by Ekip Synchrocheck given in Volts
• .... = measurement DC or less than 1 VAC
Ext Side Voltage (1)
• --- = measurement not available (example: because synchronism function is
disabled)
Voltage measured on internal sockets, given in Volts.
Int Side Voltage (2)
• .... = measurement less than 1 VAC
Frequency measured by Ekip Synchrocheck
Ext Side • --- = measurement not available (example: because synchronism function is
Frequency (1) disabled, or operation with dead busbar, or frequencies outside measuring range
limits)
Frequency measured on internal sockets
Int Side • --- = measurement not available (example: because synchronism function is
Frequency (2) disabled, or operation with dead busbar, or frequencies outside measuring range
limits)
Phase difference between voltages, given in degrees
• --- = measurement not available (example: because synchronism function is
Phase Difference (1)
disabled, or operation with dead busbar, or frequencies outside measuring range
limits)
• Busbar active = with automatic detection of operating mode and operation with
active busbar, or with synchronism function not enabled
• Dead bar = with automatic detection of operating mode and operation with dead
Auto detection
busbar
• --- = Measurement not available (example: owing to manual detection of operating
mode)
• Vint ≤ Vext = Internal voltage the same as external voltage or lower
• Vin > Vext = Internal voltage higher than external voltage
Voltage relation
• --- = Measurement not available (example: because the synchronism function is
disabled, or direct voltages or voltages lower than 1 V).
• fint ≤ fext = Internal frequency the same as external frequency or lower
• fin > fext = Internal frequency higher than external frequency
Frequency relation • --- = Measurement not available (example: because synchronism function is
disabled, or operation with dead busbar, or frequencies outside measuring range
limits)

(1)
voltage difference measurement accuracy is ± 10% unless the parameter value is 0.02 Un, in which case
accuracy is ± 20%
(2)
the characteristics of the voltage and frequency measurements coincide with those given on the internal
sockets (page 110)

227 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Summary page The summary page is activated in the presence of the Ekip Synchrocheck module; access is obtained in the
same way as the other summary pages (page 40).
The measurements in this page are:
• V int: voltage read by Ekip Touch
• f int: frequency read by Ekip Touch
• Δϕ: phase difference
• SYNC: status of synchronism

About The About - Modules menu contains the specific menu of the module with the serial number and version of
the module itself.

Remote information Certain additional information concerning the version and status of the module is available via the service
connector (via Ekip Connect) or by communication via system bus; the information includes: HW and Boot
version, CRC status (correctness of the SW in the module).

228 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 12 - Ekip Synchrocheck
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

13 - Ekip Signalling 3T

Ekip Signalling 3T is a signaling accessory which enables the connection of:

• three analog inputs for PT100/PT1000 temperature sensors (2 wires): I42, I43, I44
• an analog input for 4-20mA current loop: I41
The measurements supplied by the module can be associated with different control threshold, useful for
configuring alarm signals, states and programmable commands.
NOTE: PT100 temperature sensors are compatible only with Ekip Signalling 3T module
installed on Emax 2 with black platform.

Models Ekip Touch can be configured with two different 3T modules: Ekip Signalling 3T-1 and Ekip Signalling 3T-2.

NOTE: if different indications are not given, the information in the next chapter is valid for
both models; on the second module the inputs are called I51 (lopp 4-20mA), I52, I53,
I54 (PT100/PT1000)

The two modules can be installed at the same time on the same circuit-breaker so as to extend the
opportunities for measuring and monitoring the installation.
IMPORTANT: each circuit-breaker can only be fitted with one module per type.
Configuration with two modules of the same model is not allowed (example: two
Ekip Signalling 3T-1 modules)

Connections For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDM000091R0001
To connect the module to Ekip Touch, please consult document 1SDH001000R0527.
For PT100/PT1000 sensors, use insulated cables for resistance thermometers such as PENTRONIC TEC/
SITW-24F (Type TX) or similar. Maximum length 3 meters.
For the 4-20mA Current Loop sensor, use suitable cables up to 3 meters in length compatible with the
workplace in which the 4-20mA current sensor is used.
IMPORTANT: the inputs are not insulated: regardless of plant voltage, the customer
must ensure there is insulation between each input and between the inputs and
power supply of the Ekip Supply module on the basis of the customer's own application
and network.

For applications in low voltage installations ABB suggests use of the external probe
PT1000 3mt, is equippped with a nut and screw for use on busbars and is compatible
with the dielectric withstand and insulation levels established by standard IEC 60947-
2 (Ui= 1000 V, Uimp= 12 kV).

Power supply Ekip Signalling 3T is supplied directly by the Ekip Supply module to which it is connected.

NOTE: communication between Ekip Touch and the module is interrupted in the absence of
auxiliary power supply

229 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 13 - Ekip Signalling 3T
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Input The module enables the following quantities to be measured

Input Measurement Range Resolution Accuracy (1)

PT100/PT1000 Temperature -50 ÷ 250 °C (2) 0,01 °C ± 1 °C
4-20mA current loop DC current 0 ÷ 100 % (3) 0.1 % ± 0,5 % (4)

(1)
accuracy values refer to 3T module without sensors. For complete accuracy, consider the characteristics of
the sensors and cabling used; accuracy increases by 0.5°C with the ABB sensor
(2)
with ABB PT1000 sensor, the range is -25 ÷ 150°C
(3)
the measurement is expressed as a percentage, where: 0% = 4 mA and 100% = 20 mA
(4)
accuracy values refer to full scale: 0.5%= 0.1 mA

Interface Five signalling leds are available:

Figure 137

LEDs Description
Signals the on state and correct communication with the trip unit:
• off: module off
• on steady or flashing synchronized with the trip unit Power led: module on and
Power
communication with trip unit present
• flashing not synchronized with trip unit Power led (two fast flashes per second):
module on and communication with trip unit absent
Indicate the state of the input contacts:
• off: input disabled
I 41, I 42, I 43, I 44
• on steady: input enabled, sensor connected and measurement valid
• flashing: input enabled, sensor not connected and/or measurement not valid

Access from the display The following areas are activated on Ekip Touch if the Ekip Signalling 3T module is detected correctly:
• Measurements page, accessible from the Home page, containing the measurements of all the PT100/
PT1000 and 4-20mA Current Loop inputs of both modules 3T-1 and 3T-2
• information submenus in the About-Modules menu containing: serial number, module version and statuses
of sensors (Present/Alarm)
IMPORTANT:

• if one or more sensors are in the alarm status, the signal on the diagnosis bar will be:
Ekip Signalling 3T
• if a sensor is not enabled, the status indicated is: Present

Remote configurations The configuration of the module is available:

• via Ekip Connect, with communication accessories via service connector or with communication via
system bus
• via own communication system and Ekip Com modules installed on circuit-breaker, in the conditions
required by the trip unit (use System Interface for details)
All the measurements, states and alarms of the module are available in both conditions.
NOTE: parameters and measurements are distributed in Ekip Connect pages and communication
addresses sometimes nonsequential; references to the pages in Ekip Connect 3 are
given in the tables below

230 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 13 - Ekip Signalling 3T
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Enabling and measurements The individual inputs of the modulecan be enabled in the Ekip Signalling 3T page: I42 Temperatures, I43
Temperatures, I44 Temperatures, I41 Current 4-20mA (per 3T-1), I52 Temperatures, I53 Temperatures, I54
temperatures, I51 Current 4-20mA (for 3T-2).
Parameter Description Default
Enables the specific input and relative alarm state and signaling
Enable Enabled
controls to be activated

Alarm signals Up to three alarm thresholds (independent of each other), Threshold A, Threshold B, Threshold C, can be
activated and configured for each input in the Protection parameters - Other parameters A (and B if dual set
is activated) page
Each alarm threshold has the following configuration parameters:
NOTE: the table lists the parameters of threshold A of input I42; the names and references
of all the other thresholds and inputs change

Parameter Description Default

Threshold A enable Activates verification of input I42 with alarm Threshold A Off
Defines whether the alarm must activate when measurement is
Threshold A
above (Up) or below (Down) the set value, with reference to the Up
hysteresis direction
Threshold A setting
Alarm threshold A of input I42. The value is given in degrees Celsius
(°C) and can be set within the range: -40°C to 240°C, in 0.1°C
200 °C (I42,
steps.
I43, I44, I52,
Threshold A value NOTE: the thresholds of the 4-20mA (I41 and I51) Current
I53, I54) / 50
Loop input are given in percentage form and can be set within
% (I41, I51)
the range: 0% to 100 %, in 0.1% steps (each step equivalent
to 0.016µA)
Hysteresis value, valid for quitting the alarm condition if the set
Treshold A alarm threshold has been exceeded.
The hysteresis parameter only allows positive values. The trip unit
decides whether to add or subtract this value to or from the alarm
threshold on the basis of the direction parameter, example:
1 °C (I42, I43,
• Direction = Up, Value = 200°C, hysteresis= 10°C, the alarm
Threshold A I44, I52, I53,
activates over 200° and de-activates below 190°C
hysteresis I54) / 1 % (I41,
The value is expressed in degrees Celsius (°C) and can be set within
I51)
the range: 0°C to 50°C with 0.1°C steps.
NOTE: the thresholds associated with the 4-20mA (I41 and
I51) Current Loop input are given in percentage form and can
be set within the range 0% to 30 %, in 0.1% steps (each step
equivalent to 0.016µA)

States and alarms The state of all control thresholds can be checked in the Warnings/Alarms page

231 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A External electronic accessories | 13 - Ekip Signalling 3T
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Other electronic accessories

1 - Ekip Signalling 10K

Ekip Signalling 10K is an external accessory signaling module. It can be installed on a standard 35 mm DIN
rail (DIN EN 50022 type TS 35x15 mm).
This module has:
• Ten programmable output contacts
• Ten or eleven programmable digital inputs
• One power led and twenty or twenty-one signaling leds (one for each input/output)
The module can be set in four different configurations
• One in case of connection to a Link bus network
• Three configurations in case of connection via Local Bus (to allow up to three modules to be connected
to the same trip unit)
The module can be supplied by 110...240 V AC / DC or 24...48 V DC.
Further details about Ekip Signalling 10K are available in ABB Library, especially in document
1SDH001318R0002.
IMPORTANT: make sure that you have read the recommendations concerning safety
and prevention of unauthorized access.

2 - Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP

Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP is an external accessory module. It can be installed on a standard 35 mm DIN
rail (DIN EN 50022 type TS 35 x 15 mm).
Its function is to share on another Ethernet network with communication protocol.
The module has 11 digital inputs and 10 output contacts:
• The inputs allow the state of the devices and other information to be monitored
• The outputs allow the circuit-breakers to be operated.
Each input and output is associated with a state LED.
The module can function in three different modes:
Mode Characteristics
The module can be associated with a single circuit-breaker, which can be
CB Supervisor
selected from a list. Configuration of the inputs and output is pre-defined
The module can be associated with up to five circuit-breakers. Configuration
of the inputs and output is pre-defined.
Multi MCCB Supervisor
NOTE:mode available with moulded-case circuit-breakers

Free I/O The inputs and outputs can be fully configured by the user

The module can be supplied by 110...240 V AC / DC or 24...48 V DC.

Further details about Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP are available in ABB Library, especially in document
1SDH001456R0002.

232 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Other electronic accessories | 2 - Ekip Signalling Modbus TCP
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Ekip Multimeter

Ekip Multimeter is a remote display panel-front module with touchscreen display allowing the parameters of
the Trip unit to which it is connected via local bus to be displayed and edited.
Up to four Ekip Multimeter modules can be connected to the same Trip unit. On the other hand, the module
can only be connected to one Trip unit.
The rear connector allows the unit to be supplied in two different ways:
Terminals / supply voltage Frequency Power input Inrush current
21,5 ÷ 53 VDC - Maximum 10W Maximum 2 A for 20 ms
105 ÷ 265 VAC/DC 45 ÷ 66 Hz Maximum 10 VA/W Maximum 2 A for 20 ms

IMPORTANT: AC and DC supplies cannot be present at the same time

The module provides for 24 VDC auxiliary voltage (terminals 24Vout L+ and L-), which can be used to directly
supply the Trip unit.
WARNING! Ekip Multimeter is sized to supply the Trip unit alone, without additional
modules: if auxiliary voltage is used via module, it must be connected directly
to the terminal box of the CB without the possibility of using Ekip Supply or other
modules

Connections
Belden 3105A cables or equivalent, up to 15 m in length, must be used for the local bus and auxiliary supply.
The cable shield must be earthed on both sides of the connection.
Documents
Further details are available in ABB Library, especially in document 1SDH001000R0520.

4 - Rc Toroid

Rc is an external differential current sensor which can be installed on Ekip Touch Trip units equipped with Rc
Rating Plug.
When Ekip Touch is being programmed, check in the Settings-Circuit breaker-Ground protection menu to
make sure that the sensor is present (page 46, the configuration menu of the Rc protection parameters must
be activated in the Advanced menu (page 44).
IMPORTANT: the toroid can be choosen as an alternative to the S.G.R. one: protections
Gext, MDGF and Rc are alternatives to each other

Further details about the Rc toroid connection are available in ABB Library, especially in document
1SDH001000R0521.

5 - Toroid S.G.R.

|i|S.G.R. or Source Ground Return is an external single-pole current sensor available for LSIG version Ekip
Touch Trip units
When Ekip Touch is being programmed, check in the Settings-Circuit breaker-Ground protection menu to
make sure that the sensor is present (page 46, the configuration menu of the Gext protection parameters
must be activated in the Advanced menu (page 44).
IMPORTANT: the toroid can be choosen as an alternative to the Rc one; protections
Gext, MDGF and Rc are alternatives to each other

Further details about the S.G.R. toroid connection are available in ABB Library, especially in document
1SDH001000R0507.

233 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Other electronic accessories | 5 - Toroid S.G.R.
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

- External neutral

This is a current sensor for the neutral pole outside the circuit-breaker.
It is provided only for three-pole circuit breakers. It allows protection of the neutral to be implemented through
the connection to the Ekip trip unit. It is supplied on request.
Further information on the connection of the external neutral is available on the website http://www.abb.com/
abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular in the kit sheets:
• 1SDH001000R0506 for circuit breakers E2.2.
• 1SDH001000R0515 for circuit breakers E4.2 and E6.2.

6 - Ekip Com Actuator

Ekip Com Actuator is an accessory module which allows SACE Emax 2 circuit-breakers to be opened and
closed remotely.
The module is installed on the front of the circuit-breaker, in the accessories area.
For references about the connection and terminals, please consult document 1SDH000999R0501 and
1SDH001000R0501
The Ekip Com Actuator module is supplied on request and is compatible with all Ekip Touch Trip units when
the Ekip Com or Ekip Link modules are installed.

7 - Ekip AUP

The communication modules are always supplied with dedicated Ekip AUP auxiliary position contacts. In
case of a withdrawable circuit-breaker, the Ekip AUP contacts give the signal of moving part racked-in/out
from the fixed part.
The assembly assures that the position signalling is given also with the moving part withdrawn.
IMPORTANT: in case of multiple communication modules, only one can be connected
to the Ekip AUP contacts.

Further information on assembling Ekip AUP modules and contacts is available on the web site http://www.
abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0811.

8 - Ekip RTC

The communication modules are always supplied with an Ekip RTC auxiliary contact, which gives to the trip
unit the signal indicating that the circuit-breaker is ready to receive a close command.
Further information on the assembly of the Ekip RTC contact is available on the web site http://www.abb.
com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in particular in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0614.

234 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Other electronic accessories | 8 - Ekip RTC
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

9 - Testing and Programming

Ekip TT Ekip TT is a supply accessory and is useful for powering Ekip Touch in the absence of auxiliary power supply;
the unit allows:
• Ekip Touch to be supplied and the tripped protection to be displayed, in the event of a TRIP and absence
of auxiliary voltage
• the protections and certain parameters to be set before installation in the system
IMPORTANT:

• Ekip TT can also be connected to Ekip Touch when in service.

• Ekip TT only supplies the Trip unit: the presence of an auxiliary supply is required in
order to set and display the information about the electronic accessories
Ekip TT is connected to the service connector of Ekip Touch by means of the supplied cable.
To switch on the module, set the side switch to the ON position and check the status of the led:
• if green, proceed with the required reading and configuring operations
• if red, replace the batteries of the device (three 1.5 V AA batteries)
Further details are available in ABB Library, especially in document 1SDH001000R0519

Ekip Programming and Ekip Ekip Programming is a supply and communication accessory that is useful for:
T&P • Ekip Touch to be supplied and the tripped protection to be displayed, in the event of a TRIP and absence
of auxiliary voltage
• the protections and certain parameters to be set before installation in the system
• with Ekip Connect software, accessing the programming, measuring pages and other exclusive functions
(Datalogger, Dataviewer, Power Controller, Load Shedding, IPS, IEC 61850)
IMPORTANT:

• Ekip Programming can also be connected to Ekip Touch when in service

• Ekip Programming only supplies the Trip unit: the presence of an auxiliary supply is
required in order to set and display the information about the electronic accessories
Ekip Programming connects to the USB port of the PC, from which it receives the power required to switch
on and also supply Ekip Touch; connection to the service connector of Ekip Touch must be made with the
supplied cable.
Ekip Programming has two leds, one green to indicate when the module is on, the other yellow to indicate
when communication is activated.
Ekip T&P is a supply and communication accessory with the same characteristics as Ekip Programming, plus
a further function:
• with Ekip Connect software, it enables access to the test pages

235 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Other electronic accessories | 9 - Testing and Programming
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Electrical accessories

1 - Electrical control accessories

YO-YC-YO2-YC2 (1): Opening The opening coils, YO and YO2, and the closing coil, YC and YC2 (1), allow the circuit-breaker to be controlled
and closing coil remotely.
The opening of the circuit-breaker is always possible with the circuit-breaker closed, while closing is possible
with the circuit-breaker open and the closing springs charged.
The opening and closing coils can operate in two different modes:
• instantaneous service (the minimum duration of the command impulse must be 100 ms).
• service with permanent power supply.

D1 C1 C11

C3 C13

D2 C2 C12
YU
YO 2 YC YO

YO-YC-YO2 for E1.2

D1 C1 C11 C21

C3 C13

D2 C2 C12 C22
YU
YO 2 YC YO YC 2

YO-YC-YO2-YC2 for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

NOTE: the second opening coil YO2 is alternative to the undervoltage coil YU.

IMPORTANT:

• If the closing coil is permanently energized and the opening coil trips, after opening,
the closing coil must be momentarily de-energized so that it can be reused for the next
closing operation.
• If instead the opening coil trips, it is necessary, after having de-energized it, to wait at
least 100 ms before operating the closing coil.
Available voltages and characteristics
The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided below:
Available voltages (Un) General characteristics YO-YO2 YC-YC2 (1)
24 V AC/DC Operating limits 70...110 %Un 85...110 %Un
30 V AC/DC Inrush power (Ps) 300 VA/W
48 V AC/DC Continuous power (Pc) 3.5 VA/W
60 V AC/DC Maximum opening time 35 ms -
110…120 V AC/DC Maximum closing time - 50 ms
220…240 V AC/DC
240...250 V AC/DC
277 V AC/DC
380…400 V AC
415…440 V AC
480…500 V AC
500…550 V AC
(1)
YC2 not available for E1.2

Continued on the next page

236 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 1 - Electrical control accessories
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

YO-YC-YO2-YC2 (1): Connections

More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
particular,
for E1.2 in the kit sheets:
• 1SDH000999R0502 for YO and YO2 coils
• 1SDH000999R0503 for coils YC
and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheets:
• 1SDH001000R0502 for YO and YO2 coils
• 1SDH001000R0503 for YC and YC2 coils
(1)
YC2 not available for E1.2

YU: Undervoltage coil The undervoltage coil YU controls the value of the voltage in the circuit to which it is connected.
The coil opens the circuit-breaker when its energizing voltage drops below a value between 35...70%Un
The circuit-breaker can be reclosed when the coil energizing voltage is between 85...110% Un.

The undervoltage coil YU can in addition be used for the following purposes:
• Trip unit the circuit-breaker remotely using pushbuttons of the normally closed type.
• Activate the lock when the circuit-breaker is closed (the closing of the circuit-breaker is allowed only with
the undervoltage coil energized).
IMPORTANT:

• The undervoltage coil YU is incompatible with the presence of the Fail Safe device (UL
circuit-breakers).
• The undervoltage coil YU is a emergency trip unit. For service operations use the
opening coil.
NOTE: the power supply of the coil must be drawn on the supply side of the circuit-breaker
or from an independent source.

If the undervoltage coil trips, it is necessary, after having reset it, to wait at least 100 ms
before operating the closing coil.

D1

D2

YU
YO 2

YU for E1.2

D1

D2

YU
YO 2

YU for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

Continued on the next page

237 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 1 - Electrical control accessories
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided below:
Available voltages (Un) General characteristics YU
24 V AC/DC Inrush power (Ps) 300 VA/W
30 V AC/DC Continuous power (Pc) 3.5 VA/W
48 V AC/DC Opening time 50 ms
60 V AC/DC
110…120 V AC/DC
220…240 V AC/DC
240...250 V AC/DC
277 V AC/DC
380…400 V AC
415…440 V AC
480…500 V AC

YU: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0504 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0504.

YR: Remote resetting coil

The remote resetting coil deactivates the lock at the closing of the circuit-breaker, generated by the opening
of the circuit-breaker caused by tripping of the Ekip protection trip unit.

R1

R2

YR

YR for E1.2

R1

R2

YR

YR for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided below:
Available voltages (Un) General characteristics
24 V AC (1) 24 V DC (1) Operating limits 90...110 %Un
110 V AC (1) 110 V DC (1) (2)
220 V AC (1)
220 V DC (1) (2)

(1)
The coil must be activated by a pulse lasting at least 20ms.
(2)
The coil must be activated by a pulse lasting max 50ms.

YR: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0606 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0606.

238 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 1 - Electrical control accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

M: Motor The motor automatically recharges the closing springs of the circuit-breaker when these are discharged.
The motor is equipped with a limit contact S33 M/1 that interrupts the power supply of the motor after
charging of the springs is completed.
The motor is equipped with a limit contact S33 M/2 that signals the state of the charged springs.For information
on the S33 M/2 limit contact refer to the dedicated paragraph "S33 M/2: springs charged signalling contact"
in this chapter.

U1

U2

M for E1.2

U1

U2

M for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

NOTE: The closing springs can in any case be charged manually through the appropriate
front control lever.

The tables listing the available voltages and the electrical characteristics are provided below:
Available voltages (Un) General characteristics
24…30 V AC/DC Operating limits 85...110 %Un
48…60 V AC/DC Inrush power (Ps) 500 VA/W
100…130 V AC/DC Power during charge (Pc): 100 VA/W
220…250 V AC/DC Charging time Min 5 s, max 10 s
Available voltages (Un) (1)

380…415 V AC
Available voltages (Un) (2)
277 V AC/DC
380…400 V AC
440…480 V AC

(1)
for E1.2
(2)
for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

M: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0609 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0609.

239 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 1 - Electrical control accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Electrical signalling accessories

AUX 4Q: auxiliary open-closed The AUX 4Q contacts signal the open/closed state of the circuit-breaker.
contacts These are "switching" contacts and are available in three types:
• four standard contacts
• four digital signals (low power)
• two standard contacts (Q1-Q2) + two digital signals (Q3-Q4)

NOTE: The standard AUX 4Q contacts are always included in the circuit-breakers

11 21 31 41

12 22 32 42

14 24 34 44

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4

AUX 4Q for E1.2

11 21 31 41

12 22 32 42

13 23 33 43

Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4

AUX 4Q for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:

Characteristics Standard Digital signals

24V - 0.1 A
DC 125V 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms -
250V 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms -
3A cos φ 0.3 -
Breaking
250V 5A cos φ 0.7 -
capacity
5A cos φ 1 -
AC
3A cos φ 1 -
400V 2A cos φ 0.7 -
1A cos φ 0.3 -
Minimum load 100mA @ 24V 1mA @ 5V

AUX 4Q: Connections

More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0601 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0601.

240 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

AUX 6Q (1): Additional open/ The additional AUX 6Q contacts signal the open/closed state of the circuit-breaker.
closed auxiliary contacts These are "switching" contacts and are available in three types:
• six standard contacts
• six digital signals (low power)
• three standard contacts (Q1-Q2-Q3) + three digital signals (Q4-Q5-Q6)

51 61 71 81 91 01
HC H1 H2 H3 H4
52 62 72 82 92 02
HC K3 K4 K5 K6
54 64 74 84 94 04
HC K7 K8 K9 K10
Q5..Q10 EKI P S ignalling 4K

(1)
Only for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

NOTE: it is possible to order the AUX 6 Q contacts only if the circuit-breaker is not equipped
with a protection trip unit with the Ekip Signalling 4K module.

The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:

Characteristics Standard Digital signals
24V - 0.1 A
DC 125V 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms -
250V 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms -
3A cos φ 0.3 -
Breaking
250V 5A cos φ 0.7 -
capacity
5A cos φ 1 -
AC
3A cos φ 1 -
400V 2A cos φ 0.7 -
1A cos φ 0.3 -
Minimum load 100mA @ 24V 1mA @ 5V

AUX 6Q: Connections

More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0601.

241 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

AUX 15Q: External additional The additional AUX 6Q contacts signal the open/closed state of the circuit-breaker.
open/closed auxiliary contacts These are "switching" contacts and are available in two types:
• 15 standard contacts
• 15 digital signals (low power)

The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:

Characteristics Standard Digital signals
24V - 0.1 A
DC 125V 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms -
250V 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms -
3A cos φ 0.3 -
Breaking capacity 250V 5A cos φ 0.7 -
5A cos φ 1 -
AC
3A cos φ 1 -
400V 2A cos φ 0.7 -
1A cos φ 0.3 -
Minimum load 100mA @ 24V 1mA @ 5V

AUX 15Q Connections

More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0607 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0607.

242 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

AUP: auxiliary position contacts The AUP contacts are intended for circuit-breakers in withdrawable version.
They electrically signal the position of a moving part (inserted/test/withdrawn) in relation to the fixed part in
which they are inserted.
These are "switching" contacts and are available in the following configurations:
Up to a maximum of six contacts for E1.2:
• six standard contacts
• six digital signals
Up to a maximum of ten contacts for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2:
• five standard contacts
• five digital signals
• five additional standard contacts
• five additional digital signals

AUP for E1.2 AUP for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:

Characteristics Standard Digital signals
24V - 0.1 A
DC 125V 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms -
250V 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms -
3A cos φ 0.3 -
Breaking
250V 5A cos φ 0.7 -
capacity
5A cos φ 1 -
AC
3A cos φ 1 -
400V 2A cos φ 0.7 -
1A cos φ 0.3 -
Minimum load 100mA @ 24V 1mA @ 5V

AUP: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0603 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0603.

243 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

RTC: ready to close signalling The RTC contact indicates that the circuit-breaker is ready to receive a closing command.
contact The conditions necessary to allow the closing of the circuit-breaker are:
• circuit-breaker open
• springs charged
• absence of an opening command or of a lock in opening

NOTE: if the circuit-breaker is opened due to the tripping of the Ekip protection trip unit, in
order to allow closing, the Reset signal of the circuit-breaker must have been reset (press
the TU Reset pushbutton on the front panel).

The RTC is a "switching" contact type and is available in the standard version or in the versions for digital
signals.

45

46

48

RT C

RTC for E1.2

45

46

48

RT C

RTC for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:

Characteristics Standard Digital signals
24V - 0.1 A
0.3A @ 0ms -
125V
DC 0.15A @ 10ms -
Breaking 0.3A @ 0ms -
250V
capacity 0.15A @ 10ms -
1A cos φ 0.3 -
AC 125V - 250V 2A cos φ 0.7 -
3A cos φ 1 -
Minimum load 100mA @ 24V 1mA @ 5V

RTC: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0604 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0604.

244 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

S51: trip unit tripping signalling The S51 contact signals the opening of the circuit-breaker due to tripping of the Ekip protection trip unit.
contact It is available in two different types:
• standard contact
• contact for digital signals

NOTE: The standard S51 contact is always included in automatic circuit-breakers, and is
associated with the TU Reset mechanical signalling.

95

96

98

S51

S51 for E1.2

95

96

98

S5 1

S51 for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:

Characteristics Standard Digital signals
24V - 0.1 A
0.3A @ 0ms -
125V
DC 0.15A @ 10ms -
Breaking 0.3A @ 0ms -
250V
capacity 0.15A @ 10ms -
1.5A cos φ 0.3 -
AC 125V - 250V 3A cos φ 0.7 -
5A cos φ 1 -
Minimum load 100mA @ 24V 1mA @ 5V

S51: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0605 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0605.

245 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

S51/2: releases tripped Contact S51/2 signals circuit-breaker opening after the protection release Ekip has tripped.
signaling contact Only available with circuit-breakers Emax E2.2-E4.2-E6.2

It is available in two different types:

• standard contact
• contact for digital signals

NOTE: Contact S51/2 can be used as an alternative to YR and at the same time as S51.

R1

R2

YR

The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:

Characteristics Standard Digital signals
24V - 0.1 A
0.3A @ 0ms -
125V
DC 0.15A @ 10ms -
Breaking 0.3A @ 0ms -
250V
capacity 0.15A @ 10ms -
1.5A cos φ 0.3 -
AC 125V - 250V 3A cos φ 0.7 -
5A cos φ 1 -
Minimum load 100mA @ 24V 1mA @ 5V

S51: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
particular in the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0614.

246 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

S33 M/2: springs charged The S33 M/2 contact signals the state of the closing springs of the circuit-breaker control (charged or
signalling contact discharged).
It is available in two types:
• standard contact
• contact for digital signals
NOTE: the S33_M/2 contact is always included in the gearmotor for automatic charging of
the springs in the standard version. The version for digital signals must be requested
with the order for the motor.

35

36

38

S33

S33 M/2 for E1.2

35

36

38

S33

S33 M/2 for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

The following table provides information on the electrical characteristics:

Characteristics Standard Digital signals
24V - 0.1 A
DC 125V 0.5A @ 0ms / 0.3A @ 10ms -
250V 0.3A @ 0ms / 0.15A @ 10ms -
3A cos φ 0.3 -
Breaking
250V 5A cos φ 0.7 -
capacity
5A cos φ 1 -
AC
3A cos φ 1 -
400V 2A cos φ 0.7 -
1A cos φ 0.3 -
Minimum load 100mA @ 24V 1mA @ 5V

S33/M2: Connections
More details are available in the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, which also
includes the entire circuit diagram 1SDM000091R0001.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0609 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0609.

247 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Electrical accessories | 2 - Electrical signalling accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Mechanical accessories

1 - Mechanical Protection accessories

PBC: opening and closing The pushbutton protection inhibits the use of the opening and closing pushbuttons.
pushbutton protection It is available in two types:
• Protection that simultaneously inhibits the use of both pushbuttons. The use of the pushbuttons is only
allowed with the aid of an appropriate key.
• Padlockable protection that inhibits the use of one or both pushbuttons with the aid of a padlock.

PBC for E1.2 PBC for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0715 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0715.

IP54 protection IP54 protection completely protects the front of the circuit-breaker, to achieve protection class IP54.
It is always equipped with two locks for closing, available in two types:
• lock with different key code numbers (for an individual circuit-breaker)
• lock with the same key code number (for more than one circuit-breaker)

IP54 for E1.2 IP54 for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0714 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0714.

248 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical accessories | 1 - Mechanical Protection accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

HTC / LTC (1): Terminal-cover Terminal-covers are applied in order to reduce the risk of direct contact with live parts. They are available in
two types:
• HTC - High terminal-covers
• LTC - Low terminal-covers

(1)
Only for E1.2
Information on assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
particular with the kit sheets:
• 1SDH000999R0612 for the high terminal-covers
• 1SDH000999R0613 for the low terminal-covers

PB (1): Phase separators The phase separators are applied in order to increase the insulation clearance between two adjacent phases.

(1)
Only for E1.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
particular with the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0608.

249 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical accessories | 1 - Mechanical Protection accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Mechanical safety accessories

KLC: open position key lock The KLC locks the circuit-breaker in the open position.
It can also be used during maintenance activities on the circuit-breaker after removal of the cover of the
accessory area.
The KLC lock is available with two types of locking:
• lock with different key code numbers (for a single circuit-breaker).
• lock with the same key code number (for more than one circuit-breaker). The maximum number of key
code numbers available is five.
If set up appropriately, the KLC-A lock can work with four other types of locks:
• Ronis
• Profalux
• Kirk
• Castell
NOTE: the supply of Ronis - Profalux - Kirk - Castell locks is at customer's expense.

KLC for E1.2 KLC for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in

particular for E1.2 in the kit sheets
• 1SDH000999R0702 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB
• 1SDH000999R0703 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks
• 1SDH000999R0718 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Castell locks
and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheets:
• 1SDH001000R0702 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB
• 1SDH001000R0703 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks
• 1SDH001000R0718 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Castell locks

PLC: padlock The PLC locks the circuit-breaker in the open position.
It is available in two types:
• lock usable with a maximum number of three padlocks with a diameter of 4 mm - 0.16"
• lock usable with a maximum number of two padlocks with a diameter of 8 mm - 0.32"
• lock for a padlock with a diameter of 7 mm - 0.28" or for a latch chain
NOTE: The padlocks are at customer's expenses.

PLC for E1.2 PLC for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0706 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0706.

250 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Anti-insertion lock The anti-insertion lock allows the moving part of the circuit-breaker to be inserted only into the corresponding
fixed part.
It is intended for all withdrawable circuit breakers.

L
E1.2 12
10 L
08 .2 12
-N
16
06 E1
B-C12 10
E1.2 10
08 08
06
02 N 06
C-
B- 12 16
.2
E1 10
08
06
02

02 E2.2
08
10 N-B-

LEFT
12 S
16
20
25
08 E2.2
10
12 H
16
20
MATC 25
H
ALSO
THE
RIGH
T
SIDE

Lock for E1.2 Lock for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,

in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0701 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0701.

MOC: Operation counter The mechanical operation counter displays the number of mechanical operations performed by the circuit-
breaker.

00001 00001
MOC for E1.2 MOC for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,

in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0710 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0710.

PLP: padlock in connected/ The PLP locks the moving part of a withdrawable circuit-breaker in the fixed part, in one of the following
test/disconnected positions positions:
• connected
• test
• disconnected
Only one type is available that allows you to mount up to three padlocks with a diameter of 8 mm.
NOTE: the PLP lock can also be supplied in the presence of a KLP lock

PLP for E1.2 PLP for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,

in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0707 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0707.

251 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

KLP: key lock for connected/ The KLP lock for connected/test/disconnected position locks the moving part of a withdrawable circuit-
test/disconnected positions breaker in the fixed part, in one of the following positions:
• connected
• test
• disconnected
NOTE: it is possible to lock the moving part in the disconnected position only by using the
additional accessory KLP lock.

The KLP lock for connected/test/disconnected positions is available with two types of lock:
• lock with different key code numbers (for a single circuit-breaker).
• lock with the same key code number (for more than one circuit-breaker). The maximum number of key
code numbers available is five.
Through an appropriate setup, the KLP lock for connected/test/disconnected positions can work with three
other types of lock:
• Ronis
• Profalux
• Kirk
• Castell
The maximum number of locks that can be installed per circuit-breaker is the two, for all types of lock.
NOTE: the supply of Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks is at customer's expense.

NOTE: the KLP lock can also be supplied in the presence of a PLP lock

KLP for E1.2 KLP for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in

particular for E1.2 in the kit sheets
• 1SDH000999R0704 and 1SDH000999R0726 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB
• 1SDH000999R0705 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks
• 1SDH000999R0719 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Castell locks
and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheets:
• 1SDH001000R0704 for key locks with lock supplied by ABB
• 1SDH001000R0705 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Ronis - Profalux - Kirk locks
• 1SDH001000R0719 for the key locks with pre-engineering for Castell locks

KLP lock additional accessory This additional accessory limits the blocking function to the disconnected position only.

for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,

in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0727 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0727.

252 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

SL: shutter lock The SL shutter locks the shutters of the fixed part.
It is possible to lock the upper and lower shutters independently.
This is an accessory available on all the fixed parts and can work with the aid of padlocks with diameters of 4
mm - 0.16", 6 mm - 0.24", 8 mm - 0.32", with a maximum of four padlocks per fixed part (two for the upper
shutters and two for the lower shutters).
NOTE: The padlocks are at customer's expenses.

SL for E1.2 SL for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

DLC: Door opening lock with The DLC prevents the following operations from being carried out:
the circuit-breaker in closed • opening the switchgear door with the circuit-breaker closed if the circuit-breaker is in fixed version
position • opening the switchgear door with the circuit-breaker closed and in connected position if the circuit-breaker
is in fixed version
• closing of the circuit-breaker when the switchgear door is open
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/,
in particular for E1.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH000999R0712 and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet
1SDH001000R0712.

253 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

DLP (1): door opening lock The DLP lock prevents the switchgear door from being opened when the moving part of the circuit-breaker
with the circuit-breaker in is in the connected or test position.
connected/test position It can be installed alternatively on the right side or the left side of the fixed part.

NOTE: The DLP lock is used as an alternative to the mechanical interlock.

DLP for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

(1)
Not available for E1.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0709.

DLR (1): lock on racking-in/ The DLR lock prevents the moving part from being racked in/out from the fixed part when the switchgear
racking-out of the moving part door is open.
with the door open It is available on request on all fixed parts.

DLR for E2.2 - E4.2 - E6.2

(1)
Not available for E1.2
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0725.

Fail safe The fail safe is a device that prevents the removal of the mobile part of a withdrawable circuit-breaker from
the fixed part if the springs are charged.
It is always supplied with UL circuit-breakers.
IMPORTANT:

• The fail safe device makes undervoltage coil YU unavailable.

• It is, however, possible not to install the fail safe device, in which case the undervoltage
coil YU must be used.
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
particular for E1.2 in the kit sheets
• 1SDH000999R0708 for the Fail Safe, movable part
• 1SDH000999R0711 for the Fail Safe, fixed part
and for E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 in the kit sheet 1SDH001400R0821.

254 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical accessories | 2 - Mechanical safety accessories
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

3 - Mechanical Interlocks
Mechanical interlocks determine the opening/closing logic between two or three circuit-breakers.
Four types of interlocks are available, usable in both fixed and withdrawable versions.

Mechanical interlock of type A - The Type A interlock is applicable to two circuit-breakers (normal power supply + emergency power supply).
Two Circuit-breakers It allows you never to have two circuit-breakers in the closed position at the same time.
1 2 Information on assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
O O particular with the kit sheets:
I O • 1SDH000999R0720 for interlock between E1.2circuit-breakers
O I • 1SDH001000R0720 for interlock between E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breakers
• 1SDH000999R0721 for interlock between one E1.2 circuit-breaker and one E2.2-E4.2-E6.2 circuit-breaker

Mechanical interlock of type B - The Type B interlock is applicable to three circuit-breakers (two normal power supplies + emergency power
Three Circuit-breakers supply).
1 2 3 It only allows the closing of the two circuit-breakers of the normal power supply if the circuit-breaker of the
O O O emergency power supply is open. The circuit-breaker of the emergency power supply can be closed only if
the others two are open.
I O O
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
O O I
particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0721.
I O I
O I O

Mechanical interlock of type C - The Type C interlock is applicable to three circuit-breakers (two normal power supplies + a bus tie).
Three Circuit-breakers It allows the simultaneous closing of one or two circuit-breakers, resulting in two possible types of power
1 2 3 supply of the half busbars:
O O O • power supply from a single transformer (bus tie closed)
I O O • power supply from both transformers (bus tie open)

O I O
Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
O O I
particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0722.
O I I
I I O
I O I
Mechanical interlock of type D - The Type C interlock is applicable to three circuit-breakers (three power supplies on the same bar that must
Three Circuit-breakers not operate in parallel)
1 2 3 It allows only one of the three circuit-breakers to be closed.
O O O Information on the assembly is available on the website http://www.abb.com/abblibrary/DownloadCenter/, in
I O O particular with the kit sheet 1SDH001000R0723.
O I O
O O I

Operating coil trip time setting Before the trip command of a YC release on the circuit-breaker (B) which activates an interlock, make sure
on interlocked circuit-breakers that at least 60ms have passed since the energizing of release YU or from the de-energizing of release YO -
YO2 on the circuit-breaker to be interlocked (A).

> >
Figure 138

255 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Mechanical accessories | 3 - Mechanical Interlocks
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Alarms or failures

1 - Identification of alarms or failures

Introduction Correct maintenance of the unit and connected devices ensures they operate correctly over time.
The maintenance operations must be performed by expert personnel, as required by the safety regulations
and maintenance schedule described in this document.
If faults are discovered, find out what is causing them and eliminate them before putting the unit back into
service.
WARNING! Detecting faults must only be managed by (electrically) skilled persons
(IEV 195-04-01: person with relevant education and experience to enable him or
her to perceive risks and to avoid hazards which electricity can create), as it may be
necessary to perform insulation and dielectric tests on part or all the installation

256 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Faults, causes and remedies The following is a list of possible fault situations, their possible causes and suggestions for resolving them.

Faults Possible causes Suggestions

Press the TU mechanical reset
The trip signal of the protection trip
pushbutton or operate the electrical
unit has not been reset
reset remotely.
The open-position key lock or padlock Unlock the lock in open position using
is activated the relevant key
The circuit-breaker is in an
The circuit-breaker intermediate position between
doesn't close when the connected and isolated for test Complete the rack-in operation
closing pushbutton is or between isolated for test and
pressed disconnected
Check the power supply circuit and
The undervoltage coil is not energized
the power supply voltage
The opening coil is permanently
Correct operating condition.
energized
The trip unit pushbutton is pressed
Rotate the crank to complete
(withdrawable version)
The trip signal of the protection trip
Press the TU Reset button
unit has not been reset
Measure the voltage: it should not be
The power supply voltage of the
lower than 70% of the rated voltage of
auxiliary circuits is too low
the coil
The power supply voltage is different
Check the voltage on the rating plate
from that indicated on the rating plate
Make sure there is continuity between
The cables of the coil are not inserted cable and terminal and if necessary
correctly in the terminals reconnect the cables of the coil to the
terminals
The connections in the power supply Check the connections using the
circuit are wrong relevant wiring diagram
The closing coil is damaged Replace the coil
The circuit-breaker Perform the closing operation
doesn't close when the The operating mechanism is blocked manually; if the fault persists contact
closing coil is powered ABB
Unlock the lock in open position using
The open position key lock is activated
the relevant key
The circuit-breaker is in an
intermediate position between
connected and test or the trip unit Complete the rack-in operation
pushbutton is pressed (withdrawable
version)
Make sure that undervoltage coil is
The undervoltage coil is not energized
energized properly
Correct operating condition. If
The opening coil is permanently
necessary, disconnect the power from
energized
the opening coil
The racking out crank handle is
Remove the crank
inserted (withdrawable version)
The circuit-breaker
doesn't open when the
The operating mechanism is blocked Contact ABB
opening pushbutton is
pressed

Continued on the next page

257 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Faults Possible causes Suggestions

The operating mechanism is blocked Contact ABB
Measure the voltage: it should not be
The power supply voltage of the
lower than 85 % of the rated voltage
auxiliary circuits is too low
of the coil
The power supply voltage is different
Use the correct voltage
The circuit-breaker from that indicated on the rating plate
doesn't open when the Make sure there is continuity between
opening coil is powered The cables of the coil are not inserted cable and terminal and if necessary
correctly in the terminals reconnect the cables of the coil to the
terminals
The connections of the power supply Check the connections using the
circuit are wrong relevant wiring diagram
The opening coil is damaged Replace the coil
The circuit-breaker
Perform the opening operation
doesn't open despite
The operating mechanism is blocked manually; if the fault persists contact
the command of the
ABB
undervoltage coil
It is not possible to
charge the closing
The operating mechanism is blocked Contact ABB
springs by means of the
manual charging lever
Make sure there is continuity between
The cables of the gearmotor are not cable and terminal and if necessary
inserted correctly in the terminals reconnect the cables of the gearmotor
to the terminals
It is not possible to The connections of the power supply Check the connections using the
charge the closing circuit are wrong relevant wiring diagram
springs by means of the
The circuit-breaker is in disconnected Switch the circuit-breaker to the test
gearmotor
position or connected position
The gearmotor protection internal fuse
Replace the fuse
has tripped
The gearmotor is damaged Replace the gearmotor
It is not possible to press
Press the opening pushbutton in order
the button in order to
The circuit-breaker is closed to allow the insertion of the crank with
insert the racking out
the circuit-breaker open
crank handle
See chapters "Circuit breaker racking-
The racking-in/racking-out operation is
It is not possible to insert not performed correctly in/racking-out operations" on pages
the moving part in the 150 158
fixed part The moving part is incompatible with Check the compatibility between the
the fixed part moving part and the fixed part
It is not possible to lock The opening pushbutton is not being Press the opening pushbutton and
the circuit-breaker in the pressed activate the lock
open position The lock in open position is defective Contact ABB
Check Trip coil connection and
Trip coil is not connected properly
It is not possible to messages on display
perform the trip test CB trip signal has not been reset Press the reset pushbutton
The busbar current is greater than zero Correct operating condition.

Continued on the next page

258 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Faults Possible causes Suggestions

It is not possible to remove
Discharge the closing springs of the
the circuit-breaker from the Fail Safe lock active
command
disconnected position
Wrong threshold/time/curve selected Correct parameters
Trip times different than Thermal memory enabled Disable it if it is not necessary
expected Zone selectivity enabled Disable it if it is not necessary
Incorrect neutral selection Modify the neutral selection
Correct operating condition with
Rapid trip with I3 = Off linst trip
short circuit at high current
Incorrect selection of the sensor Set internal or external sensor
High ground-fault current, but Correct operating condition (see use
no trip occurs Function G inhibited owing to high
cases in the chapter that describes
current
the protection)
No auxiliary supply or currents lower
Correct operating condition.
Display off and/or not backlit than minimum turn-on values
Temperature outside range Correct operating condition.
Current below the minimum
Correct operating condition.
threshold that can be displayed
Incorrect frequency setting Set frequency
Harmonic distortion and/or crest
Correct operating condition.
Measurements incorrect or factor off range
absent (current, voltage, etc) Incorrect connection between Check connections between
isolation transformer and isolation transformer and
Measurement module Measurement module
Rated voltage parameter setting
Set the correct parameters
Error
The expected trip does not Correct operating condition. Enable
Trip excluded
occur trip if necessary
No auxiliary power supply and/or
Opening data not displayed Correct operating condition.
battery low
The PIN has been disabled or has
Operating condition correct; consult
The PIN is not required already been entered in the same
chapter relating to the PIN
programming session
Impossible to change any of
Trip unit in alarm condition Correct operating condition.
the parameters
Trip unit set remotely Set it in local mode
The language cannot be The circuit-breaker is not open Open the circuit-breaker
changed One of the possible power supplies Power the trip unit with Vaux, Ekip
is not present T&P or Ekip TT
Contact ABB or consult document
PIN error PIN wrong or lost
1SDH001501R0001
Communication problems Circuit-breaker in withdrawn
Insert modules, set circuit-breaker to
with Ekip Com, Ekip Link or position, Vaux absent or modules
Connected position, connect Vaux
Ekip Signalling not inserted properly
State of CB Position field not Check for presence of Ekip Com
Absence of Ekip Com or Ekip Link
aligned with circuit-breaker or Ekip Link modules and connect
modules, or contact S75I
position contact S75/I

Continued on the next page

259 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Faults Possible causes Suggestions

The connections or supplies of the
opening/closing actuators are not Check connections and supplies
correct
Circuit-breaker fails to react
Absence of auxiliary power supply to Check supplies and status of Power
to opening/closing command
Ekip Touch LEDs
from Ekip Touch
Circuit-breaker is in a condition Check circuit-breaker documentation
which fails to enable the selected and cases that fail to enable
command command
1. If closed, open CB in the manual
mode and check changed status.
2. Press iTest, check that the signal
has disappeared from the display
One or more of the following
and the general status of the alarms.
conditions:
TRIP fail signaling: Trip Fail 3. Check the conditions of the wiring
• Trip coil not working
command (BF) and internal contacts
• status contacts not working
4. Working in safety conditions,
• faulty internal wiring
close the CB and perform a trip test
via the trip unit

Contact ABB if problems persist

260 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Programming errors If during the programming of the parameters an attempt is made to violate certain limitations, the trip unit
blocks the saving procedure and signals the error:
Type of error Error description
2I Th > 15kA Threshold I31 (protection 2I) > 15kA
30006 Parameter change not completed on display within five minutes
30007 Attempt at remote control with Trip unit configuration in the local mode
30008 Attempt at local control with Trip unit configuration in the remote mode
30011 Error in Ekip Link list of actors
More than one Time Sync source (IEEE1588 or SNTP) on one single
30012
module or between different modules
30013 Network Analyzer parameter control unsuccessful
Active Power Fail Threshold P23 (protection UP) ≥ Threshold P26 (protection OP)
Modification of datalogger parameters not allowed with datalogger
DLog not stopped
function not stopped
D Th ≥ I Th Threshold I7 (protection D) ≥ Threshold I3 (protection I)
Zone selectivity enabling of protection D not allowed with zone
D Zone Sel = On while S / S2 / I /
selectivity already active for one among protections S, S2, I, G, Gext
G / Gext / MDGF = On
or MDGF
Threshold I4 (protection G) or Threshold I41 (protection Gext or
G Th > 1200A
MDGF) > 1200A with CB in standard configuration UL
G or Gext or MDGF > 1200A protection threshold start up with CB in
G Startup Th > 1200A
standard configuration UL
G FT time = 50 ms is not valid Trip time I4 (protection G) = 50 ms
Trip time t4 (protetion G) > 400ms with CB in standard configuration
G Time> 400 ms
UL
Trip time t41 (protetion Gext or MDGF) > 400ms with CB in standard
Gext Time> 400 ms
configuration UL
Gext FT time = 50ms isn't valid Trip time I41 (protection G) = 50 ms
High priority alarm Modification of parameters not allowed during protection times
I and MCR enabled together Protections I and MCR are mutually exclusive
L Th ≥ S Th Threshold I1 (protection L) ≥ Threshold I2 (protection S)
L Th ≥ S2 Th Threshold I1 (protection L) ≥ Threshold I5 (protection S2)
Protection curve L different from t=k/I 2 with CB in standard
L curve different to I 2t=k
configuration UL
L Th >980A Threshold I1 (protetion I)> 980A with CB in standard configuration UL
Configuration of neutral protection must conform to formula: I1 (A) ≥ Iu
Neutral configuration error
(A) x Ne config / 100
OV Threshold > 828 V Threshold U9 (Protection OV) > 828V (690 x1.2)
OV2 Threshold > 828 V Threshold U16 (Protection OV2) > 828V (690 x1.2)
Activation of toroid Rc is not allowed without the presence of a model
RC toroid error
Rc rating plug
RQ Q24 ≥ Q27 Threshold Q24 ≥ Threshold Q25 (Protection RQ)
S Th ≥ I Th Threshold I2 (Protection S) ≥ Threshold I3 (Protection I)
S2 Th ≥ I Th Threshold I5 (Protection S2) ≥ Threshold I3 (Protection I)
Trip time t2 (protetion S) > 400ms with CB in standard configuration
S Time > 400 ms
UL
Trip time t5 (protetion S2) > 400ms with CB in standard configuration
S2 Time> 400 ms
UL
Error in configuration of parameters of protection S (V) or S2 (V);
S(V) or S2(V) parameters
consult user manual of Trip unit for the limits
Inconsistency of Synchrocheck protection parameters: Delta phase ≥
SYNCHRO parameters error
180 x Delta freq x [minimum correspondence time + 0.0023]
V DIR Th > 690*1.4 Protection threshold VDIR > 828V (690 x1.2)
VS Th > 690*1.4 One of the two thresholds of protection VS Warning > 828V (690 x1.2)

261 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Alarms or failures | 1 - Identification of alarms or failures
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Self-diagnosis

Alarms and signals Alarm Tests

Ekip Touch provides a series of signals that indicate its operating state, alarms present, or configuration errors
in progress.
The signals are provided:
• By LEDs, as described on page 36.
• By messages on the diagnosis bar.
The messages on the diagnostics bar can be divided into three categories: self-diagnosis, protection or
measurement alarms, and programming error.

Alarms displayed and A list of faults that may appear on the Ekip Touch display is given below along with suggestions on how to
suggestions resolve them:
Signal Suggestions
Numerical alarm (e.g.
Internal error; contact ABB if this typoe of error occurs
30002)
Battery low Change the battery (See 1SDH001000R0509 kit sheet)
Unit on with auxiliary supply, Local Bus parameter enabled but connection
to modules not present, incorrect or communication lost (for more than five
Local bus seconds); check:
• connection and powering of modules in terminal box or external
• that the moldules connected are compatible with Ekip Touch
CB undefined Check the circuit-breaker status signal contacts
CB has failed to open and/or current still present after a TRIP command:
Trip fail command (BF) comply with the procedure proposed in the next chapter 'Faults, causes and
remedies'
Protection parameter configuration error: make sure that threshold I4 and time
t4 are compatible with the minimum values required for self-supply
Check:
• Rating plug of model compatible with Ekip Touch and CB size
Configuration • If present, protection parameters do not conflict with size of current of unit
details on page 20 51)
• In the absence of Vaux threshold I4 and/or I41 > 100 A
• In the absence of Vaux time t4 and/or t41 > 100 ms
• RC protection active and Rating Plug not RC
Invalid Date Wrong date and time: set in Settings-System-Date and Settings-System-Time
Problem of Ekip Com Hub module with: certificates, connected devices,
Ekip Com Hub missing Com modules (RTU or with Ethernet connection), API TLS device, Hub
events, parsar configuration
Fault in Ekip Link module: check for loss of connection with one or more actors
Ekip Link Bus
(modules) connected to Link Bus
Ekip Sign 3T connection Alarm for connection of one or more analog inputs to Ekip Signalling 3T module
One or more thresholds of the Ekip Signalling 3T module has/have been
Ekip Sign 3T threshold
exceeded
Internal error Internal error; contact ABB if this typoe of error occurs
Fault with Ekip Com modules: synchronization problem of SNTP
SNTP error
synchronization reference module
Measuring Error Measurement module parameter reading error, contact ABB
Ethernet disconnected No external cable on one or more Ekip Com modules with Ethernet connection
IEEE1588 synch Synchronization problem of IEEE 1588 synchronization reference module
Ekip Com module detected with incorrect / not allowed MAC address, contact
MAC Address
ABB.

Continued on the next page

262 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Alarms or failures | 2 - Self-diagnosis

 Continued from the previous page ABB | SACE Emax 2

Signal Suggestions
Ekip Installation Installation error between HMI and Mainboard, contact ABB
Install Measurement module (Settings-Circuit breaker-Installation-Measuring-
Measuring installation
Install) menu
Install Rating Plug (Settings-Circuit breaker-Rating Plug-Install menu) and check
RatingPlugInstallation
connection if there are further faults
Maintenance alarm: perform maintenance and then reset the alarm via Ekip
Maintenance
Connect (see 1SDH001330R1002)
PC Power exceed The average power limit setting of the Power Controller has been exceeded
Rating plug Rating plug not present, value or size incompatible with Ekip Touch parameters
Zone Selectivity Diag Error in zone selectivity connections (Hardware Selectivity)
Toroid S.G.R. Check connection and state of current sensor
Fault in connection of sensors to Trip unit; check status of sensors, including
Sensor L1/L2/L3/Ne external Neutral, or call ABB
Check current sensors, status of terminal and cables connecting to Ekip Touch
TFTP server enabled and/or configuration session open on module Ekip Com
Configuration Session
IEC61850 or Ekip Hub
The software versions between Mainboard and display (Ekip Touch) are not
compatible with each other: To restore compatibility, please consult ABB.
NOTE: modification of all parameters is inhibited via display; if present,
Software Not Compatible
protections L, I and Iinst are active and function with the parameters prior
to the alarm (parameters of previous unit are active if display has been
replaced)
CB status CB state incorrect (esample: current present but CB in open state)
Switchboard Actor
Check configuration and connection of Ekip Link module
communication Error
Disconnection of Trip coil detected, check functionality
TC disconnected
Check Trip coil, status of the terminal and cables connecting to Ekip Touch
Contact Wear Make sure that the contacts/poles are in good condition.

Protections
In the event of protection or measurement alarms, the associated signals are reported:
Signal Type of alarm
Trip test performed signal. Press iTEST to reset the
Trip Test
message
Protection timing (for example: L timing) Specific protection in time delay mode
Protection prealarm (for example: Prealarm G) Specific protection in prealarm
Specific protection, configured with trip disabled, in
Protection (Trip off) [for example: S (Trip off) ]
alarm state
2I Protection Active 2I Protection active
Current threshold 1 I1 / 2 I1 exceeded and in alarm
Load LC1 / Load LC2
state
Current threshold Iw1 / Iw2 exceeded and in alarm
Iw1 Warning / Iw2 Warning
state
Harmonic dist. Harmonic Distortion protection in alarm state
Power factor measurement (cos φ) less than set
Power factor
threshold
Phase cycle Phase sequence protection in alarm state
Frequency Frequency measured off range (<30 Hz or >80 Hz)
5th harmonic above Th / I sopra Th / THD I above Single or total harmonic measurement above
Th / THD V above Th threshold

263 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Alarms or failures | 2 - Self-diagnosis

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Predictive analysis program

1 - Presentation

Objectives Routine maintenance has always been considered a good way to maintain a high level of efficiency in the
installation, but it is also a cost item linked to the frequency with which it is performed.
Maintenance work can be promptly organized thanks to application of the new digital technologies and
constant monitoring of the vital parameters of the circuit-breaker during normal daily operation.
The ability to estimate the exact time that maintenance must be performed optimizes all aspects concerning
maintenance itself: plant efficiency, management of costs and investments, continuity of service.
This condition is known as predictive maintenance.

Proposal In ABB low voltage air circuit-breakers, the system that monitors and identifies the moment in which
maintenance is required is made available thanks to the Predict function in the ABB Ability Electrical
Distribution Control System (EDCS).
When it is connected to Cloud, the circuit-breaker continuously transmits a set of data which, once organized
and analyzed by algorithms, supply a trend with the state of aging of the circuit-breaker.

Operating principle The main factors that influence circuit-breaker aging are:
• The number of electrical and mechanical openings (switches).
• The interrupted current (%In, short-circuit, overload, etc...).
• Environmental factors such as temperature, humidity, dust, corrosion, ...
Constant evolution of these data and their combination affect circuit-breaker aging, which can be more or
less rapid.
An indication of the condition of the circuit-breaker and, above all, of the date when maintenance should next
be performed can be obtained by monitoring these data by means of Predictive Maintenance in ABB Ability
EDCS.
If something happens to the circuit-breaker during its normal operation, this data item is updated as a
consequence.

Advantages Any prompt identification of potential problems allows action to be taken:

• So as to optimize the way that the required resources are managed (organization of personnel, shorter
lead times for support - thus shorter downtimes,...) .
• On the quality processes and supply of replacement parts.
• So as to enhance customer satisfaction by ensuring that the installations are increasingly efficient.

264 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Predictive analysis program | 1 - Presentation
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

2 - Service offers

Analysis programs Two preventive analysis programs are available:

LEAP Easy Predictive maintenance

Name
Audit in ABB Ability EDCS
User Customer ABB Service
Circuit-breaker state of aging [on statistical basis] X
Circuit-breaker state of aging [analysis] X
Maintenance X

LEAP Easy Audit On the basis of the environmental and specific operating conditions of the circuit-breaker in different types of
installation, LEAP AUDIT EASY provides a simple analysis using statistical data for the purpose of obtaining
an estimation of the conditions of the circuit-breaker itself.
LEAP EASY AUDIT can be performed by the actual client, free of charge, after registration in the dedicated
WEB page (link).

Procedure
1. The client registers in the dedicated WEB page (link). (link).
2. Waiting for mail with credentials to access software online and directly enter certain data concerning
use of the circuit-breaker (serial number of circuit-breaker, application, average annual environmental
conditions and number of operations (opening sequences) since installation).
3. Once this general information has been entered, the customer received a report via mail describing
the condition of his circuit-breaker.
The result is an analysis purely based on statistical data in the absence of access to the complete operating
data of the circuit-breaker.

Predictive maintenance in ABB A section dedicated to predictive maintenance can be activated in ABB Ability EDCS and used to supervise
Ability EDCS the conditions of the ABB air circuit-breakers connected in ABB Ability EDCS.
If a maintenance contract has been drawn up with ABB service, evidence of maintenance efficacy will also
be apparent in ABB Ability EDCS.

265 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Predictive analysis program | 2 - Service offers
 ABB | SACE Emax 2

Service

1 - Power Care

Foreword The number of devices that make up an electrical installation varies so greatly that it can be difficult to
manage them, even for a very expert installation manager.
To ensure the availability and reliability of electrification systems, ABB offers PowerCare, a wide range
of service packages tailored to the type of company, with custom support solutions based on customer
requirements.

Description The PowerCare platform is based on a matrix of services that the customer selects, according to his own
needs, when the service contract is activated. The proposed services range from the possibility of having
dedicated access, through a portal PowerCare, to a complete range of support services for each type
switchgear and controlgear.
All the services are supplied by qualified and certified ABB personnel.

Services The PowerCare matrix consists of 20 products subdivided into five service areas and four levels:

Service Area Each service area represents a service offered by ABB technical support:

Area Offered service

Skill Development Training on the maintenance to be carried out on ABB products installed at the
Services customer site.
Emergency Maintenance
Rapid support for any emergency situation.
Service
Diagnosis & Condition An indication of the state of health of the various products installed with any
Assessment restoration actions necessary to reduce fault risks.
Assistance for implementing an internal maintenance strategy for the
Self-Maintenance customer's organization for carrying out specific tasks. The customer's
Services maintenance staff can access the product documentation by contacting ABB
experts, online or by accessing private folders directly.
Delivered maintenance Maintenance of the products installed in order to maintain their good state of
Services health through preventive maintenance plans.

Levels The levels represent the extent of the service offered: the higher the level the greater the expertise of the
service and of the ABB design engineers put at the disposal of the customer to support him.

266 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Service | 1 - Power Care

 ABB | SACE Emax 2

267 | © 2020 ABB | 1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A Service | 1 - Power Care

1SDH001330R1002 - ECN000134959 - Rev. A